HomeMy WebLinkAboutSEPA EPIC-337-86 - RADOVICH DEVELOPMENT - FORT DENT OFFICE BUILDINGFORT DENT OFFICE PARK-
TWO STORY OFFICE
BUILDING
6720 SOUTHCENTER BLVD.
INTERURBAN AVE S. &
SOUTHCENTER BLVD.
EPIC 337 -86
January 6, 1987
Mr. Jerry Leavitt
Real Property Division
500A King County Admin. Bldg.
500 Fourth Avenue
Seattle, Washington 98104
Dear Jerry:
Subject: SPECIAL USE PERMIT REQUEST FOR TUKWILA TRAILS
The City of Tukwila is requesting a Special Use Permit from the County to
construct a recreational trail on County -owned property. The attached
drawing shows the location of the trail section which is at the entrance of
Fort Dent Park.
If the Special Use Permit is approved, we anticipate the asphalt trail
would be built this year. The trail will be built by the developer for the
City who is constructing an office building on the abutting property to the
west of the County's entrance road. The City will establish the specifica-
tions for the trail, and will be responsible for its maintenance and any
liability problems related to the trail's use or maintenance.
We would like the permit for as long as possible. We anticipate this sec-
tion of trail will serve as part of the City's Green River Trail for many,
many years.
The trail will be built of asphalt. It will be 8 feet wide and approxi-
mately 160 feet long. The asphalt wil be two inches thick with two inches
of crushed rock base.
Thank you for considering our request. Please contact me at 433 -1843 if
you have any questions or if I can provide additional information.
Sincerely,
Don Williams, Director
Parks and Recreation Department
DW /sjn
RICHARD J. THOMPSON
Director
STATE OF WASHINGTON
•
DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPM
OFFICE OF ARCHAEOLOGY AND HISTORIC PRESERVATION
111 West Twenty -First Avenue, KL -11 • Olympia, Washington 98504 -5411 • (206) 753 -4011 • SCAN 234 -4011
N
EZf 2C 1986
CITY OF TUKVVILA
PLANNING DEPT,
December 19, 1986
Mr. L. Rick Beeler
Planning Director
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila, WA 98188
Log Reference: 858- C -KI -03
Re: Fort Dent Office Building
EPIC 337 -86
Dear Mr. Beeler:
Thank you for providing the archaeological survey report for the Fort
Dent Office Building development. The professional's report indicates
no archaeological resources were discovered. In the event that
archaeological resources are discovered during ground disturbing
activities, please notify this office'.
dw
Sincerely,
Robert G. Whitlam,, Ph.D.
State Archaeologist
(206) 753 -4405
Archaeology and Historic Preservation • Community Services • Emergency Management • Fire
Protection Services • Local Development and Housing • Local Government Services • Public Works
3
WASHINGTON STATE OFF. OF ARCH.
111 West 21st St., KL -11.
Olympia, WA 98504
WASHINGTON STATE DEPT OF ECOLOGY
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW SECTION
SHORELINES DIVISION
BARAN HALL
MS PV -11
Olympia, WA 98504 -8711
WASHINGTON STATE DEPT OF FISHERIES WASHINGTON STATE DEPT OF ECOLOGY
115 General Admin Building . SEPA DIVISION
Olympia WA 98504 ABBOTT RAPHAEL
MS PV -11
OLYMPIA, WA 98504 -8711
KING COUNTY SURFACE WATER MGMT
701 DEXTER HORTON BLDG
710 SECOND AVENUE
SEATTLE, WA 98104
LA_ /4,---,Z2,1
'to- - - -A--
3-06..gdo„,„(_.
.7000 la4" 54-oz Ne
Sue 43/o3
Oaleclu. (»4
MR. ROBERT G. WHITTAM, Ph.D.
State Archaeologist
111 West 21st Avenue, KL -11'
.Olympia, WA 98504
411
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila Washington 98188
(206) 433 -1800
Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor
December 8,1986
Mr. Robert G. Whittam, Ph.D.
State Archaeologist
111 West 21st Avenue, KL -11
Olympia, Washington 98504
Dear Dr. Whittam:
Subject: Fort Dent Office Building - EPIC 337 -86
Enclosed is a copy of the cultural resources survey that was conducted of
the site in 1982. Although archival research would indicate that the site
is a potential historic site, a field reconnaissance has shown that the
physical disturbance that has occurred has "eradicated" any such materials.
Part of the applicant's proposal is to cut into the bank within the river
environment (40 feet from the mean high water) to enlarge the river chan-
nel. The field survey has stated that this strip along the bank is undis-
turbed. To appropriately mitigate, based on the information provided by
the survey, the City feels that when cut and grading occurs along the river
bank, if cultural material is unearthed, work should stop, and the State
Office of Archaeology and Historic Preservation notified. An historic
marker is premature because factual documentation of the site is currently
unavailable.
The mitigating measure pertaining to the site's history is therefore
revised to reflect the above recommendation.
Sincerely,
MCB /sjn
enclosure
L. Rick Beeler
Planning Director
•
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila Washington 98188
(206) 433 -1800
Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor
TO:
FROM: 440/#9" 1 (iJ
DATE: // /070 /a,Cp
SUBJECT: /C� ft/ /I/1 /Q���
OP/7071.
MEMORANDUM
*Refr Glf5r-/S i ' erga- 4.5a 0 -ism
6 0 A W a e / C - - 1 77,
L.u. /1_ . _i1G.r
cc4Y. 7a- 3630 7-1/
alesuE 3a3 -7SW
p'. A4 CS -a9) 9'3- ��g9
/4,0 o r (02_,A s�e/p ter✓ �a2� v� 5 �rE
9el �i9aS 66440 ssiv -►) .6e �
t
D
AZ II
CitlO of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
- Tukwila Washington 98188
(206) 433 -1800
Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor
LETTER OF
TRANSMITTAL
TO Dr. Jim Chatters
CWAS, INSB Room 320
Central Washington University
Ellensburg, WA 98926
DATE 11/20/86
REGARDING Manuscript on Green River
WE ARE SENDING YOU THE FOLLOWING
3
Attached EJUnder separate cover
COPIES DESCRIPTION
1
THESE ARE TRANSMITTED
Check for copy of manuscript 0 For approval
0 For review and comment
0 For your use and information
As requested
0 Other
COMMENTS Per our conversation of last week, I am sending you a check for $4.00
for a xerox of your manuscript on yourr.esearch of the Green River North of I -405,
at the entrance to Fort Dent Park.
(LOT /50)
November 5, 1986
Moira Carr Bradshaw
Planning Department
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Blvd.
Tukwila, WA 98188
Subject: Fill and Excavation Detail - Fort Dent Office Building
Dear Moira:
Section B.1.e of the environmental checklist requests specific
information regarding filling and grading. We were unable to answer
this question when the application was submitted as part of the
Shoreline Use Permit and BAR review in May. We now have more detail and
offer the following information.
B. Environmental Elements:
1. Earth
e. Describe the purpose, type and approximate quantities of any
filling or grading proposed. Indicate source of fill.
As per Ring County Flood Zone Control Permit No. 2 -1622, we will
be excavating approximately 800 cubic yards of material from the
bank of the Green River. This material will be disposed of off -
site.
Other excavation includes approximately 5500 cubic yards of
material. A four -foot cut on the southern half of the building
area is required to attain a suitable building site. The remain-
der is general on -site grading.
Filling of the site includes 1600 cubic yards of structural fill
below the footings and slab and 300 cubic yards of fill material
throughout the paved areas. The fill for the paved areas will
only be used if during site grading, adequate compaction of
existing soils cannot be achieved and removal of these unsuit-
able soils becomes necessary. Any new fills will be taken from
on -site excavation materials.
2� 000 - 124th Ave. N.E. B -103 Bellevue, WA 98005 (206) 454 -6060
C.Radovich Development Corp.
HMO
NOV 6 19861
CITY (3-171.1i v LA I
PLANNING DEPT.
• •
Lastly, Earth Consultants has recommended the placement of
approximately 2200 cubic yards of surcharge fill in the build-
ing area. This fill is required to induce settlement and will
remain in place for approximately four weeks, then.will be
removed off -site.
I trust I have answered the above question in enough detail. If you
have any questions, please call.
Cordially,
42/1-6&
Katie Greif
Development Manager
lr
J‘METRO
Municipality of Metropolitan Seattle
Exchange Bldg. • 821 Second Ave., Seattle, Washington 98104
July 28, 1986
Brad Collins
Planning Director
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila, Washington 98188
Determination of Non - Significance
EPIC 337 -86: John C. Radovich
Dear Mr. Collins:
•
IN,011,11WIR
JUL 9 1986
CITY OF TUKvviLA
PLANNING DEPT.
Metro staff has reviewed this proposal and anticipates no
significant adverse impacts to its wastewater facilities.
Water Quality
The project is adjacent to Green River which has been
designated by Metro as a major water body of regional
significance where the protection of water quality is a high
priority. In order to protect water quality at Green
River, we strongly recommend that erosion control measures
be fully implemented during construction and that permanent
detention /retention facilities be built such that they can
handle increased storm water flows. We recommend that
mitigating measures should include, but not restricted to
the following:
- construction timing and staging;
- provisions for maintaining adequate setbacks and riparian
vegetation;
- preventing toxic materials, petrochemicals and other
pollutants from entering the surface waters during and
after construction;
- regular maintenance of detention system; and
- temporary sedimentation control system during
construction (e.g. straw bales, silt fence, etc.).
Public Transportation
Since most part of Tukwila is experiencing traffic
congestion, every effort should be taken to reduce
dependence on single occupant vehicles (SOV). Therefore,
Metro recommends that the following Transportation System
Management (TSM) measures be taken:
1. Establish an Employee Transportation Coordinator.
2. Provide preferential car /vanpool parking.
3. Provide HOV transportation subsidies (transit pass or
car /vanpool subsidies).
• •
Brad Collins
July 28, 1986
Page Two
4. Conduct periodic promotions.
5. Sell Metro monthly bus passes.
6. Encourage flexible work hours where feasible.
7. Post transit /rideshare information and distribute to
existing and new employees.
8. Distribute ridematch applications annually.
9. Provide secure bicycle parking.
For further information or questions, contact Carol Thompson
at 625 -7701.
Thank you for the opportunity to review and comment.
Very truly yours,
))%i-rei
Gregory M. Bush, Manager
Environmental Planning Division
GMB:law
JACOB THOMAS
Director
• srere •
STATE OF WASHINGTON
OFFICE OF ARCHAEOLOGY AND HISTORIC PRESERVATION
111 West Twenty -First Avenue, KL -11 • Olympia, Washington 98504 • (206) 753 -4011
July 28, 1986
Mr. Brad Collins
Planning Director
Tukwila Planning Department
6200 Southcenter Blvd.
Tukwila, WA 98188
Log Reference: 802- C -KI -03
Re: Fort Dent Office Building
Dear Mr. Collins:
A staff review has been completed of your mitigated determination of
nonsignificance. We suggest that you consider the performance of a
cultural resources survey of the subject property to identify if
historic preservation concerns are an issue. If such remains are
disclosed, it would seem appropriate to develop mitigation measures
including historic or archaeological interpretive materials.
dw
Sincerely,
Robert G. Whitlam, Ph.D.
State Archaeologist
(206) 753 -4405
JUL 29 19861
cs91- 'W..La- 1 Uo;vk lLA
PLANNING DEPT.
ANDREA BEATTY RINIKER
Director
STATE OF WASHINGTON
DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY
Mail Stop PV -11 • Olympia, Washington 98504 -8711 • (206) 459 -6000
July 22, 1986
Mr. Brad Collins
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila, WA 98188
Dear Mr. Collins:
MNIEFLEM
[:7 23 1986
CITY OF TilKVVgLA
PLANNING DEPT,
Thank you for the opportunity to comment on the determination of
nonsignificance for the Fort Dent Office Building proposed by
Mr. John Radovich. We reviewed the environmental checklist and
have the following comments.
The proposed project will require a shoreline substantial development
permit. The project must comply with the goals and standards of the
local shoreline master program.
If you have any questions, please call Ms. Linda Rankin of the
Shorelands Division at (206) 459 - 6763.
Sincerely,
Barbara J. Ritchie
Environmental Review Section
BJR:
cc: Linda Rankin
WAC 197 -11 -970
MITIGATED
DETERMINATION OF NONSIGNIFICANCE
Description of Proposal Fort Dent Office Building{- 39.750 square foot3.two story
Proponent]dhn C. Radovich
Location of Proposal, including street address, if any Approximately 6720 Southcenter
Boulevard which is north of I 405 and east of Interurban Avenue South.
Lead Agency: City of Tukwila File No. EPIC- - 337 -86
The lead agency for this proposal has determined that it does not have a probable
significant adverse impact on the environment. An environmental impact statement
(EIS) is not required under RCW 43.21C.030(2)(c). This decision was made after
review of a completed environmental checklist and other information on file with the
lead agency. This information is available to the public on request.
(� There is no comment period for this DNS
This.DNS is issued under 197 -11- 340(2). Comments must be submitted by
July 23, 1986 . The lead agency will not act on this
proposal for 15 days from the date below.
Responsible Official Brad Collins
Position /Title Planning Director
Phone 433 -1845
Address 6200 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188
Date 7 -1 - gc
Signature
You may appeal this determination to the City Clerk at City Hall, 6200 Southcenter
Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 no later than 10 days from the above date by written
appeal stating the basis of the appeal for specific factual objections. You may be
required to bear some of the expenses for an appeal.
Copies of the procedures for SEPA appeals are available with the City Clerk and
Planning Department.
FM.DNS
410
City of Tukwila
6200 Southcenter Boulevard
Tukwila Washington 98188
(206) 433 -1800
Gary L. VanDusen, Mayor
MITIGATION MEASURES
DNS for
FORT DENT OFFICE BUILDING
1. Geotechnical study being submitted with building permit application.
2. Dedication of trail and access easement along and on top of dike.
3. Construction of archeological interpretive display per requirements of
the Washington State Department of Archeology and Historical Preservation
and the City of Tukwila, along the public access easement.
4. Construct sidewalk along northeast property line adjacent to Fort Dent
access road.
CHE V_IST: ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW MAII T GS
( ) U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS
( ) FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION
Federal Agencies
( )U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
( )U.S. DEPARTMENT OF. H.U.D. (Region X)
State Agencies
( )() WA.ST. OFFICE OF ARCHAEOLOGY ( ) WA.ST. DEPT. OF SOCIAL & HEALTH SERVICES
( ) WA.ST. TRANSPORTATION DEPT. 3J cfl-,( rC)WA.ST. DEPT. OF ECOLOGY, SHORELANDS DIVISIOI
(jam) WA.ST. DEPT. OF FISHERIES ,, ` "``- OWA.ST. DEPT. OF ECOLOGY, SEPA DIVISION
( ) OFFICE OF THE GOVERNOR '�; ''''''�( )WA.ST. DEPT. OF GAME
( ) WA.ST. PLANNING & COMMUNITY AFFAIRS AGENCY ( )OFFICE OF ATTORNEY GENERAL
County Agencies
( ) K.C. DEPT. OF PLANNING & COMMUNITY DEVEL.
( ) FIRE DISTRICT 18
( ) BOUNDARY REVIEW BOARD
(K) K . C . $u nlinn2TIC
( ) SOUTH CENTRAL SCHOOL DISTRICT
( ) TUKWILA LIBRARY
( ) RENTON LIBRARY
( ) KENT LIBRARY
( ) ,PACIFIC NORTHWEST BELL TELEPHONE
( ) SEATTLE CITY LIGHT
( ) WASHINGTON NATURAL GAS
( ) WATER DISTRICT 75
( ) SEATTLE WATER DEPARTMENT
( ) GROUP W CABLE
( ) KENT PLANNING DEPARTMENT
( ) TUKWILA BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT
( ) TUKWILA MAYOR
( ) TUKWILA CITY DEPARTMENTS:
( ) Public Works
( ) Parks and Recreation
( ) Police
( ) Fire
( ) Finance
( ) Planning /Building
( )FIRE DISTRICT 1
( )FIRE DISTRICT 24
( )K.C. BLDG & LAND DEVEL.DIV. -SEPA INFO CNTR
Schools /Libraries
( )HIGHLINE SCHOOL DISTRICT
( )KING COUNTY PUBLIC LIBRARY
( )SEATTLE MUNICIPAL REFERENCE LIBRARY
Utilities
( ) PUGET SOUND POWER & LIGHT
( )VAL -VUE SEWER DISTRICT
( )WATER DISTRICT 20
( )WATER DISTRICT 25
( )WATER DISTRICT 125
( )UNION PACIFIC RAILROAD
City Agencies
( ) RENTON PLANNING DEPARTMENT
( )TUKWILA PLANNING COMMISSION
( )TUKWILA CITY COUNCIL MEMBERS
( ) Edgar Bauch
( ) Marilyn Stoknes
( ) Joe Duffie
( ) Mabel Harris
( ) Charlie Simpson
( ) Doris Phelps
( ) Wendy Morgan
Other Local Agencies
( ) PUGET SOUND COUNCIL OF GOVERNMENT (PSCOG)
( ) PUGET SOUND AIR POLLUTION CONTROL AGENCY
( ) TUKWILA /SEA TAC CHAMBER OF COMMERCE
Media
( ) DAILY JOURNAL OF COMMERCE
( ) RENTON RECORD CHRONICLE
( )METRO ENVIRONMENTAL PLANNING DIVISION
Office /Industrial 10,000 gsf or more
Residential 50 units or more
Retail 100,000 gsf or more
( )HIGHLINE TIMES
( )SEATTLE TIMES
C 7UKWILA •CN-85-367
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM REEIVED EPIC -337 -86
VW 1
BY ,
TUKWILA RF`i E PREVENTION BUREAU
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: J BLDG J PLNG. [j P.W. FIRE Q POLICE 1---7 P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter Bl FILE NO.
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
DATE TRANSMITTED 6/30/86
RESPONSE REQUESTED BY
7/7/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw RESPONSE RECEIVED
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT /AM r' '1
`�
cn v/ ,'v-e,� -r- -j 6� ,1 ce,fvs v -- �� e L/ (�
S Codf e / f� -ems w, / s-ee/
DATE
3/fe,
COMMENTS PREPARED BY
6e-d4
C.P.S. Form 11
CIYY OF `iUKWILA
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM
O -85 -367
EPIC -337 -86
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: D BLDG Q PLNG n P.W. Q FIRE POLICE 17 P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter 81
DATE TRANSMITTED 6/30/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw
FILE NO.
RESPONSE REQUESTED BY
RESPONSE RECEIVED
7/7/86
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE •IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT
POLICE DEPARTMENT CONCERNS:
1. STATEMENT REFLECTS A WORKFORCE NUMBERING BETWEEN 100, and.185,
AN AVAILABILITY OF 133 PARKING SPACES AND A DAILY TRIP LOAD
OF 400 TO 700 VEHICLES A DAY (COULD BE READ...VISITORS TO BUILDING
300 TO 600 ADDITIONAL PARKING SPACES NEEDED.) POLICE .CONCERN
.IS TO WHERE ADDITIONAL EMPLOYEES AND BUILDING VISITORS WILL
PARK VEHICLES.
2. PLEASE HAVE DEVELOPER CONTACT CRIME PREVENTION PRACTIONEER FOR
LATEST INFORMATION AND TECHNIQUES RELATIVE TO PROVIDING A
QUALITY, AESTHETICALLY PLEASING, SECURITY ENVIRONMENT.
* * ** *MOIRA PLEASE PASS COMMENTS TO DEVELOPER * * *AS.PER TPS SHEET
7/7/86 p,j l
DATE COMMENTS PREPARED BY
C.P.S. Form 11
CITY OF TUKWILA
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM
41PrN -85 -367
EPIC-337 -86
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: n BLDG ri PLNG. P.W. (l FIRE r[ POLICE n P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter 81 FILE NO.
7/7/86
DATE TRANSMITTED 6/30/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw
'RESPONSE REQUESTED BY
RESPONSE RECEIVED
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT
S\DE_c,A-uzS 1?u3L■C, ADJI\-eL
Xsa\■ FlrruW:—rLLIL
"Tb G P - RN -
IN I D -2 3- - \T`I F, E ,G,'PL(411 I i 'NLS 2 u (1E0 k' LIT I urn pertmr
�v iZ12 C� I b bl C D. 6, >✓, 'N �1� k(tv(a- c&I f c .
-I4 L -0 - 14-I.S O \-'L" .V'Il N1,4T I c,I�N N�� "� YEA O-f) UN-1-1 i
"DD a C.IT`y
rn AAA Ft k_l_
s� Lwv\uL�
13 C/ G- TO LT Th e-l1-1 ST11 NOf\& S _ /6.1.th
C11 T1,3
LI Ct JR i1 ACT \\) Pc\IA-t LAU lS. —
Nl_t_7-1Zi L_1'N Csr 1\27-1\64c-11,0,J Qc lS(l N(r- s L La F7- S 119 -
-p) lc) . 1 a DZt A A�1llv.) b !`� A\)141l
GoVc•NP, L■ WNTL ?L T∎NS T (a L( Ile
COMMENTS PREPARED BY
DATE - - �Ip
C.P.S. Form 11
CITY OF T?•JKWILA
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM
IN -85 -367
EPIC - 337 -86
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: Q BLDG j PLNG, n P.W. n FIRE n POLICE n P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter B1 FILE NO.
DATE TRANSMITTED 6/30/86
RESPONSE REQUESTED BY 7/7/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw RESPONSE RECEIVED
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT
10. List any government approvals or permits that will be needed for your proposal.
Building permit, King County r oo one ontro ermit, ccupancy _erm
1j0/ and Shoreline Use permit are required.
Fisheries permit may be required.
11. Give brief, complete description of your proposal, including the proposed uses
and the size of the project and site. There are several questions later in this
checklist that ask you to describe certain aspects of your proposal. You do not
need to repeat those answers on this page. Section E requires a complete
description of the objectives and alternatives of your proposal and should not be
summarized here.
Applicant_zoposes to build a 39,750 sq. ft., two story office building.
12. Location of the proposal. Give sufficient information for a person to understand
the precise location of your proposed project, including a street address, if
any, and section, township, and range, if known. If a proposal would occur over
a range of area, provide the range or boundaries of the site(s). Provide a legal
description, site plan, vicinity map,- and topographic map, if reasonably
available. While you should submit any plans required by the agency, you are not
required to duplicate maps or detailed plans submitted with any permit applica-
tions related to this checklist.
The property is situated in Section 24, Township 23 _ancl Range dawhich is north
of I -405 and east of InterurbaLLyenue South. The property is '1 rcRtPd at the
entrance to Fort Dent Park and the building address is sP- ia.. he• 8720
Sout cuter B.Qulev r Cseg e —hi i A lfr vity man) - The 1 Pg 1 [�eccri ti nn �_
site plan and topog ,phi c mapaam attacheand _1 abet ed.
- .-
13. Does the proposal lie within an area designated on the City's Comprehensive Land
Use Policy Plan Map as environmentally sensitive?
Yes, the Green River borders the property on the West side.
' TO .SE CQIfLETED BY APPLIC( Evaluation tor
Agency Use Only
8. ENVIRONMENTAL ELEMENTS
1. Earth
a. General description of the site (circle ones
rolling, hilly, steep slopes, mountainous,
b. What is the steepest slope on the site (approximate
percent slope)? 2
c. What general types of soils are found on the site
(for example, clay, sand, gravel, peat, muck)? If
you know the classification Of agricultural soils,
rrayi and them
brownish ��nsiltaor .Loose farmland. um dehsi-ey�
were found nn the c 7 to (app rota +hpa crtj 1l_ r oport )
d. Are there surface indications or history of unstable
soils in the immediate vicinity? If so, describe.
Not known at this time.
e. Describe the purpose, type, and approximate quanti-
ties of any filling or grading proposed. Indicate
source of fill. The site will be regraded with no
import or export of fill. The purpose is'to relocate
the foundation material-on s�.te-to facilitate a
planned building elevation Under 10,000 cubic yards
will be relocated.
f. Could erosion occur as a result of clearing,
construction, or use? If so, generall.v describe.
Yes minimum erosion could occurnp. rptruotton, but all
,.. -.-pi cautions 1 be taken to control erosion.
g. About what percent of the site will be covered with
impervious surfaces after project construction (for
example, asphalt or buildings)?
C
2) Will the project require any work over, in, or
adjacent to (within 200 feet) the described
waters? If yes, please describe and attach
available plans. Yes, construction of the
building, landscaping and parking will occur
within 200 feet of the Green River.
3) Estimate the amount of fill and dredge material
that would be placed in or removed from surface
water or wetlands and indicate the area of the
site that would be affected. Indicate the
source of fill material.
No filling or dredging is anticipated but King
County may require the construction of a Tike on
the Green River Bank.
4) Will the proposal require surface water
withdrawals .or diversions? Give general
description, purpose, and approximate quan-
tities, if known. No withdrawls are required.
Surface water will be channeled and collected
by means of a storm drainage item.
5) Does the proposal lie within a 100 -year
floodplain? If so, note location on the site
plan. No.
6) Does the proposal involve any discharges of
waste materials to surface waters? If so,
describe the type of waste and anticipated
volume of discharge. Only normal automobile
related pollutants may enter surface waters.
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
r
Evaluation for
;
Agency Use Only
9. Housing
a. Approximately how many units would be provided, if
any? Indicate whether high, middle, or low- income
housing? None
b. Approximately how many units, if any, would be eli-
minated? Indicate whether high, middle, or low -
income housing. None
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control housing
impacts, if any: N/A
10. Aesthetics
a. What is the tallest height of any proposed
structure(s), not including antennas; what is the
principal exterior building material(s) proposed?
Building height. is approx. .28-30 ft., and in no_ case will equipment exceed the
code allowance of 35 ft. Roof top mechanical euipment is'6 to
and will not exceed the ode eitfier:'-"'Roof -"tof "mescal equipment will
be set back 10 ft. and screened. The principle perimeter exterior will be
(see next
b. What views in the immediate vicinity would be
page)
altered or obstructed? None
� r fi Di ✓.
:.J / l'
-be Pio
c. Proposed measures to reduce .or control aesthetic p\
impacts, if any :Attractive architectural and 41•
landscaping designs are proposed.
-13-
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
11. light and Glare
a. What type of light or glare will the proposal
roduce? What ,timq of day would it mainly occur?
Electrical illumination will be of two types. 1) Site and building'.exterior
lighting: Our intention is to use low glare lights on approx. 20 ft. stands
In conjuction with 30 inch tall low glare light bollards. 2) The other glare
element involves the exterior glass. Any building glare will be subject to
B.A.R. review but we anticipate any interior or exterior glare to be minor.
b. Could light or glare from the finished project be a
safety hazard or interfere with views? N
c. What existing off -site sources of light or glare may
affect your proposal? None
d. Proposed measures to reduce or control light and
glare impacts, if any: By use of low glare perimeter
lighting and working within the reflectancies as
approved by. B.A.R.
12. Recreation
a. What designed and informal recreational oppor-
tunities are in the immediate vicinity?
Fort Fort Dent Park
b. Would the proposed project displace any existing
recreational uses? If so, describe.
No.
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control impacts on
recreation, including recreation opportunities to be
provided by the project or applicant, if any:
A river trail along the Green River is przosed.
13. Historic and Cultural Preservation
a. Are there any places or objects listed on, or pro-
posed for, national, state, or local preservation
registers known to be on or next to the site? If
so, generally'describe•. For Dent Park
is located across the river from the site.
b. Generally describe any landmarks or evidence of
historic, archaeological, scientific, or cultural
importance known to be on or next to the site.
Fort Dent Park
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
.7?
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control impacts, if
any: None
11 ly�
14. Transportation
a. Identify public streets and highways serving the
site, and describe proposed acc'ss to the existing
street system. Show on site plants, if any.
Interurban Avenue South, Interstate 405 and
Southcenter Boulevard. Ingress and egress will be
from Southcenter Boulevard.
b. Is the site currently served by public transit? If
not, what is the approximate distance to the nearest
transit stop? Not directly, although there is a bus
route along Interurban Avenue South.
c. How many parking spaces would the completed project
have? How many would the project eliminate?
133 parking spaces are proposed, none will be
eliminated.
;ITY OF TUKWILA
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM
•CN -85-367
EPIC -337-86
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: BLDG n PLNG. n P.W. n FIRE (i POLICE P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter B1
DATE TRANSMITTED 6/30/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw
FILE NO.
RESPONSE REQUESTED BY
RESPONSE RECEIVED
7/7/86
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT
DATE 77///,
COMMENTS PREPARED BY,., !?ei2 -2--�
C.P.S. Form 11
Control # CN -85 -367
CITY 0E, TUKWILA .
CENTRALPERMIT SYSTEM - INFORMAT, TRANSMISSION REQUEST FORM �rmit /File # EPIC - 337 -86
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building ADDRESS Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter B1.
STAFF REVIEWER M. Bradshaw
BELOW ARE COMMENTS THAT NEED TO BE TRANSMITTED TO THE APPLICANT /DEVELOPER.
o
i- - - - - - - - -
0
0
0
0
0
0
CPS Tech please contact applicant /developer
❑ I contacted applicant /developer (name) on (date)
[] Please follow -up with me on my concerns by (date)
CPS FOLLOW -UP
C Contacted applicant /developer by phone in writing on (date)
Distributed copy of letter to file #s:
Comments
Instructions: Transmit copy of completed form with any correspondence to staff person and
appropriate files.
-
CITY OF TUKWILA
CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM
-85 -367
EPIC -337 -86
FILE 86- 34 -SMP, 86 -35 -DR
ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW ROUTING FORM:
TO: BLDG rI PLNG. [l P.W. n FIRE n POLICE n P & R
PROJECT Fort Dent Office Building
LOCATION Interurban Ave. S. & Southcenter B1 FILE NO.
DATE TRANSMITTED
6/30/86
STAFF COORDINATOR M. Bradshaw
RESPONSE REQUESTED BY
RESPONSE RECEIVED
7/7/86
THE ATTACHED ENVIRONMENTAL CHECKLIST WAS RECEIVED REGARDING THIS PROJECT. PLEASE
REVIEW AND COMMENT BELOW TO ADVISE THE RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL REGARDING THE THRESHOLD
DETERMINATION. THE ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW FILE IS AVAILABLE IN THE PLANNING DEPART-
MENT THROUGH THE ABOVE STAFF COORDINATOR. COMMENTS REGARDING THE PROJECT YOU WISH
CARRIED TO THE PLANNING COMMISSION, BOARD OF ADJUSTMENT, AND CITY COUNCIL SHOULD BE
MADE ON THE ATTACHED CENTRAL PERMIT SYSTEM ROUTING FORM.
ITEM COMMENT
6() eeryte.71-6
,40.dr`�e ��J Cie
DATE
COMMENTS PREPARED BY
C.P.S. Form 11
Eart
�� x :4 c✓
s
Geotechnical Engineering and Geology
•
June 13, 1986
John C. Radovich
2000 -124th NE, #B -103
Bellevue, Washington 98005
Attention: Ms. Katie Greif
Gentlemen:
E -3007
EHITE
JUN 26 1986
CITY OF TUKvvILA
PLANNING DEPT.
We are pleased to submit herewith our report entitled "Geotech-
nical Engineering Study, Fort Dent Office Building, Tukwila,
Washington." This report presents the results of our field
exploration, laboratory tests, and engineering analysis. The
purpose and scope of our study was outlined in our proposal dated
May 13, 1986. ECI is currently preparing recommendations for
erosion protection along the Green River. Recommendations
regarding the Green River erosion protection . will be submitted to
you under separate cover. In preparing this report, we have
reviewed boring logs and test pits drilled on this site, and a
report prepared for an adjacent site.
The results of our study indicate that the site is underlain
by loose fine - grained fills overlying loose alluvial soils. These
soils are moderately compressible. It is recommended that the
building fills be placed and allowed to remain until settlements
have stabilized. This should take about three weeks to stabilize.
Post- construction total settlements should be on the order of one
to two inches, with differential settlements of about one inch.
If this magnitude of settlement cannot be tolerated, then the
northern portion of the building receiving fills should be
surcharged with a two foot thick surcharge. The proposed
structure may be supported on conventional shallow spread and /or
continuous footings bearing on structural fill. The existing site
soils are fine - grained and moisture sensitive. If grading
activities are conducted during wet weather, site developments
costs will be higher due to delays during heavy rains, the need to
import clean pit -run for structural fills, and difficulty in
access for equipment.
1805 136th Place N.E., Suite 101, Bellevue, Washington 98005 / Bellevue (206) 643 -3780 / Seattle (206) 464 -1584
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 2
This report has been prepared for specific application to this
project in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical
engineering practices for the exclusive use of JC Radovich
Development Corporation and their representatives. No other
warranty, expressed or implied, is made. We recommend that this
report, in its entirety, be included in the project contract
documents for the information of the contractor. The following
sections of this report describe our study and contain
recommendations regarding foundation design criteria, earthwork
considerations, and site drainage.
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
At the time our study was performed, the site and proposed
building locations were as shown schematically on the Exploration
Location. Plan, Plate 2.
Based on our discussions with you, your architect and
structural engineer, we understand that the project involves the
construction of a two -story office building with slabs -on- grade.
We anticipate maximum interior column loads will be on the order
of 125 kips, dead plus live, with perimeter column loads of 70
kips. Cuts and fills on the order of five feet will be required
to prepare the site for construction. Provisions for storing
stormwater beneath the structure in vaults may also be included in
the final building layout. At this time the final building
configuration and details have not been determined.
We should be consulted to review the recommendations contained
in this report once final plans have been developed. In any case,
it is recommended that Earth Consultants, Inc. provide a general
review of the final design prior to the start of of construction.
SITE CONDITIONS
Surface
As shown on the attached vicinity map, the site is located at
the eastern end of Southcenter Boulevard in Tukwila, Washington.
Existing site conditions are presented on Plate 2, Exploration
Location Plan. Generally the site is bordered on the east by the
Fort Dent Access Road, on the north by the Green River, on the
west by undeveloped land and on the south by Southcenter
Boulevard.
The site slopes from the southwest to the northeast with
overall relief on the order of ten feet. The site is covered by
grasses and native brush.
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 3
The Green River channel is immediately north of the northern
property line. The river banks have inclinations on the order of
a 2:1 (Horizontal:Vertical) to 1:1 (H:V) with local areas steeper
than a 1:1 (H:V). The river "bed" beneath the water surface
appears to be lined with quarry rock varying in size from fifty
(50) to four hundred (400) pounds.
The river banks are covered by a non - continuous cover of six
(6) to twelve (12) inch quarry spalls that have been overgrown
with grasses and berry vines. A local area of erosion is
occurring beneath the discharge of a storm drain adjacent to the
northeast corner of the site. A portion of the bank along the
north center of the site appears to have slumped due to local
undercutting of the river bank.
Subsurface
The site was explored by excavating ten test pits and hand
excavating .a series of hand auger holes at the locations shown on
Plate 2. Please refer to the test pit logs, Plates 4 through 10,
for a detailed description of the conditions encountered at each
location explored.. A description of the field exploration methods
and laboratory testing program is included in this report
following the Discussion and Recommendations section. The follow-
ing is a generalized description of the subsurface conditions
encountered.
Our test pits encountered relatively uniform subsurface
conditions beneath the site. Generally, the site is underlain by
loose silts to the full depth explored by our test pits. The
upper six to ten feet of these soils may be fills that were placed
in an uncontrolled manner.
Borings done in this site by others extended to thirty four
(34) feet below grade. These borings encountered loose to medium
dense alluvial soils to the depths explored. No highly organic or
other highly compressible soils were encountered or noted in the
previous explorations or our subsurface explorations on the site.
A previous report for this site by Dames and Moore indicated
that the fills were placed in the early 1970's.
Groundwater
The groundwater seepage levels observed while excavating are
shown on the test pit logs. The seepage encountered in our test
pits reflects local perched water tables. Previous borings by Mr.
James Eaton notes groundwater was encountered from eighteen (18)
to twenty four (24) feet below existing grade. The groundwater
seepage level is not static, thus one may expect fluctuations in
the level depending on the amount of rainfall, the level of the
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 4
Green River, surface water runoff, and other factors. Generally
the water level is higher in the wetter winter months.
DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
General
The primary geotechnical aspect of this project are the loose
fills and allvuial soils that underlie the site. These soils have
low to moderate compressibility characteristics and cannot support
the structure in their present state without undergoing excessive
differential settlements.
Current plans call for the southern portion of the building to
be on a four foot cut and the northern half of the building to be
on four feet of new fills. The new fills will cause settlements
within the underlying alluvial soils. In addition, the cut
portion of the building has effectively been surcharged through
the weight of the fills that will be removed. Thus there exists a
potential for excessive differential settlements between the north
and south half of the site. We estimate this differential
settlement could be on the order of two inches or more and occur
over a relatively short distance, possibly between two column
footings that span the cut -fill line.
To reduce this potential for excessive differential
settlements, ECI recommends that you surcharge the northern half
of the building.
To improve the bearing characteristics, we recommend that all
footings be placed on at least two feet of structural fill.
The following sections present our recommendations in more
detail.
Foundations
The proposed structure may be supported on conventional conti-
nuous and spread footings bearing on at least two feet of
structural fill. Overexcavation of soil below the footing may be
required depending on final site grades, this will be required in
cut areas an din shallow fills. Fill placed under footings should
extend outwards from the edge of the footings at least a distance
equal to the depth of the fill beneath the footings. Exterior
footings should be bottomed at a minimum depth of twelve (12)
inches below the lowest adjacent outside finish grade. Interior
footings may be at a depth of twelve (12) inches below the top of
the slab. Footings bearing on structural fill may be designed for
a bearing pressure of twenty five. hundred (2500) psf. Continuous
and individual spread footings should have minimum widths of
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 5
twelve (1.2) and eighteen (18) inches, respectively. A one -third
increase in the above bearing pressures may be used when consider-
ing short term wind or seismic loads.
Lateral loads due to wind or seismic forces may be resisted by
friction between the foundations and the supporting compacted fill
subgrade or by passive earth pressure on the foundations. For the
latter, the foundations must be poured "neat" against the existing
soil or backfilled with a compacted fill meeting the requirements
of structural fill. A coefficient of friction of 0.35 may be used
between the structural foundation concrete and the supporting
subgrade. The passive resistance of undisturbed natural soils or
structural fill may be taken as equal to the pressure of a fluid
having a density of two hundred fifty (250) pounds per cubic foot
(pcf).
We recommend that drains be placed around all perimeter foot-
ings. The drains should be constructed with a four inch diameter
perforated pipe bedded and covered with free draining gravel. The
drains should have a positive gradient towards suitable discharge
facilities. The footing drainage system should not be tied into
the roof drainage system until the drains are tightlined well away
from the building. The footing excavation should be backfilled
with granular soil except for the top foot which should be
backfilled with a relatively impermeable soil such as silt, clay
or topsoil. Alternatively, the surface can be sealed with asphalt
or concrete pavements.
Surcharge Program
As indicated earlier in this report, if the anticipated
settlements cannot be tolerated, we recommend that the building
area be pre - loaded with a minimum of three feet of surcharge fill.
The purpose of the surcharge fill is to induce as much settlement
in the fill portion of the building area as possible prior to
construction. This fill is in addition to any structural fill
materials required to achieve design finish grades; thus, the top
of the surcharge should be three feet above finish grade and
should extend a minimum of five feet beyond the building perimeter
or exterior footing line. If future expansion is anticipated, the
surcharge should extend at least' fifteen (15) feet in the
direction of the future addition. The extra surcharge area is to
reduce the possibility of differential settlement from future
building or surcharge loads. Also, no fill for landscaping
purposes should be placed near the building since any additional
fill could induce further settlement. The side slopes of the
surcharge fill should be inclined no steeper than 1:1 (H:V). The
surcharge slope at the cut /fill line should be sloped at a 3:1
(H:V) into the cut portion of the building. We estimate that the
surcharge fill will need to remain in place approximately three to
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 6
four weeks to permit primary settlements to be completed, after
which, building construction may be started.
Before placing the surcharge fill, structural fill should be
placed six inches above finish grade to allow for anticipated
settlement. Depending on site grades, it may be necessary to
overexcavate soil to provide the required thickness of structural
fill below footings and slabs. Alternatively, footing excavations
can be done after removal of the surcharge fill.
The surcharge fill does not have to meet any specific
requirements except that it should have a minimum in -place total
density of one hundred twenty (120) pcf. However, if the
surcharge fill is to be used later as fill on another part of the
site, we recommend it meet the requirements for structural fill,
i.e., contain no organics and be compactible. Structural fill to
be placed in wet weather should contain no more than 5 percent
fines passing the No. 200 sieve.
Prior to placement of the surcharge fill, we recommend
installation of at least four settlement markers within the
surcharge area. These markers should be protected from
disturbance by construction equipment. In addition, these markers
should be surveyed by ECI personnel or a licensed surveyor daily
during fill and surcharge placement and at intervals of 2, 4, 8,
16 (so forth) days after completion of the surcharge fill
placement. The initial reading should show the natural ground
elevation, and readings taken during surcharge placement should
show the surcharge fill thickness. The settlement readings should
be evaluated by ECI. The surcharge may be removed when the
required settlement has been reached. The exposed subgrade should
be proofrolled and any unstable pockets should be overexcavated
and replaced by structural fill.
Slab -on -Grade Floors
Slab -on -grade floors may be supported on existing recompacted
fill soils or on at least one foot of structural fill. Greater
thickness may be required to stabilize soft or pumping areas. The
slab should be provided with a minimum of four inches of free
draining sand or gravel. We also recommend that a vapor barrier
such as a 6 mil plastic membrane be placed beneath the slab to
reduce water vapor transmission through the slab and the resultant
moisture accumulation. Two inches of sand may be placed over the
membrane for protection during construction and to aid in curing
of the concrete.
Retaining and Foundation Walls
Retaining and foundation walls should be designed to resist
lateral earth pressures imposed by the soils retained by these
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 7
structures. Walls that are designed to yield an amount equal to
at least 0.002 times the wall height can be designed to resist the
lateral earth pressure imposed by an equivalent fluid with a unit
weight of thirty five (35) pcf. If walls are to be restrained at
the top from free movement, a uniform force of fifty (50) psf
should be added to the equivalent fluid pressure force. For
calculating the base resistance to sliding, we recommend using a
passive pressure equivalent to that exerted by a fluid having a
density of two hundred fifty (250) pcf and a coefficient of
friction of 0.35.
It is assumed that hydrostatic pressures do not act behind the
walls nor that either surcharge slopes or loads will be placed
above the walls. If surcharges are to be applied they should be
added to the above lateral pressures.
Retaining and foundation walls should be backfilled with
compacted free- draining soils with no organics. The soil should
contain no more than 5 percent silt or clay and no particles
greater than four inches in diameter. The percentage of particles
passing the No. 4 sieve, should be between 25 and 70 percent.
Alternatively, a geotextile product such as Miradrain may be used.'
We recommend the use of footing drains at the base of all
perimeter footings. The 'footing drains should be surrounded by at
least six inches of one inch minus washed rock, and provided with
a positive . gradient towards suitable discharge facilities. The
pipe invert should be at least as low as the bottom of the
footing. For, retaining walls, other than basement walls, weep-
holes can be used. The weepholes should be as low as possible to
maintain drainage behind the walls. When weepholes are provided,
all backfill within eighteen (18) inches of the weephole should
consist of one inch minus washed rock.
Site Drainage
Groundwater was encountered in our test pits at depths ranging
from two to five feet. However, it has been our experience that
groundwater levels change significantly due to changes in rainfall
amounts, surface .drainage or other factors. If seepage is
encountered in the excavation, the water should be drained away
from the site by use of drainage ditches, perforated pipe or
French drains, or by pumping from sumps interconnected by shallow
connector trenches at the bottom of the excavation.
We suggest that appropriate locations of subsurface drains, if
needed, be established during grading operations by a represen-
tative of Earth Consultants, Inc., at which time the seepage
areas, if present, may be more clearly defined.
The excavation and site should be graded so that surface water
is directed off the site and away from the tops of slopes. Water
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 8
should not be allowed to stand in any area where buildings, slabs,
or pavements are to be constructed. During construction, loose
surfaces should be sealed at night by compacting the surface soils
to reduce the infiltration of rain into the soils. Final site
grades should allow for drainage away from the building founda-
tions. We suggest that the ground be sloped 3 percent for a
distance of at least ten feet away from the buildings except in
areas that are to be paved.
Pavement Areas
All parking and roadway areas may be supported on existing
site soils provided these soils can be compacted to 95 percent
density and are stable at the time of construction. Structural
fill and /or fabric may be needed to stabilize soft, wet or
unstable areas. In most instances twelve (12) inches of granular
fill will stabilize the subgrade except for very soft areas where
additional fill may be required. The upper twelve (12) inches of
pavement subgrade should be compacted to at least 95 percent of
the maximum density. Below this level a compactive effort of 90
percent would be adequate. The pavement section for lightly
loaded traffic and parking areas should consist of two inches of
asphalt. concrete (AC) over four inches of crushed rock base (CRB)
or three inches of asphalt treated base (ATB). Heavier loaded
areas would require thicker sections. We will be pleased to
assist you in developing appropriate pavement sections or
specifications for heavy traffic zones, if needed.
Site Preparation and General Earthwork
The building and pavement areas should be stripped and cleared
of all existing utilities, surface vegetation, all organic matter
and any other deleterious material. It is anticipated that a
stripping depth of six (6) to eighteen (18) inches will be
required. In parking areas where more than two feet of fill are
to be placed, the existing vegetation may be trimmed down to grade
and the root mats and sod may be left in place. Stripped and
mowed materials .should be removed from the site or stockpiled for
later use in landscaping, if desired. The stripped materials
should not be mixed with any materials to be used as structural
fill. Structural fill is defined as any fill placed under build-
ings, roadways, slabs, pavements, or any other load bearing areas.
Following the stripping and /or mowing operation, the ground
surface where structural fill, foundations, or slabs are to be
placed should be proofrolled. All proofrolling should be
performed under the observation of a representative of Earth
Consultants, Inc. Soil in any loose or soft areas should be
removed and replaced with structural fill to a depth that will
provide a stable base beneath the general structural fill.
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 9
Structural fill under floor slabs and footings should be
placed in horizontal lifts and compacted to a minimum 95 percent
of the maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM Test Designa-
tion D- 1557 -78 (Modified Proctor). The fill materials should be
placed at or near the optimum moisture content. Fill under
pavements and walks should also be placed in horizontal lifts and
compacted to 90 percent of maximum density except for the top
twelve (12) inches which should be compacted to 95 percent of
maximum density.
On -site fine - grained soils at the time of our exploration were
over the optimum moisture content and may not be used as
structural fill in its present condition. Obtaining adequate
compaction and grading will be difficult if the soil moisture is
above the optimum moisture content. Ideally, structural fill
which is to be placed in wet weather should consist of a granular
material with a maximum size of three inches and no more than 5
percent fines passing the .No. 200 sieve. During dry weather, any
compactible granular non - organic soil can be used as structural
fill.
FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING
Our field exploration was performed on May 13, 1986. The
subsurface conditions were explored by excavating ten test pits to
a maximum depth of sixteen and one -half (16.5) feet below the
existing surface at the approximate locations shown on Plate 2.
The locations of the test pits were approximately determined
by taping from assumed property corners. Elevations of test pits
were approximately determined by interpolation between plan
contours. The locations and elevations of the test pits should be
considered accurate only to the degree implied by the method used.
The field exploration was continuously monitored by a senior
soils technician from our firm who classified the soils
encountered, maintained a log of each test pit, obtained
representative bulk soil samples and observed pertinent site
features. Soils were classified visually in the field according
to the Unified Soil Classification System which is presented on
Plate 3, Legend. The consistency of the soil was estimated based
on the effort required to excavate the soil, the stability of the
trench walls and other factors. Logs of the individual test pits
are presented on Plates 4 through 10, Test Pit Logs. The final
logs represent our interpretations of the field logs and the
results of the laboratory examination and test of field samples.
The stratification lines on the logs represent the approximate
boundary between soil types. In actuality, the transition may be
gradual.
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 10
Representative soil samples were placed in closed containers
and returned to our laboratory for further examination and test-
ing. Moisture determinations were performed on all samples.
Results of moisture determinations, together with classifications,
are shown on the test pit logs included in this report. The
results of six sieve and hydrometer analyses are illustrated on
Plates 11 and 12, Grain Size Analyses.
LIMITATIONS
Our recommendations and conclusions are based on the site
materials observed, selective laboratory testing and engineering
analyses. The conclusions and recommendations are professional
opinions derived in accordance with current standards of practice.
No warranty is expressed or implied.
The recommendations submitted in this report are based upon
the data obtained from the previous borings and ECI's test pits.
Soil and groundwater conditions between borings and test pits may
vary from those encountered by the borings and test pits. The
nature and extent of variations between borings and test pits may
not become evident until construction. If variations then appear,
Earth Consultants, Inc. should be allowed to reevaluate the recom-
mendations of this report prior to proceeding with the
construction.
Additional Services
It is recommended that Earth Consultants,. Inc. provide a
general review of the final design and specifications to verify
that the earthwork and foundation recommendations have been
properly interpreted and implemented in'the design and in the con-
struction specifications.
It is also recommended that Earth Consultants, Inc. be
retained to provide geotechnical services during construction.
This is to observe compliance with the design concepts, specifica-
tions or recommendations and to allow design changes in the event
subsurface conditions differ from those anticipated prior to the
start of construction.
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich
June 13, 1986
E -3007
Page 11
The following table and plates are attached and complete this
report:
Table A Hand Auger Lots
Plate 1 Vicinity Map
Plate 2 Exploration Location Plan
Plate 3 Legend
Plates 4 through 10 Test Pit Logs
Plate 11 and 12 Grain Size Analysis
Respectfully submitted,
,,e, S. LEV i EART 2'SULTANTS, INC.
1�,�'�� � asy,�.y,
k co
0 o It
c ' ° Z
`� a�
:-‘) a •obert S. Levinson, P. E.
ag
9 q� + President
CRL /RSL /tm 1.4.:(., 4% 1
CIS T E ��\
18 /oNAL!
Earth Consultants, Inc.
John C. Radovich E -3007
June 13, 1986.
TABLE A
HAND AUGER HOLES
Hole Number Description
HA -1 spalls at one foot
HA -2 spalls at one foot
HA -3 spalls at one foot
HA -4 sand at zero to two feet
HA -5 sand at zero to two feet
HA -6 sand at zero to two feet
HA -7 sand at zero to two feet
Note: All hand auger holes were limited to a total of two feet in
depth during preliminary field work. Additional hand auger holes
are being excavated along the river bank.
Earth Consultants, Inc.
Il4In
31
S MIN
+au e. S
Brea.
Earth
Cons Itants Inc.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING 8 GEOLOGY
Vicinity Map
R. Dent Office Building
Tukwila, Washington
Proj. No. 3007
Date June '86 E Plate
•
4,,_HA- 4
—
'5 HA- 5
20
30_
Property
Line
TP -8
TP-9
30
GREEN
HA-7
---- -I HA- 6 -- - - - - -- - i
R /V/ER
Apparent Slump in River Bank
TP-4
Erosion from Storm
Discharge
HA-I
solo-
Existing Storm
Ora in��;
i
0
I
2q 0
2S
30
N30
C
Approximate Scale
1
0 20 40 80 ft.
0
Lei LEGEND
U' TP-3 Approximate Test Pit
CC Location
® HA- I Approximate Hand Auger
Location
Approximate Location of
Boring by Others
® Approximate Location of
Test Pit by Others
Proposed Building
References
Sheet I of 2
Topographic Survey
By PAC- TECH Engineering, Inc.
Dated 1/29/86
Site Plan
By Mithun Bowman Emrich Group P.S.
Dated 5/21 /86
Earth
Consultants Inc.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
Exploration Location Plan
Ft. Dent Office Building
Tukwila, Washington
MAJOR DIVISIONS
GRAPH
SYMBOL
LETTER
SYMBOL
TYPICAL DESCRIPTION
Coarse
Grained
Soils
More Than
50% Material.
Larger Than
No. 200 Sieve
Size
Gravel
And
Gravelly
Sods
More Than
50% Coarse
Fraction
Retained On
No. 4 Sieve
Clean Gravels
(little or no fines)
•
�s j.,e • o°GW
PIA,i gy° '';ae•o••
gw
Well- Graded Gravels, Gravel -Sand
Mixtures. Little Or No Fines
:eV • ®. :0:
® • m • ® •
GP
Gravel-
Poorly Graded Gravels, Gravel -
Sand Mixtures, Little Or No Fines
Gravels With .
Fines ( appreciable
amount of fines 1
�gp
4, 1y� `l' .
"7 rj
GM
gm
Silty Gravels, Gravel- Sand -
Silt Mixtures
1�
�!° y�
GC
gc
Clayey Gravels. Gravel - Sand -
Clay Mixtures
Sand
And
Sandy
Sods
More Than
50% Coarse
Fraction
Passing No. 4
Sieve
Clean Sand
( little or no fines )
• o e,
a o °p° 0000 o SW
.°ee 0 00Oeo SW
Well- Graded Sands, Gravelly
Sands. Little Or No Fines
SP
•• Sp
• •/ •/
.4'.::1);
Poorly-Graded Sands, Gravelly
Sands, Little Or No Fines
Sands With
Fines (appreciable
amount of fines)
,.
i•:'•••••.•••••,
i;�;; �;1; ; ;{;';I; ; ;
' i j
SM SM
Silty Sands, Sand Silt Mixtures
{ SC
S
Clayey Sands, Sand Clay Mixtures
Fine
Grained
Soils
More Than
50% Material
Smaller Than
No 200 Sieve
Size
Silts Liquid Limit
And Less Than 50
Clays
ML
ml
Inorganic Silts & Very Fine Sands, Rock Flour,Silty-
Clayey Fine Sands; Clayey Silts w/ Slight Plasticity
CL -----
CI
Inorganic Clays Of Low To Medium Plasticity.
Gravelly Clays, Sandy Clays, Silty Clays, Lean
OL
I i OI
Organic Silts And Organic
Silty Clays Of Low Plasticity
Silts
nd And Limit
Clays Greater Than 50
J���J44/
MH
mh
Inorganic Silts. Micaceous Or Diatomaceous Fine
Sand Or Silty Soils •
A CH
Ch
Inorganic Clays Of High
Plasticity, Fat Clays
OH
Oil
Organic Clays Of Medium To High
Plasticity, Organic Silts
• Highly Organic Sods
' — pi- i/
—
— pt
Peat, Humus, Swamp Soils
With High Organic Contents
Topsoil
Fill
Humus And Duff Layer
Highly Variable Constituents
The Discussion In The Text Of This Report Is Necessary For A Proper Understanding
Of The Nature Of The Material Presented In The Attached Logs
Notes :
Dual symbols are used to indicate borderline soil classification. Upper
case letter symbols designate sample classifications based upon lab-
oratory testing; lower case letter symbols designate classifications not
verified by laboratory testing.
Earth
Consultants Inc.
2-0.D. SPLIT SPOON SAMPLER
I.D. RING SAMPLER OR
SHELBY TUBE SAMPLER
SAMPLER PUSHED
SAMPLE NOT RECOVERED
WATER LEVEL (DATE)
WATER OBSERVATION WELL
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
C TORVANE READING, tsf
qu PENETROMETER READING, tsf
W MOISTURE, percent of dry weight
pcf DRY DENSITY, pounds per cubic ft.
LL LIQUID LIMIT" percent
PI PLASTIC INDEX
Depth
(ft.)
0
10
15
Low By RWR
Datv 5/13/86
USCS
TEST " IT
Soil Description
MEW
ml
Gray SILT with roots, moist, loose
ml
Gray SILT with trace of gravel, dry, dense
Gray SILT, moist to wet, loose to medium dense
Brown. SILT, moist, loose to medium dense, non -
plastic
17
11
26
37
Test pit terminated at 16.5 feet below existing grade. Slight
groundwater seepage encountered at 2 to 3 feet during excavation.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 !Plate 4
•
TEST PIT `' ®.
LogeociBy RWB
Data V11 /Rh Elev.
W
USCS Soil Description (%)
Brownish SILT, moist to wet, loose
(caving of test pit walls)
Gray SILT with occasional gravel, dry to moist,
medium dense
Brown SILT, moist, loose
plastic
to medium dense, non-
17
34
Test pit terminated at 13.5. feet below existing grade. Slight
groundwater seepage encountered from upper 5 feet during excavation.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING Qi GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Data June' 86 Plate 5
Depth
(ft.)
0
Loyd By RWB
Dat 5/13/86
USCS
TEST PIT O.
Soil Description
E Iev.
(%)
1 Gray SILT, moist, loose
10
15
20
Brownish SILT with oxidation stains, moist,
loose
sm
ml
Brownish silty fine SAND to sandy SILT, moist,
loose to medium dense
21
16
14
Test pit terminated at 14 feet below existing grade. No ground-
water seepage encountered during excavation.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 r Plate 6
Depth
(ft.)
0
Logged By RWB
Date 5/13/86
USCS
•
TEST
I T S F
Soil Description
(8" topsoil)
Gray SILT with roots, moist, loose, non - plastic
Becomes brownish SILT, moist to wet, loose
sm
Brownish silty fine SAND, moist, loose to medium
dense
Becoming more sandy
25
45
17
15 —
Test pit. terminated at 14 feet below existing grade. No ground-
water seepage encountered during excavation.
Earth
Cammoultsamts
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 !Ply 7
Depth
(ft.)
0
5
10
15
0
5
10
15
Loomed By RWB
Data 5/11/86
USCS
TEST PIT
Soil Description
■Lolimm
Elev. _
•
.iI
—I:I
I
1i
h
i
ml
Gray SILT, moist, loose
•
20
15
—H
ml
Gray - brownish, sandy SILT, moist, medium dense
16
Test pit terminated at 13 feet below existing grade. No ground-
water seepage encountered during excavation.
Logged By RWB
Date 5/13/86
TEST PIT N
Elev.
Ewe
Cammallamota Into
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 'Plate 8
ii1
I:I!
ill
ml
Brownish SILT, moist, loose
16
13'
ml
Brownish sandy SILT, dry to moist, dense
Gray clayey SILT, moist, stiff, medium plasticity
24
Test pit terminated at 13 feet below existing grade. Slight
' groundwater seepage encountered at 3 to 4 feet during excavation.
Ewe
Cammallamota Into
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 'Plate 8
Depth
(ft.)
0
10
15
10
By RWB
Dat 5/11/86
USCS
TEST PIT N
Soil Description
Elev.
Logged By RWB
Date 5/13/86
15 -
TEST PIT NO.
ml ( Brownish SILT, moist, loose
Elev.
ml
Gray SILT, slightly clayey, dry, stiff to very
stiff, low to medium plasticity
Gray SILT with fine sand, trace of gravel and
some organics, wet, medium dense
18
17
Test pit terminated at 11.5 feet below existing. grade. Moderate
groundwater seepage encountered at 2 feet during excavation.
Mart
Consultants Imo
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT. LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 IPlate 9
ml
Brownish SILT, moist, loose
18
8
ml
Gray SILT with trace of sand and gravel, moist
to wet, medium dense
(test pit walls caved)
sm
Brown -tan gravelly SAND with some silt, mixed
with gray SILT; moist, medium dense
Test pit terminated at 13 feet below existing grade.
water seepage encountered during excavation.
No ground-
Logged By RWB
Date 5/13/86
15 -
TEST PIT NO.
ml ( Brownish SILT, moist, loose
Elev.
ml
Gray SILT, slightly clayey, dry, stiff to very
stiff, low to medium plasticity
Gray SILT with fine sand, trace of gravel and
some organics, wet, medium dense
18
17
Test pit terminated at 11.5 feet below existing. grade. Moderate
groundwater seepage encountered at 2 feet during excavation.
Mart
Consultants Imo
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT. LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj. No. 3007 Date June' 86 IPlate 9
Depth
(ft)
0
5
10
15
0
5
10
15
Loggod By RWB
Date 5/11786
USCS
•
TEST PIT No. __ice_
Soil Description
Elev.
w
(%)
�1
ml
Brownish SILT, wet, loose
20
ml
Gray SILT, .slightly clayey, soft to medium stiff,
low plasticity
20
Test pit terminated at 12 feet below existing grade.
ml
Gray SILT, moist, loose to medium dense, non-
plastic
water seepage encountered during excavation.
19
22
Test pit terminated at 13 feet below existing grade.
No ground-
water seepage encountered during excavation.
Logged gy RWB
Date 5/13/86
TEST SIT NO. in_
E lev.
•GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj.
No. 3007 i Date June' 86 1 Plate 10
ml
ml
Brownish tan sandy SILT, moist, loose
Grayish with lighter spots SILT with trace of
sand, wet, loose, non - plastic
20
24
Test pit terminated at 12 feet below existing grade.
No ground-
water seepage encountered during excavation.
•GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING & GEOLOGY
TEST PIT LOGS
FT. DENT OFFICE BUILDING
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
Proj.
No. 3007 i Date June' 86 1 Plate 10
01030'9 0NI- 33NION31VDINN73103
0
O
OJ NIHSV
tmi
H
U
trl
muiiluIF:i
13M AEI 83N1 113 - - •
SIEVE ANALYSIS
NUMBER OF MESH P R IN
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS
..STANDARD
N
CO N ./-4 rO n N 03°3 t► Q 0 Q O oo� Q0 r
tts
NI mom
►���INEMNIMIIM■ !■181111/:MIRE
man
100 ■
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
O O
O
N
GRAIN ,SIZE IN MM
po O
E-10.0. O o.
�• ir■-m 1
O 0 O
E1� .I 11 11l_
■111■r .1�� 4. ■1■ ■■1■ 111
MONiummiguri
Inimumemommietammirmismomm
■�ii°�■1■°■_ t��►rs ■�■ _� ■t=
: --_ = =_ =: ;•�: a::ow
111 MN 11111•111110
(NI
O
11i1i
1■ ■■ UM
111•11111111 �■
B1111■■���
uU11U ■��
■1. i=°JE
11111■
■�!!. •11••••• EN ■ �1■ ■ sl11 :w� IIM ii:i � i°"°=1ili
■_•.°III.._■ '�■�illi� ���
�s� ��:■ �i�� iii ii/!� Lag C ■....r
=' 1N Ma
IUUI 1 �1111 __ 11111111- - lal lin 1•1111.111 iiiii�°� i�:6 ■i��i■°i�i�\li;► - ■' ICI i ==
El= MIMI= al MINIM IN am
■r■El °�L' ■ \ ■.�� ■1111■
IOW 111•11•11111•1•1111=111 MI 11111111.11111111111•11. IMIN1111111111•111•11111111 MN
�1���� • S• 11111111•11M1 //N��1r •� /��
11111111
■ IN Imo■ �■ .• ■�� ■1111•■���
01 N
O COD t00
0 0 0
V M N
O W tD
C) N .- CO lD PI N ^ O O g O O
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
'":11 O O 00 O
0.0 0
COBBLES
COARSE 1 FINE
COARSE 1 MEDIUM I FINE
GRAVEL
SAND
FINES
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
O
O
aDMIMVOMile
KEY
Boring or
Test Pit No.
DEPTH
ft.
USCS
HA -1 1.0 SM
HA -2 1.0 SM
HA -3 1.0 GM
DESCRIPTION
ro
m
n
m
-4
111:137 i�
silty SAND with organics
silty SAND with gravel
silty sandy GRAVEL
Moisture
Content 1 %)
LL-
PL
17
20
16
j
tri
O d
y
r
> 0
.ij
rri
H
D
� Z
r-
1-4
to
tJ m
(n
N d
H 13M A: H N3 83.,
N
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
SIEVE ANALYSIS
HE NUMBER OF MESH PER INCH U.S. STANDARD
SIZE OF OPENING IN INC
HE
c ^c y
c., N r '- r cl v> N
■ /-0
w ■� ii ■5i
MUM Ili
11111111111111111111111•1 ■=■I• ■w■■■
��■ i ■�i
- .I■�=■■EN■_
!■ �iia
�1r121,
- =:0i /��
-� __ ■.
! ■■I•� /wl!
NIMINNIONIIIIIVIIMm In 1 Ilia
MENIIMMINININamm
O 0
M N
op pp O
N M vt toc) oO
HYDROMETER ANALYSIS
GRAIN SIZE IN MM
N co 0 O O
._' w Ilium wwwwwl MEM ai
a II 11
NNIIII MI
In
II .i,�r�.■.1■12 NI MOM IN
i 4'1 ■_ III WINE w■u
�: Mle /�Num ■I I�■■=
�/ Ql� wi ■■
I /1�
E= T-11
O 0 0 0
O
O
II ilia
■
wwwwr
V MO IMO
to milli
O OM MI
aMI MI lanuinin
ww1 ■IIM III 11111•111111111111=111111 INN
Ed 1 INIMMINIMINININOINIIIIIIIIII
i
ME ■■■MIIIII wIi■wl r t... Iww wl /S■w/� III nu
an 111:1110MEI
Miami sum
.i
alwirmorir
sum mamma. i
•
mmi
- mum 01111E
■■�i■iiiai�li■_ _ ■ww1• I�
�r/w��i-a�� �i =ice ~��i iii iliii
MIME Ilmanalmmmilimmmillamalallmallailal
i� i /w■!
5 11: =.■�....■ =■ d ■ L■.■
II MIME MEM
■■■ /1��■�■iiii �� °�r1•i
i� owl= ��w!
it ■■■_ /■1� _-�■
............. ■
! ■i�wlNN! �■�■ �.�wl�
��������� ■_R NOM
�■■ iliilii■11111 rWi_■ ■w■aw....: : ■■Ili
O W (O • M
KEY
Boring or
Test Pit No.
DEPTH
(ft.)
O OO
f0
USCS
HA -4
HA -6
HA -7
2.0
1.0
1.0
SM
SM
SM
V
N r 00 tD a M N - O
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
DESCRIPTION
silty SAND
silty SAND
silty SAND with organics
M N
0 0
■■■■1u.�
=PUP la�
■i�ilMIN
■■■■/Ma=
■uu•.�rwww
i1UUu•M�_�_
■■1111■�■w�ww ■ww■■wl
0 0 0 0 o 0
0
' 0 0 00 O
Moisture
Content (%)
27
24
29
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
03 1N231J3.
N
m
W
m
T
-I
ConS1 No.
Epic File No.
[JUN Fee 5100.00 Receipt No.
26 1986NVI NMENTAL CHECKLIST
CITY OF TU$ VvtLA
A. BACKGROUN PLANNING DEPT.
1. Name of proposed project, if applicable:
2. Name of applicant: John C. Radovich
FORT DENT OFFICE PARK
3. Address and phone number of applicant and contact person: 2000 124th Ave NE
Suite Bin3, BallPSn,a lel9 gaR05_ (206) 454 -6060 Katie Greif
4. Date checklist prepared: May 1, 1986
5. Agency requesting Checklist: City of Tukwila
6. Proposed timing or schedule (including phasing, if applicable):
(Inn gtri lot jnrl to bF'gin SPpterribP,r 1986
7. Do you have any plans for future additions, expansion, or further activity
related to or connected with this proposal? If yes, explain. NO
8. List any environmental information you know about that has been prepared, or will
be prepared, directly related to this proposal.
•
•
fn not know of any infQrmation. prepared..
9. Do you know whether applications are pending for governmental approvals of other
proposals directly affecting the property covered by your proposal? If yes,
explain.
None at this time.
•
10. List any government approvals or permits that will be needed for your proposal.
Building permit, King County Flood Zone Control Per'nat, Occupancy Fermi�-
and Shoreline Use permit are required.
Fisheries permit may be required.
11. Give brief', complete description of your proposal, including the proposed uses
and the size of the project and site. There are several questions later in this
checklist that ask you to describe certain aspects of your proposal. You do not
need to repeat those answers on this page. Section E requires a complete
description of the objectives and alternatives of your proposal and should not be
summarized here. •
. Applicant proposes to build a:39,750 sq. ft., two story office building.
12. Location of the proposal. Give sufficient information for a person to understand
the precise location of your proposed project, including a street address, if
any, and section, township, and range, if known. If a proposal would occur over
a range of area, provide the range or boundaries of the site(s). Provide a legal
description, site plan, vicinity map, and topographic, map, if reasonably
available. While you should submit any plans required by the agency, you are not
required to duplicate maps or detailed plans submitted with any permit applica-
tions related to • this checklist.
The property is situated in Section 24; Townsh p 23 and
, 4E, which is.rio h
of I -405 and east of Interurban $venue South. The property is 1ncatPC9 at tnP
entrance to Fort. Dent Parl_and the hu, l din ariclres§ i s props ri t he • F72I1..
Sout e ,enter Bo v e exhibit A . vi i pity it L The 1 a 1__ c�Ps ri pti can , _
site plan and •.o'*_ -., - it - • -• -es labeled _ � 1 - 6- -ly.
13. Does the proposal lie within an area designated on the City's Comprehensive Land
Use Policy Plan Map as environmentally sensitive?
Yes, the Green River borders the property on the West side.
TO BE COMPLETED BY APPLISili
B. ENVIRONMENTAL ELEMENTS
1. Earth
a. General description of the site (circle one):
rolling, hilly, steep slopes, mountainous, o er
b. What is the steepest slope on the site (approximate.
percent slope)? 2°
c. What general types of soils are found on the site
(for example, clay, sand, gravel, peat, muck)? If
you know the classification of agricultural soils,
specify them and note any prime farmland.
ray and brownish silt loose to -medium aensity
were found nn' the nitp ispp att.rhpd ani i c rp rt7
d. Are there surface indications or history of unstable
soils in the immediate vicinity? If so, describe.
Not known at this time.
e. Describe the purpose, type, and approximate quanti-
ties of any filling or grading proposed. Indicate
source of fill., The site will be regraded with no
import or export of fill. The purpose is to relocate
the foundation material-on site-to facilitate a
planned building elevation . Under 10,000 cubic yards
will be relocated.
f. Could erosion occur as a result of clearing,
construction, or use? If so, generally describe.
Yes minimum erosion could occur ciur'
precautions will be taken to control erosion.
•a a
n
g. About what percent of the site will be covered with
impervious surfaces after project construction (for
example, asphalt or buildings)?
Approximately 71
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
but. all
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
h. Proposed measures to reduce or control erosion, or
other impacts to the earth, if any:
A temporary erosion.and sedimentation plan will be
implemented during construction to keep erosion •
impacts minimal. Once the building is completed
there should be no erosion.
2. Air
a. What types of emissions to the air would result from
the proposal (i.e., dust, automobile odors,
industrial wood smoke) during construction and when
the project is completed? If any, generally
describe and give approximate quantities if known.
Dust and vehicle.emm_issions during constriicti.on.
Vehicle emission during regular use.
b. Are there any off -site sources of emissions or odor
that may affect your proposal? If so, generally
describe. no.
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control emissions or
other impacts to air, if any:
None
3. Water
a. Surface:
1) Is there any surface water body on or in the
immediate vicinity of the site (including year -
round and seasonal streams, saltwater, lakes,
ponds, wetlands)? If yes, describe type and
provide names. If appropriate, state what
stream or river it flows into.
Yes, the Green River which Pyentually flows
into Elliott Bay.
411 Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
2) Will the project require any work over, in, or
adjacent' to (within 200 feet) the described.
waters? If yes, please describe and attach
available plans. Yes, construction of the
building, landscaping and parking will occur
within 200 feet of the Green River.
3) Estimate the amount of fill and dredge material
that would be placed in or removed from surface
water or wetlands and indicate the area of the
site that would be .affected. Indicate the
source of fill material.
No filling or dredging is anticipated but King
County may require the construction ofa dike on
the Green River Bank.
4) Will the proposal require surface water
withdrawals : or diversions? Give general
description, purpose, and approximate quan-
tities, if known. No withdrawls are required.
Surface water will be channeled and collected
by means of a storm drainage system.
5) Does- the proposal lie within a 100 -year
floodplain? If so, note location on the site
plan. No.
6) Does the proposal involve any discharges of
waste materials to surface waters? If so,
describe the type of waste' and anticipated
volume of discharge. Only normal automobile
related pollutants may enter surface waters.
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
b. Ground:
1) Will ground water be withdrawn, or will water be
discharged to ground water? Give general .
description, purpose, and approximate quan-
tities, if known. No.
2) Describe waste materials that will be discharged
into the ground from septic tanks or .other sour-
ces, if any (for example: Domestic sewage;
industrial, containing the following
chemicals...; agricultural; etc.) Describe.the
general size of'the system, the number of such
systems, the number of houses to be served .(if
applicable), or the number of animals or humans
the s 7 tem(s) are expected to serve.
NA
Septic tanks will not be utilized and no
in us�rial chemicals will be used on site.
c. Water Runoff (including storm water):
1) Describe the source of runoff (including storm
water) and method of collection and disposal, if
any (include quantities, if known). Where will
this water flow? Will this water flow into
other waters? If so, describe. The method of
collection.and disposal will be by an approved
trm drainage collection system. -77ater will blow
into a previously edannd constructed outTE
and'tnen- ilTtZrt e nP 7er. The maximum amount
"CI-Water stored will eT0;0II0 cubic feel -for -
?00 year, se Yi- da.Tduration storm.
•
• Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
2) Could waste materials enter ground or surface
waters? If so, generally describe.
Some automobile related pollutants may enter the storm
system from the parking area. Oil/water seperators
will be utilized as well as the implementation
of grassy swales within the landscaped area.
d. Proposed measures to reduce or control surface,
ground, and runoff water impacts, if any:
As previously stated o.il /water seperators and grassy
swales will be utilized..
4. Plants
a. Check or circle types of vegetation found on the
site:
X deciduous tree: alder, maple, aspen, other
— evergreen tree: fir, cedar, pine, other
shrubs
X grass
pasture
_ crop or grain
_ wet soil plants: cattail, buttercup, bullrush,
skunk cabbage, other
_ water plants: water lily, eelgrass, milfoil, other
other types of vegetation
b. What kind and amount of vegetation will be removed
or altered? Natural vegetation will be removed. anfl_a
new ..landscaping plan per Tukwila requirements shall be
implemented.
c. List threatened or endangered species known to be on
or near the site. None.
.g.
IIIEvaluation. for
Agency Use Only
d. Proposed landscaping, use of native plants, or other
measures to preserve or enhance vegetation on the
site, if any: The trees along. Snutbnenter Rni1eva _
_ i- 1& -y'i .•l
1-
•S •-••
1 .1
1-
adjacent to the GreP.n River will remain intart Whe ver
'ossible. The proposed landsc.l'•• - - • • .and
indigenous plant materials and evergreen trees to create an
attractive landscape design in a Northwest theme.
5. Animals
a. Circle any birds and animals which have been
observed on or near the . site or are known to be on
or near the site:
birds: hawk, heron, eagle, songbirds, other:
crows, finches, sparrows, robins
mammals: deer, bear, elk, beaver, other:
None
fish: bass, almon trout, herring, shellfish,
other: /
b. List any threatened or endangered species known to
be on or near the site. None
c. Is the site part of a migration route? If so,
explain. The Green River may be a part of a migration
route for salmon and trout.
d. Proposed measures to preserve or enhance wildlife,
if any: 'ime riverbank will remain as lmdistiirharl as
possible and additional grasslands will ha p1antAre
which should enhance wild fnw.l habitat
M. Evaliation for
Agency Use Only
6. Energy and Natural Resources
a. What kinds of - energy (electric, natural gas, o.il,
wood stove, color) will be used to meet the
completed project's energy needs? Describe whether
it will be used for .heating, manufacturing, etc.
�1Pntri r nr nxh iral c THVA(' units .Ll1�1_,}� 11�
b. Would your project affect the potential use of solar
energy by adjacent properties? If so, generally
describe. No.
c. What kinds of energy 'conservation features are
included in the plans of this proposal? list other
proposed measures to reduce or control energy
impacts, if any: • Insulation of roof, slabs, walls
and windows may be ambler-fared.
7. Environmental Health
a. Are there any environmental health hazards,
including exposure to toxic chemicals, risk of fire
and explosion, spill, or hazardous waste, that could
occur as a result of this proposal? If so,
describe. No
1) Describe special emergency services that might
be required. NIA
2) Proposed measures to reduce or control environ-
mental health hazards, if any:
Dl /A
• Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
b. Noise
1) What types of noise exist in the area which may
affect your project (for example: traffic,
equipment, operation, other)?
Traffic noise exists but should not affect
the protect.
2) What types and levels of noise would be created
by or associated with the project on a short -
term or a long -term basis (for example: traf-
fic, construction, operation, other)? Indicate
what hours noise would come from the'site.
Short term construction noise resulting from
excavation equipment and trucks could occur
between 7 am and 5 pm.
3) Proposed measures to reduce or control noise
impacts, if any: Construction limited to
daylight hours only.
8. Land and Shoreline Use
a. What is the current use of the site and adjacent
properties? Protect site is currently vacant. •Pro■erties
to the Northam South and East are vacant. The Green
River and Fort Dent Park lie to the West.
b. Has the site been used for agriculture? If so,
describe. No.
c. Describe any structures on the site. None
• Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
d. Will any structures be demolished? If so, what ?
No.
e. What is the current zoning classification of the
site? C -2
f. What is the current comprehensive plan designation
of the site? Commercial
g. If applicable, what is the current shoreline master
program designation of the site ?Urban
h. Has any part of the site been classified as an
"environmentally sensitive" area? If so, specify.
Yes, the Shoreline Master Program. The Green
River borders the West side of the property.
i. Approximately how many pe ssibou ldd reside am so or work
in the completed project? y y
185 people may be employed at the completed office
building. This is an estimate only.
j. Approximately how many people would the completed
project displace? Ngne
k. .Proposed measures to_ avoid or reduce displacement
impacts, if any:
1. Proposed measures. to ensure the proposal is com-
patible with existing and projected land uses and
plans, if any: Property is zoned C2L Act mining
properties are zoned C -2
developed in accordance with C -2 zoning.
-
4.• -
III Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
9. Housing
a. Approximately how many units would be provided, if •
any? Indicate whether high, middle, or low- income
housing? None '
b. Approximately how many units, if any, would be eli-
minated? Indicate whether high, middle, or low-
income housing. None
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control housing
impacts, if any: N/A
10. Aesthetics
a. What is the tallest height of any proposed
structure(s), not including antennas; what is the
principal exterior building material(s) proposed?
'Building height.is.approx. 28 -30 ft. Land in no case will it exceed the
code allowance of 35 ft. Roof top mechanical equipment is 6 to .8 ft.
and will not exceed the code either. Roof to mechanical equipment will
be set back 10 ft.' and screened. The principle perimeter exterior will be
(see next-page)
b. What views in the immediate vicinity would be
altered or obstructed? None
c.- Proposed measures to reduce or control aesthetic
'impacts, if any:Attractive architectural and
landscaping designs are pro _sed.
10a. continued:
concrete or metal panels, at the curve will be a glass curtin wall and
at the pavilion will be concrete, stucco or metal panels. Building
materials will be further defined in Shorelines, B.A.R. and permit
processes.
• Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
11. Light and Glare
a. What type of light or glare will the proposal
Elrodu4e? What time of day would it mainly occur?
ectrical illumination will be of two types. 1) Site and building-:exterior ..
lighting: Our intention is to use low glare lights on approx. 20 ft. stands
in conjuction with 30 inch tall low lare.1± ht bollards. 2) The other glare
e ement involves the exterior glass. Any building glare will be subject to
$.A.R..review but we anticipate any interior. or exterior glare to be minor.:
b. Could light or glare from the finished project be a
safety hazard or interfere with views? Nu
What existing off -site sources of . light or glare may
affect your proposal? None.
d. Proposed measures to reduce or control light and
glare impacts, if any: By use of low glare perimeter
lighting and working with n the reflectancies as
approved by B.A.R.
12. Recreation.
a. What designed and informal recreational oppor-
tunities are in the immediate vicinity?
Fort Dent Park
b. Would the proposed project displace any existing
recreational uses? If so, describe.
No.
c.
Proposed measures, to reduce or control impacts on
recreation, including recreation opportunities to be
provided by the project or applicant, if any:
A river trail along the Green River is prz.Q5ed.
• • Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
13. Historic and Cultural Preservation
a. Are there any places or objects listed on, or pro-
posed for, national, state, or local preservation
registers known to be on or next to the site? If
so, generally describe•. Fort Dent Park
is located across the river from the-site.
b. Generally describe any. landmarks or evidence of
historic, archaeological, scientific, or 'cultural
importance known to be on or next to the site. - .---
Fort Dent Park
c. Proposed measures to reduce or control impacts, if
any: None
14. Transportation
a. Identify public streets and highways serving . the
site, and describe proposed accss to the existing
street .system. Show on site plans, if_any. -
Interurban Avenue South, Interstate 405 and
Southcenter Boulevard. Ingress and egress will be
from Southcenter Boulevard.
b. Is the site currently served by public transit? .If
not, what is the approximate distance to the nearest .
transit stop? Not directly, although there is a bus
route along Interurban Avenue South.
c. How many parking spaces would the completed project
have? How.many would the project eliminate? - --
133 parking spaces are proposed, none will be - - -... -
eliminated. .
•
• Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
d. Will the proposal 'require any new roads or streets,
or improvements to existing roads or streets, not
including driveways? If so, generally describe
(indicate whether public or private).Curb,
gutter and sidewalks will be required on the East
sine of the property.
e. Will the project use (or occur in the immediate
vicinity of) water, rail, or air transportation? If
so, generally describe. The subject property
abuts the Green River.
f. How many vehicular trips per day would be generated
by the completed project? If known, indicate when
volumes would occur. According to the International
Traffic Engineers Trip Generation Manual approximately.
400 to 700 trips per day. 14% would occur in the a.m.
peak hours and 16% would occur in the ia.rri, peak hours.
g. Proposed measures to reduce or control transpor-
tation impacts, if any:Timing adjustmentsW°the existing
traffic light at interurban Avenue could help accomodate
extra traffic if necessary. •
15. Public Services
a. Would the project result in an increased need for
public services (for example: fire protection,
police protection, health care, schools, other)? If
so, generally describe. The .project could marginally
add to the need for police and fire protection.
b. Proposed measures to reduce or control direct
impacts on public services, if any.
None.
. Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
16. Utilities
a. Cir utilities currently available at the site:
natural •.s later") refuse service,
anitary sewer septic system, other.
b. Describe the utilities that are .proposed for the
project, the utility providing the service, and the
general construction activities on the site or in
the immediate vicinity which might be needed.
Presently., sewer and water are on site, and are -
serviced by the City of Tukwila. Electricity,
natural gas and telephone service will be needed and
will be provided by the following: Puget Power. Washington Natural Gas &
Pacific NW Bell. Actual construction requirements to hook up to these utilitieE
C. Signature are not known at this time.
The above answers are true and complete to the best of
my knowledge. I understand that the lead agency is
relying on them to make its d vision. //
Signature: `�'�°
Date Submitted:
TO BE COMPLETED BY APPLIOi
E. SUPPLEMENTAL SHEET FOR ALL PROJECT AND NON PROJECT
PROPOSALS
The objectives and the alternative'means of reaching the
objectives for a proposal will be helpful in reviewing the
aforegoing items of the Environmental Checklist. This
information provides a general overall perspective of the
proposed action in the context of the environmental infor-
mation provided and.the submitted plans, documents, suppor-
tive information, studies, etc.
1. What are the objective(s) of the proposal? To build
an aesthetically pleasing,.,two story office building which
should enhance the area surrounding Fort Dent and promote
future business growth through attractive site development,
food design and a well constructed facility.
2. What are the alternative means of accomplishing these
objectives? N/A
3. Please compare the alternative means and indicate the
preferred course of action: Number 1.
,: Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
Evaluation for
Agency Use Only
4. Does the proposal conflict with policies of the Tukwila
Comprehensive Land Use Policy Plan? If so, what poli-
cies of the Plan? No.
Proposed measures to avoid or reduce the conflict(s)
are: N/A
-23-
EXHIBIT A
Vicinity Map
ELL!'7TN
S I46T•
11BTN ST
5`' 149Th
50m$7;1-
5 RENTON VILL5LE?L
20
;S1156,1157.
1581H
2
$ 16OT•
PARR
ISI,EI i
$ 163R61*PE
I SI 169'N
S :166Th
S IBTN
ongal
Race
Tracll
$w. 151-1T $T
51'
mn
i
N
5 169 T•
S 70Th 57
a n s ]1ST SSE 71ST
5173
17541 5
777N 5
5 177TH 5 9
'9� - -neTN
g
S1
5177TH! ST _.w S'...
EXHIBIT B
T,EGAL DESCRIPTION
PARCEL B:
That portion of vacated Tracts 4 through 9 and 12 through 1.7, and
vacated streets adjoining, in Gundaker's Interurban Addition, lying
within Sections 23 and 24, Township 23 North -, Range 4 East W.M.,
described as follows:
Beginning at Highway Engineer's Station P.O.T. (2M) 127 +45.0 on
the 2M line shown on the State Highway map of Primary State
Highway #1 (SR405) Green River Interchange, sheet 2 of 4 sheets,
established by Commission Resolution # #1192, February 19, 1962;
thence Northeasterly at right angles to said 2M line North
30 °27'06" East 218.36 feet to a point on a line that is parallel
with and 140 feet (measured at right angles) Northeasterly of the
Southwesterly margin of.vacated Kennedy Street (67th Place S.)
as shown on the plat of Gundaker's Interurban Addition to Seattle,
as per plat recorded in Volume 14 of Plats, Page 46, records of
King County, said point being the true point of beginning of the
parcel to be described herein; •
thence from said true point of beginning along said parallel
line North 59 °32'54" West to•the bank of the Green River;
thence along the bank of the Green River.the following courses:
North 38 °19'12" East to a point lying South 30 °04'58" West
334.53 feet from the Southwesterly line. of the lands conveyed
to King County by Statutory Warranty Deed recorded under
Recording No. 7507300471 and North 30 °04'58" East 334.53 feet to
said Southwesterly line;•
thence along said Southwesterly line South 59 °24'45" East 183.62
feet to a point on the Northwesterly line of the lands conveyed
to the City of Tukwila by Quit Claim Deed recorded under
Recording No. 7410290105; - • -
thence along last said Northwesterly line the following courses:
From.a tangent that bears South 30 °53'45" West along the arc of
a curve to the left having a radius of 60.00 feet and a central
angle of 33 °10'27 ", an arc length of 34.74 feet;
thence tangent to the preceding curve South 02 °16'42" East
52.69 feet;
- continued -
DESCRIPTION, PARCEL B (continued):
thence tangent to the preceding course along the arc of a curve
to the right having a radius of 32.00 feet and a central angle
of 24 °24'42 ", an arc length of 13.63 feet;
thence tangent to the preceding curve South 22 °0.8'00" West
223.43 feet; •
thence tangent to the preceding course along the arc of a curve
to the right having .a radius of 270.00 feet and a central angle
of 08 °19'06 ", an arc length of 39.20 feet;
thence tangent to the preceding curve South 30°27'06" West
66.52 feet to the true point of beginning;
EXCEPT that portion conveyed to the City of Tukwila by deed
recorded under Recording.No. 7708040599;
Situate in the City of Tukwila, County of King, State of Washington.
APPENDIX E
UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98195
28 May, 1982
Institute for Environmental Studies
Office of Public Archaeology
Engineering Annex, FM -12
(206) 543 -8359
Thomas E. Moore, Project Manager
Construction Division
Evergreen Management Company
1721 132 Avenue N.E.
Bellevue, Washington 98005
DEC 1 is
Re: Archaeological reconnaissance of the 16 acre Tukwila Bend Project
Dear Mr. Moore:
The following report, in letter format, details the findings of the Office of
Public Archaeology's recent assessment of the proposed Tukwila Bend office
complex. Assessment procedures included archival research and field investi-
gation. Assessment activities were conducted by Mr. Guy F. Moura and Mr.
Stephen Elmore on 7, 10 and 11, May, 1982.
The Project Area •
The project is located on the west bank of the Green River, just north of
the Interstate 405 and SR 181 junction, in the town of Tukwila, King County,
Washington. The project is more specifically located on the western boundary
of the NW and SW 1 /4s of Sec. 24, T23N, R4E (Figures 1 and 2).
The project area now forms a rectangular peninsula on the Green River. This
peninsula was created when a river bow was truncated by the Great Northern
Railroad some time prior to 1949 (U.S.G.S. 1949). Immediately west of the
site is a 150 foot bluff; to the north, east, and south lies the floodplain
of the Green. River Valley. An isolated hill rises 150 feet above the flood -
plain, on the east side of the river, northeast of the proposed office com-
plex.
During on -site inspection, it was discovered that river sediments had been
removed from the site and /or bulldozed into several mounds. Except for a
narrow band of sands, retained by rip -rap around the periphery, the site is
now composed of pebble to boulder sized rocks in a fine grained matrix which
is presumably of glacial origin. When the river sediments were removed is
unknown; it could have occurred when the road to the Fort Dent Athletic Com-
plex was built (it now transects the site), or during railroad or highway
construction.
0 Recycled Paper
93.
T. E. Moore
28 May, 1982
Page Three
203. A sandy point, now occupied by the picnic- grounds at Renton
Junction, Cuhu'dutugwEl., "burning each other;" (hud, "to
burn "). Snakes who land here after swimming across the
river, in the summer time, get burned by the sand and die.
203a. A place on the W. bank of the river, Bjs /g3a'ka, "where
there are crows."
203b. Number not used.
203c. A bluff overhanging the river on its W. side, Bsts/ xEbe'dats,
"place of ironwood." People used to go there for ironwood,
tsE1x"'bld. (Waterman, ca. 1920:31 and 32).
Two historically documented villages (Dalan et al. 1981 and Hedlund 1981)
are within a kilometer downstream of the project. These villages are
distinct from the prehistoric sites mentioned earlier.
The green river was settled by EuroAmericans early in the history of the
Pacific Northwest. The property on which the cultural resource reconnais-
.sance was conducted may have first been claimed by William H. Gilliam be-
tween 1850 and 1855. It is known that at the time of his claim,. Gilliam
was a single man who had not been in the territory prior to 1850. Gilliam
claimed 160 acres in portions of Sections 23 and 24, for which he later re-
ceived title under the provisions of the Donation Claim Land Law. Although
residence and cultivation were required to receive title for the land,
General Land Office plat maps (1861 and 1863) do not depict structures or
farmed lands; nor do they even locate Gilliams' claim, which was patented
in 1866 (Shackleford 1940).
During the Indian Wars of 1855-56, the local settlers constructed Fort Dent
for protection against raids by the hostiles. It was built across the river
from the project area, and today an historic marker indicates the former
location (Dalan et al. 1981).
Field Reconnaissance
As stated earlier, upon arriving at the site it became apparent that consider-
able surface sediment removal had occurred several years ago. The entire site
was surveyed in 10 meter intervals and 14 core and 8 shovel test holes were
placed to determine the limits of disturbance and to look for cultural re-
sources. Because of this disturbance, and the small marsh, -core locations
and shovel tests were not systematically placed. Virtually all of the site,
except for a narrow strip along the bank, was disturbed. It appears the
site was bulldozed and several mounds of earth remain on the grounds to attest
to this theory. No cultural resources were located during this survey.
Recommendations
While archival research indicated a high potential for discovery of cultural
material, the disturbance to the site would have eradicated any such materials.
We therefore recommend that this project be allowed to proceed. However, in
95
STUDY AREA
FIG. 1 VICINITY MAP
Scale In Mlles
REFERENCES CITED
Dalan, Rinita, Sandra Hunt and Steve Wilke
1981 Cultural resource overview and reconnaissance: Green River flood
damage reduction study. Geo -Recon International, Seattle.
Government Land Office
1861 Plat Map T23N R4E A. On file in microfilm, Suzzallo Library,
University of Washington, Seattle.
1863 Plat Map T23N R4E B. On file in microfilm, Suzzallo Library,
University of Washington, Seattle.
Haeberlin, H. and E. Gunther
1930 The Indians of Puget Sound. University of Washington Publications
in Anthropology 4(11). Seattle.
Hedlund, G.
1981 Archaeological resources at the mouth of the Black. River; a survey
conducted for the King County Department of Public Works. Copy of
ms. on file at the Office of Public Archaeology, University of
Washington, Seattle.
Shackleford, C.
1940 Donation Claim Land Law., In Building a State, Washington 1889 -1939
Vol. 3, edited by 0. B. Sperline and C. Hiles. Washington State
Historical Society, Tacoma.
Smith, M.
1940 The Puyallup- Nisqually. Columbia University, Contributions to
Anthropology Vol. 32.
Spier, L.
1936 Tribal Distribution in Washington. General Series in Anthropology 3.
United State Geological Survey
1949 Renton, Washington. 7 1 /2 minute Quadrangle Map. Federal Center,
Denver.
Washington. State Archaeological Site Survey Records.
On file, Office of Public Archaeology, University of Washington,
Seattle.
Waterman, T. T.
ca. 1920 An unpublished manuscript of Indian place - names. On file, Northwest
Collection, University of Washington, Seattle.
99
• a_
,44ct
lyt-pt-e
FORT DENT PLAOUE WORDING:
About 250 yards due north of
erected in 1856 by Company B,
for the prcr'xction of pioneer
Green River Valleys.
(PLAOUE)
DONATED BY: City of Tukwila
SPONSORED BY:
King County Parks and Recreation
City of Seattle Parks and Recreation
Seattle /King County Historical Society
White River Valley Historical Society'
365th Civil Affairs Brigade, U. S. Army Reserve
Tukwila Historical Society
this monument is the site of Fort Dent
Ninth Regiment, United.States Infantry
settlers in the--7, Duwamish, Black and
HISTORY: FORT DENT ATHLET•ENTER 5/21/76.
When this land was described by the poet Longfellow as the "forest primeval" the river sys-
tems were the "highways" through the wilderness, supplemented by trails into the forests or
across the mountains. Two rivers joined together at the north side of this playfield: the
Black River which drained Lake Washington plus its tributary, the Cedar River, flowing from
the Cascades; and the Green River from the vicinity of Mount Rainier, all joining here to
form the Duwamish River flowing into Puget Sound. At this point the river is above the
tidal reach of the Sound. The Indian name for this area was "Tukwila" which meant "Hazelnut"
Tribes in the Puget Sound country were the frequent victims of slavery raids by their more
aggressive neighbors in Canada and Eastern Washington. Word that such a raid was planned by
a mountain tribe caused the leader of the Suquamish tribe to propose a defensive strategy
which was approved by the inter - tribal Council. Knowing that the marauders would come down
the Green River at night, Sealth led his tribesmen to this site and during the day felled a
tree across the river, just out of sight around the sharp bend in the river at the southwest
corner of the playfield. Lying just inches above the water, the log effectively capsized
the marauders' canoes - and Sealth`s braves won an easy victory. For this feat, the Council
selected Sealth (Seattle) as Chief of the allied tribes of Puget Sound (c. 1810).
Explorations of the Northwest began centuries ago by Asians crossing the Bering Straits or
by boat - the probable ancestors of the Indian. European voyages began in 1543 by the
Spaniard Ferrero. Those who followed him laid claim to the land in the name of their res-
pective monarchs, which of course led to conflicting claims and power struggles to build
Colonial Empires. Following establishment of the American Government after 1776, Congress
sought to colonize "The West" beOnning with Ohio in 1785 and financing the Lewis and Clark
Expedition to the "Far West ", not settled until 1846. Spain did not relinquish the Oregon
Territory until 1819 and the Mexican War of 1846 was uncomfortably close to Puget Sound - by
boat. So when the Oregon Territory Donation Land Claim Act was passed in 1850 and the
westward trek of wagon trains and sailing ships began, the settlers were mindful of the
not - too - settled Territorial conflicts. They sought to defend their claims by protecting.
their "highways ": the river systems. There appears to have been only one all- weather
road in this area until 1870. The Army built a series of block houses along the Duwamish
beginning at the River delta near Pioneer Square. The junction of the Black and Green
Rivers was chosen as the site for another and was named FORT DENT in honor of Capt. FREDERICK
T. DENT, brother -in -law of then Captain U. S. Grant. Captain Dent supervised construction
of the blockhouse in 1855; it was not manned except by volunteers and was used by both set-
tlers and Indians. (Unrest in the area continued: the "Pig War" incident in the San Juan
Islands, the post -Civil War-raid by an armed Confederate vessel, The Shenandoah, the con- .
struction of the Navy Yard at Bremerton in 1891, and the establishment of Fort Lawton in
1898 to defend it and Puget Sound, and the 1898 Spanish - American War, etc.).
The soils present at this site - and in the whole valley - are mainly silts and silty fine
sands, largely flood deposits, providing a rich farmland, becoming the sites of the first
Land Claims by the Maples, Van Asselts, etc., in 1851. Those who settled in this vicinity
chose the name "Garden City" which was used until 1905 when it was renamed Tukwila. Ano-
ther Indian name in this region was "Tecumseh" who was Chief of the Black River tribe.
"Riverton" was also a local name.
As the towns of Seattle, Renton, Tacoma, etc., continued to grow, so did the need for farm
produce and the truck farms of the Valley multiplied and prospered. Even flower farms were
successful, i.e., daffodils. The development of the farmlands caused the building of roads
for the farm trucks and railroads, and even the (interurban) trolley car - alongside of
which Interurban Avenue was built - hauled produce and freight to Seattle and Tacoma (from
1902- 1928). The major market in Seattle was the now - famous Pike Street Farmers' Market,
set up in 1906 to provide low cost, fresh product to the consumer, after a consumer "revolt"
over high prices for not -so -fresh produce in stores. Many farms were worked by Chinese
and Japanese who had been impo r r1
d as cheap labor to build the lroads and then expelled
from the city during the anti- Chinese riots of 1686, a depression following the completion
of the trans - continental railroad. Being denied the right of citizenship, the Asians could
not own property until the late 1920's; then after 1941 Japanese citizens and immigrants
alike lost all their holdings in both farm and city.
The towns became cities. Seattle filled the tidal flats and adjacent valley of the Duwamish,
rechanneling the river as far as South 102nd and the valley began to "grow" industrial plants.
With it came urban sprawl /suburbia with its supportive shopping and industrial centers, caus-
ing zoning changes with an increase in taxes. As one farmer explained: "There is only so
much revenue in an acre of land, even when it's good land farmed by a good farmer." This,
together with the loss of motivation to work on the land by the farmers' children and the
amount of foodstuffs produced, packaged and purveyed through agricultural corporations, has
led to the demise of the truck farmer. The Department of Agriculture has estimated that in
the 1920's there were 300 truck farms in the county; by 1969 there were only 86. By 1969,
the Riverview (Dairy) Farm on this site had been acquired. by Puget Power in a landbank and
was chosen for this athletic center in 1971 after the 7 proposed sites were rejected by the
Seattle and King County Park Departments.
The junction point of the Black River with the Green River to form the Duwamish is still evi-
dent on the north side of the playfield. But the Black River ceased to exist after 1917,
when, after a long and heated debate over its location, the Lake Washington Ship Canal opened,
an event which lowered the level of Lake Washington by 9'. The Cedar River, which had been
a tributary of the Black River, was turned by dredging to flow into the south end of Lake
Washington to prevent a stagnation of the south end of the lake. The bed of the Black River
was filled. There is no record of the fate of the salmon which sought to return via the
Black River to spawning beds in the Cedar River or Lake Washington basin - if they did. Old
residents claim to have seen the Indians fishing salmon from the Duwamish River. Included .
in the construction of the locks was a fish ladder - a feature that was improved for both
fish and viewer with the development of Commodore Park in 1976. The lowering of the level
of Lake Washington was permitted "to lessen the havoc caused by the flooding of the tributary
river valleys - an alarming 7' crest was recorded in 1867." (Water Dept.) Flooding of the
Green River occurs eiery year but it is seldom a major disaster. The playfield was designed
to be above the level of the highest flood recorded over a period of 100 years. So - during
construction of the facility, a spring flood exceeded the 100 year record! The pond is said
to be the former White Lake (references in 1860 by J. A. Costello and in an 1894 deed refer
to the White River, now known as the Green River; the deed notes that the White River was
diverted in Auburn in 1907.)
(An interurban story: on city streets it used a trolley wire but in the country it used a
third rail which enabled it to achieve speeds up to 70 miles per hour. For a long distance
its tracks paralleled those of the steam locomotive, which led to frequent races between
steam and electricity; usually won by the interurban, even when pulling a freight car or
two, and cheered on by passengers.)
A cedar panel on the site was carved by Marvin Oliver, Quinalt artist: 1976.
EEN RIVER
70 Km/0 GOU.VTY
7t' GOA/4,7' / .7 6.a•L4 /N 77 /A/
B t.VK 6.ROTEC T /ON
REnIOVE c BS7i
(REC_ .VO. 5-3.5.34.13,8)
LE3AL DESCRIPTION
a+ ,i .Ce."
OP Ma P4.0. r0 000corr0/0 •0104/irt
▪ wn.C.a▪ ..�r.
aw
Ts a • Po.. •0147.441114.• cf. 00 not Correer0c0 r0 maµ
tr. •••raan`rr a
•
, r. .01.4•0• 4.4.0.4 0 + +rw w urc
•rap .r. 0 pr,.e ..o. 4.0..14..•.. 'Drop
4
EX /�lT //VG &70R.N MN
E_ /z.zr (z¢ '.. •
5 2. (27 ")
R /M= 26.5
LEGEND (EXIST/N6 CONO /.T /DNS)
�sA V seweP
STORM Se WER - O Fine HYOI
.'.•yu `'''.
y:W4TER -MAin/ �zi� CONTUUf
:6•W
FORGE 1,1A/ N
,
� b•L X �C.. � , '. .iL
PROPOSED STRUCTURE"
Z'
2 �
J
OW:: -.
Q.L
CC LL
• 0
Z. W'.
_ G
CC
ie a o'-a" xd-c
LIb;-`i Ili 1�•=CJ��'
A - e IM" $ . IyCGC+r15 /4m *1F'4 2°i' fb�-6 '
b j�iM A 4040 "or, W T • .
7
R Y1.104Freem2siJF 79W 9P- R, WHr(G _..
CCMC6. -e' IN c cRBTB ORT•• .
MITHYN •
BOWMAN:
■ EMRICH
• GROUP-PS
ARCH ITECTURE-
PLAINNING AND
INTERIOR DESIGN
2000 112TH AvE NE
- BELLEVUE. WASH
28004 (201,)4:A3344
JOB NO. eccy.>4.01
DATE 5•z1. ere.
DRAFT ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT STATEMENT
for the
TUKWILA BEND OFFICE PARK
Prepared by
CITY OF TUKWILA
PLANNING DEPARTMENT
For the Review and Comment of Citizens,
Citizen Groups, and Governmental Agencies
In Compliance With:
The State Environmental Policy Act of 1971
Chapter 43.21c, Revised Code of Washington
Revised SEPA Guidelines, Effective January 21, 1978
Chapter 197 -10, Washington Administrative Code
City of Tukwila Ordinance #1211
DATE OF ISSUE: April 29, 1983
DATE COMMENTS DUE: June 3, 1983
COST PER COPY: $6.00
Table of Contents
INTRODUCTION 1
RECIPIENTS OF THE DRAFT EIS 3
SUMMARY OF CONTENTS OF THE DRAFT EIS 5
DESCRIPTION OF THE PROPOSAL 13
Name of Proposal and Sponsor 13
Location of the Project 13
Construction Schedule 13
Other Agency File Numbers 13
Physical and Engineering Aspects 13
Existing Plans and Regulations 16
EXISTING CONDITIONS, ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION 21
Elements of the Physical Environment:
Earth 21
Water 22
Vegetation and Wildlife 24
Air 25
Noise 28
Land Use 32
Light and Glare 32
Natural Resources 33
Risk of Explosion or Hazardous Emission 33
Elements of the Human Environment:
Population and Housing 35
Transportation and Circulation 36
Public Services 48
Energy 49
Utilities 51
Aesthetics 52
Archaeology /History 53
Recreation 53
Fiscal Impacts 54
IRREVERSIBLE OR IRRETRIEVABLE COMMITMENTS OF RESOURCES AND
SHORT -TERM ENVIRONMENTAL USES VS. LONG -TERM PRODUCTIVITY 59
ALTERNATIVES TO THE PROPOSAL 60
UNAVOIDABLE ADVERSE IMPACTS 61
LIST OF ELEMENTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT 62
REFERENCES 64
APPENDICES 67
A. Report of Geotechnical Investigation 67
B. General Description of Noise 81
C. Method Used to Analyze Levels of Service 85
D. Capacity Analysis Worksheets 87
E. Report of Archaeological Reconnaissance 93
FIGURES
Figure 1: Vicinity 14
Figure 2: Site Plan 15
Figure 3: Noise Measurement Location 29
Figure 4: 1982 Average Weekday Traffic Volumes 37
Figure 5: Trip Distribution 42
Figure 6: 1984 Average Daily Traffic Volumes (Without Project) 44
Figure 7: 1984 Average Daily Traffic Volumes (With Project) 45
TABLES
Table I:
Table II:
Table III:
Table IV:
Table V:
Table VI:
Table VII:
Table VIII:
Table IX:
Table X:
Table XI:
Table B -I:
Table B -II:
Existing Noise Levels
Predicted Noise Levels
Population Projections
Existing Level of Service
Description of Level of Service
Four -Year Accident History
Existing Transit Service
Office Park Trip Generation
1984 Level of Service -- With and Without Project
1990 Level of Service — With and Without the New Alignment
Projected Property Taxes
Noise Limitations
Federal Highway Administration Design Noise Level,
Activity Relationships
30
31
35
38
38
39
40
41
43
47
55
82
83
Introduction
ACTION SPONSOR
Evergreen Management Company
1721 132nd Avenue NE
Bellevue, Washington 98005
(206) 881-2212
PROPOSED ACTION
The action sponsor is proposing that the City of Tukwila approve a Substantial
Development Permit in accordance with the City Shoreline Master Program and
building permits necessary to construct an office park of approximately 380,000 square
feet in five separate buildings.
PROJECT LOCATION
The site is located in Tukwila east of the intersection of Southcenter Boulevard and
Interurban Avenue.
LEAD AGENCY
The City of Tukwila Planning Division.
RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL /CONTACT PERSON
Brad Collins
Director of Planning
433 -1848
PRINCIPAL CONTRIBUTORS /LOCATION OF BACKGROUND DATA
Environmental Analysis and Document Preparation:
Wilsey & Ham, Inc. Contact Person:
1980 112th Avenue NE William E. Derry
Bellevue, Washington 98004
(206) 454-3250
Traffic:
Entranco Engineers
1515 - 116th Avenue NE
Bellevue, Washington 98004
(206) 454-0683
1
Architecture /Layout:
Lance Mueller Associates
130 Lakeside
Seattle, Washington 98122
(206) 325 -2553
Archaeology:
Office of Public Archaeology
University of Washington
'Engineering Annex FM -12
Seattle, Washington 98195
(206) 543 -8359
Soils:
Dames & Moore
155 NE 100th Street
Seattle, Washington 98125
(206) 523 -0560
REQUIRED APPROVALS
- Substantial Development Permit
- Building Permit
- Interurban Corridor Design Review
State Flood Control Zone Management Permit
- FEMA Flood Plain Management Permit
COST OF COPIES: $6.00
DATE OF ISSUE OF DRAFT EIS: April 29, 1983
RETURN COMMENTS TO RESPONSIBLE OFFICIAL BY: June 3, 1983
Recipients of the Draft EIS
FEDERAL
Environmental Protection Agency
Department of Housing and Urban Development
U.S. Army Corps of Engineers, Seattle District Engineer
STATE
Department of Ecology
Department of Fisheries
Department of Game
Department of Transportation
Department of Social and Health Services
Ecological Commission
Office of Archaeology and Historic Preservation
Office of the Governor
Office of Program Planning and Fiscal Management
REGIONAL
METRO - Transit
METRO - Water Quality Division
Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency
Puget Sound Council of Governments
LOCAL GOVERNMENT
King County Department of Public Works, Hydraulics Division
City of Renton
King County Parks Division
CITY OF TUKWILA
Mayor
City Council
Planning Commission
Public Works Department
Parks and Recreation Department
Police Department
Fire Department
City Attorney
SEPA Information Center
Finance Department.
UTILITIES /SERVICES
South Central School District #406
Pacific Northwest Bell
Puget Sound Power & Light Company
Washington Natural Gas Company
3
LIBRARIES
King County Public Library
Renton Public Library - Main Branch
Tukwila Public Library
University of Washington Library,
College of Architecture and Urban Planning
NEWSPAPERS
Daily Journal of Commerce
Highline Times
Renton Record Chronicle
Seattle Post - Intelligencer
Seattle Times
OTHERS
Tukwila Chamber of Commerce
Rainier Audubon Society
Seattle -King County Commuter Pool
Summary of Contents of Draft EIS
THE PROPOSAL
The proposed action is the grantin
Tukwila. The 22 -acre site
fourth by Interurban Ave
constructed in five separate three -st
landscaped, master - planned complex.
its necessary to construct an office park in
isles by the Green River and on the
383,500 s• are feet of office space would be
• 1 • ings. The buildings would be within a
surrounde
total
Office use of the site is consistent with the city's zoning code, comprehensive plan and
shoreline master program.
Parking would be provided to exceed city code requirements.
Land would be
construct
on the perimeter of the site along the river for the city to
riverfront trail.
SUMMARY OF ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION
A. EARTH
B.
Impacts
Repositioning of soils on -site.
Excavation beneath proposed buildings of approximately 3 feet of soil.
Potential erosion during construction.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Earthwork scheduled during summer months if possible.
b. Exposed soils hydroseeded upon completion of earthwork to control ero-
sion.
c. Temporary silt traps constructed and all runoff routed internally to them
prior to leaving the site.
WATER
i Impacts
Runoff increased from the site to the Green River via an existing outfall.
Runoff containing increased silts, nutrients and petroleum products.
Slight reduction in infiltration and groundwater recharge.
d. Elimination of seasonal ponding on site.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Detention facilities to reduce the peak flows of runoff from the site by
delaying them.
b. Permanent silt traps and oil /water separators installed to be effective in
reducing silt and petroleum products if maintained regularly.
c. Temporary silt traps installed and maintained during construction.
C.
d. Sweeping or vacuum cleaning of parking lots and direct discharge of roof
drains to storm sewer system to improve runoff quality upon completion
of the project.
VEGETATION AND WILDLIFE
pacts
Vegetation and wildlife habitat removed from the site.
No impacts to the Green River fish, or riverbank vegetation identified.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Landscaping proposed, providing limited habitat for common species of
wildlife.
b. Shoreline landscaping per TMC 18.44.130 will provide shade for riverwater
helping to control water temperature enhancing fishery value.
c. Retention, enhancement of seasonal pond as landscaped amenity is not
proposed, but could be required by the city.
D. AIR
1. Impacts
a. Vehicular generated air pollutants would occur but would not cumulatively
cause federal standards to be exceeded.
b. Airborne dust would be created during construction.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Traffic improvements constructed to minimize idling time, thereby re-
ducing emissions.
b. Water or oil exposed soils during construction to reduce dust.
E. NOISE
1. Impacts
a. A slight long -term increase in noise levels from additional traffic.
b. A short -term increase from construction activity.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Limit construction hours, 6 am to 6 pm.
b. Require proper mufflers on equipment.
c. Locate equipment away from noise sensitive sources.
F. LIGHT AND GLARE
1. Impacts
a. Light emissions from the buildings, from parking lot lighting and auto-
mobile headlights.
Reflective glass used on the buidings reflecting sunlight onto areas of the
site.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Lighting shielded to avoid spillover onto other properties.
b. Solar reflective be limited to approximately 50% of the building surfaces.
6
G. NATURAL RESOURCES
1. Impacts
Consumption of typical quantities of land, construction materials and fos-
sil fuels.
2. Mitigating Measures
No mitigating measures identified.
H. RISK OF EXPLOSION OR HAZARDOUS EMISSION
1. Impacts
A temporary, slight risk of explosion or hazardous emission during con-
struction due to the use of heavy equipment.
2. Mitigating Measures
Strict safety requirements enforced for construction activities.
I. POPULATION AND HOUSING
1. Impacts
A slight, but insignificant, increase in population and housing demand in
Tukwila due to the project.
2. Mitigating Measures
No mitigating measures identified.
J. TRANSPORTATION AND CIRCULATION
Impacts
Project generating approximately 7,919 trip ends per day.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Signal timing and phasing.
b. Addition of a dual left -turn lane for traffic exiting the site.
c. Encouraging future tenants to use carpools and transit.
K. PUBLIC SERVICES
1. Impacts
a. An incremental increase in demand for police, fire, road maintenance,
park maintenance and general government service.
b. Short -term demand for additional street cleaning service during construc-
tion.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. Generation of tax revenues to nearly offset the increase in demand for
city services. (School tax revenues would exceed demand for services.)
b. Fire control systems constructed to code within and surrounding the
buildings.
c. Regular street cleaning provided by the applicant during construction as
necessary, and wheel washing provided by contractor for any vehicles
exiting the site during construction prior to paving.
7
L. ENERGY
1. Impacts
a. Consumption of energy for construction and for heating and lighting upon
completion.
b. Employees consumption of energy commuting to and from the site.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. The project constructed in compliance with the Washington State Energy
Code.
b. Using carpools and transit to reduce the demand for energy by comm-
uters.
M. UTILITIES
1. Impacts
Additional demand for the utility systems on site which are adequate to
handle the project.
2. Mitigating Measures
No mitigating measures identified.
N. AESTHETICS
1. Impacts
a. Visible from nearby streets, I -405 and apartments on top of the hill west
of the site.
b. Possible unfinished appearance of site due to incremental phasing of
construction.
2. Mitigating Measures
a. A planned development for the entire site.
b. Landscaping.
c. Uniform architectural style.
O. ARCHAEOLOGY /HISTORY
0 Impacts
No impacts.
2. Mitigating Measures
No mitigating measures identified.
P. RECREATION
1. Impacts
Recreational opportunities on the site enhanced by improved public access
to the riverfront.
2. Mitigating Measures
Space for a riverfront trail provided.
Q. FISCAL IMPACTS
1. Impacts
The cost of city services demanded by the project approximately equal to
the revenues generated by the project to the city.
2. Mitigating Measures
No mitigating measures identified.
SUMMARY OF ALTERNATIVES
A. NO ACTION
1. Description
If the project is denied or the city takes no action on the application, the
adverse impacts associated with the project will be delayed for several
months while an appeal is processed or an alternative plan to use the site
is developed. The likely result is that the site would be developed in
individual parcels by separate developers. The site has been subdivided
previously.
2. Impacts
In the past several years, a variety of proposals have been made for devel-
oping the site. The most recent have included an athletic club and a hotel
on portions of the site. Without the unified development of the site,
impacts would probably be greater than the present proposal. It would
also be more difficult to coordinate financing of mitigating measures.
B. LESS INTENSIVE USE
1. Description
Since the site is zoned for regional retail and the Comprehensive Plan also
allows the retail use, the present proposal is a less intensive use than is
allowed by the city codes and ordinances. Reducing the intensity further
would probably mean an office use with fewer square feet on the site.
Residential uses would also be less intensive uses but are not economically
feasible due to the cost of the land.
Other uses permitted by the zoning and comprehensive plan include re-
gional retail uses.
2. Impacts
Reduced office use would result in comparable on -site impacts but would
reduce traffic impacts off -site. Residential uses often have a relatively
higher demand for public services and generate relatively fewer tax reve-
nues. In addition, the high noise environment reduces the suitability of
the site for residential use. Regional retail uses generally have greater
on -site and off -site impacts than office developments.
9
C. PHASING
The project will be built in phases in response to market demand. This may allow
time for the city to address and solve the area -wide traffic problems. Portions of
the site that are graded but not developed immediately would be seeded to control
erosion and minimize aesthetic impacts.
SUMMARY OF UNAVOIDABLE ADVERSE IMPACTS
A. EARTH
1. Changes in topography because of grading.
2. Decrease in soil permeability due to the introduction of impermeable surfaces.
3. Loss of topsoil productivity.
B. WATER
1. Increase in storm water runoff volume increasing urban pollutant levels.
2. Potential decrease in groundwater quality.
C. VEGETATION AND WILDLIFE
1. Removal of vegetation from the site.
2. Elimination of resident wildlife species.
D. AIR
1. Short -term increase in particulate matter during construction.
2. Localized increase in carbon monoxide levels due to increase traffic.
E. NOISE
1. Short -term increase in noise during construction.
2. Increase in noise because of increased traffic.
F. LIGHT AND GLARE
Increased light and glare from reflective building surfaces, lighting equipment and
automobile traffic.
G. TRANSPORTATION AND CIRCULATION
Increased traffic to and from the site on adjacent roads.
H. PUBLIC SERVICES
1. Increased demand for police and fire protection.
2. Increased demand for solid waste disposal.
I. ENERGY
Increased energy consumption of all types for construction, operation, and trans-
portation.
10
J. UTILITIES
1. Increased consumption of water and electricity.
2. Increased demand for telephone service.
K. HOUSING
Insufficient housing opportunity within Tukwila community; increased housing
demand may be transfered to surrounding cities.
11
Description of the Proposal
NAME OF PROPOSAL AND SPONSOR
The name of the proposed project is the Tukwila Bend Office Park. The sponsor is the
Evergreen Management Company.
LOCATION OF THE PROJECT
The site is located in Tukwila on both sides of Southcenter Boulevard east of the inter-
section with Interurban Avenue. As shown in Figure 1, the parcel is surrounded on three
sides by the Green River. It is an irregularly shaped parcel located in the east half of
Section 23 and the west half of Section 24, Township 23 North, Range 4 East.
OTHER AGENCY FILE NUMBERS
None.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Construction will be phased in response to market demand beginning in the second half
of 1983.
PHYSICAL AND ENGINEERING ASPECTS
The site is an undeveloped parcel of approximately 22 acres surrounded on three sides
by the Green River and on the fourth side by Interurban Avenue. The site has been
filled and graded in the past. Southcenter Boulevard and the access road to Fort Dent
pass through the site.
The proposed project is for construction of an office park, shown in Figure 2. The
office park would comprise five buildings each three stories high. They would range
from 66,000 square feet to 94,000 square feet for a total of 383,500 square feet of
office space. The buildings are arranged around the perimeter of the site to maximize
views of the river from the buildings.
A landscape buffer and pedestrian trail are planned along the southern, eastern and a
portion of the northern boundary of the site adjacent to the river. The land for the trail
would be deeded to the city with actual trail construction completed by the city. Land-
scaping is also proposed along Southcenter Boulevard, the Fort Dent access road, and
Interurban Avenue, around each of the buildings and within the parking lot islands.
The buildings would cover 18.4% of the site. A total of 1,217 parking stalls would be
provided or one parking space per each 268 square foot of net leasable office space
13
A 70.000 at 3 try
B 88.000. at 3 story
C 80.000 at. 3 story
D 94500 at 3 story
E 73,000 at 3 story
..w ......A.[
11111•111111/1/ 0•1110
O 200' 400'
Lance Weller & Associates Architects
Tukwila Bend
OfficePark Site Plan
FIG. 2 .
15
(based on 85% of each building being leasable). The proposed parking provided is in
excess of zoning code minimum requirements.
Access to the site would be via three driveways onto Southcenter Boulevard.
EXISTING PLANS AND REGULATIONS
The site is zoned C -2 (Regional Retail Business) and office buildings are specifically
allowed within the zone. The project would comply with all height, yard and area
regulations. The Tukwila zoning code requires 2.5 parking spaces per 1,000 square feet
of office space. The project would provide 1,217 parking spaces and thereby exceeds
the code requirements.
The site is also subject to the city's Shoreline Overlay Zone. The project also complies
with all requirements of this overlay, zone.
Interurban Special Review Area
The project is within the interurban special review area as identified in the zoning code
(18.60.060). A project within this area must be reviewed by the Board of Architectural
Review to ensure that:
(A) Proposed development design should be sensitive to the natural amenities of
the area;
(8) Proposed development use should demonstrate due regard for the use and en-
joyment of public recreational areas and facilities;
(C) Proposed development should provide for safe and convenient on -site pedes-
trian circulation;
(D) Proposed property use should be compatible with neighboring uses and comple-
mentary to the district in which it is located;
(E) Proposed development should seek to minimize significant adverse environ-
mental impacts;
(F) Proposed development should demonstrate due regard for significant historical
features in the area.
The project would preserve the Green River bank, provide space for recreational trails
and sidewalks. It would be self - contained and compatible with neighboring uses, and
would not impact historical features in the area.
Comprehensive Land Use Policy Plan
The proposal is consistent with the Comprehensive Land Use Plan Map. The proposal
site plan is also consistent with the intent of the goals, objectives and policies in the
city's land use plan with the exception of preserving the seasonal pond on the site. The
following policies from the plan apply to the proposal.
16
Natural Environment
Policy: Encourage the use of live vegetation in development landscape
plans.
Comment: The site would be landscaped.
Policy: Strive to retain viable areas of wooded hillsides, agricultural
lands, wetlands, streams and the Green River for wildlife habitat.
Comment: The Green River bank would not be impacted. The seasonal pond
on.the site would be eliminated.
Policy: Strive to maximize the natural stream environment along the
course of the Green River in conformance with the goals of the
shoreline program in Tukwila.
Comment: The stream environment along the river would not be modified
and the project is in conformance with the Shoreline Master Pro-
gram.
Policy: Encourage the preservation of marshes and ponds for the reten-
tion of storm water runoff.
Comment: The seasonal pond on the site is not proposed to be preserved.
Policy: Encourage the preservation of marshes, ponds, and watercourses
for open space purposes and include them in the open space sys-
tem.
Comment: The seasonal pond on the site would not be preserved.
Open Space
Policy: Provide for passive recreational areas (parks, natural reserves,
picnic grounds) consistent with the needs of the community.
Comment: Space for a riverfront trail would be provided.
Policy: Locate public recreational facilities where they are easily acces-
sible to the resident population.
Comment: The riverfront trail would be accessible to the public.
Policy: Gain trail easements and open space along the Green River and
incorporate them into the lowland trail and open space system.
Comment: Space for a riverfront trail would be provided.
Commerce /Industry
Policy: Encourage the grouping of uses which will mutually and economi-
cally benefit each other or provide necessary services.
Comment: The project would be an economically beneficial grouping of of-
fices.
Policy: Allow for the location of new commercial and industrial areas and
the expansion of existing ones when this expansion is compatible
with surrounding land use and not detrimental to the public wel-
fare.
Comment: The project would be the location of a new office complex that
would be compatible with surrounding land use.
17
Policy: Encourage aesthetic building and site design in working and
trading areas.
Comment: The project would be master planned within an office park com-
plex with landscaping and unified architectural control.
Policy: Encourage the use of live landscaping in all developments.
Comment: Live landscaping would be used.
Policy: Promote adequate provisions for parking for all land uses.
Comment: Parking would be provided in excess of code requirement.
Policy: Commercial office developments should consider the adjacent use
districts in the design process.
Comment: Adjacent use districts were considered and these would not be
adversely affected.
Policy: Encourage the location of commercial offices in areas of high
natural amenities.
Comment: The site is surrounded on three sides by the Green River, a high
natural amenity.
Transportation /Utilities
Policy: Minimize conflict between moving traffic and parked vehicles.
Comment: Parking would be only in off - street parking lots.
Policy: Discourage the maneuvering of automobiles or trucks on public
rights -of -way.
Comment: The interior location of parking lots would comply with this
policy.
Policy: Promote the consolidation of access points to frontage properties
along major arterials.
Comment: All access to Interurban Avenue would be via Southcenter Boule-
vard, thus access would be consolidated.
Policy: Encourage the construction of safe internal access roads in de-
velopments and other private easement roads.
Comment: Internal circulation is provided in a safe manner with off - street
parking and designated pedestrian pathways.
Policy: Create a sidewalk or pathway system where every link is a part of
an integrated network.
Comment: Sidwalks and a riverfrot trail would be provided in an integrated
network within the site, connecting to city trail network offsite.
Policy: Design the storm water systems to handle the flow of peak runoff.
Comment: The storm water system will be designed to handle the flow of
peak runoff and will include catch basins, underground sewers and
detention.
,Policy: Encourage a part structural (pipe), part non - structural (detention
pond) storm sewer system.
Comment: Detention would be provided in pipes if required.
18
Policy: Where beneficial to downstream properties, control peak flow
runoff from the source at a rate similar to natural conditions.
Comment: A final determination of the need for on -site detention has not
been made.
Policy: Where possible, make provisions for local storm water which can-
not enter the Green River during periods of high flow.
Comment: Storage will be provided on -site during high river flows.
Policy: Encourage control of peak runoff at the source.
Comment: A final determination of the need for on -site detention has not
been made.
Shoreline Master Plan
The goals and policies of Tukwila's Shoreline Master Plan have been incorporated within
the zoning code in the shoreline overlay zone. Since the project complies with the
shoreline overlay zone, it also complies with the goals and policies of the Shoreline
Master Plan. Of particular note are the policies encouraging public access and trails
along the river. Public trails along the river would be a part of the proposed project.
No construction would occur within the "River Environment" (40 feet from the mean
high water mark); however, landscaping treatment as prescribed in TMC 18.44 would be
providedi within the "river environment" by the project proponent.
King Subregional Plan
The proposed development is consistent with policies contained in the Puget Sound
Council of Governments' King Subregional Plan relating to the phased growth objective,
encouraging the location of "new ... employment growth in areas or centers committed
to or designated for development." Since Tukwila is designated as a Secondary Metro-
politan Center in which offices are considered to be an appropriate land use, and since
zoning and services allowing development of the type proposed are already in place,
office development on the subject site adheres to major goals and policies contained in
the PSCOG Subregional Plan.
19
Existing Conditions, Environmental Impacts and Mitigation
• Elements of the Physical Environment
EARTH
EXISTING CONDITIONS
The site has been graded and is nearly level. Elevations range from approximately
21 feet to 30 feet.
Located on the Green River Valley flood plain, the site is underlain by typical alluvial
fine silts and sandy loams. The site was filled many years ago with several feet of soil
material that was surplus from construction of the area freeways. The site is now
above the 100 -year flood plain. The fill soils were not compacted when placed on the
site and would not provide adequate support for the proposed buildings. The fill is
medium - dense -to -dense and slightly -to- moderately compressible. (Refer to the Appen-
dix for a report on the soils of the site, investigated by Dames and Moore.)
There are no unique physical . features on the site. The site has revegetated naturally
and no significant erosion is occurring. Similarly, the river bank has been stabilized and
is not significantly eroding along the site.
"The Puget Sound region is located within a seismically active area. The soil type of the
site, and the associated soils of the lower Green River Valley, are considered
susceptible to "liquefaction" during earthquakes. This phenomenon occurs as ground
shaking causes a loss of supporting capacity within loose, fine, or organic soils, which
are heavily water saturated. Structures suported within or above the soil can undergo
significant settlement and possible tilting. The estimated recurrence interval for an
earthquake with a Richter magnitude of 5.0 is five years, for 6.0, thirty years, and for
7.0 and above, 150 years or greater. "*
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATING MEASURES
Prior to construction, the site would be regraded. Preliminary grading plans have not
been prepared, but the variation in existing topography indicates that there is sufficient
fill material on the site and that adequate grades can be established by repositioning
soil within it. Thus, there should not be a need for significant additional fill material on
the site.
There are two options available to provide adequate soil support for the building
foundations. Based on the soils report by Dames and Moore, the most economical
*City of Tukwila, Draft Environmental Impact Statement - Tukwila Hotel, June 1982,
p. 26.
21
would be to excavate a few feet of soil beneath each building and replace it with more
suitable soil material. As an alternative, the buildings could be pile- supported. A final
decision has not been made.
Since the site was previously filled, there would be no additional impacts to native soils
or agricultural soils. There would be a potential for erosion during construction. The
potential would be minimal due to the relatively flat topography and would be
temporary. Standard techniques such as temporary silt traps would be used during
construction to prevent excessive silt from leaving the site. Upon completion, site soils
would be stabilized by paving, buildings and landscaping. In the interim, exposed soils
would be hydroseeded to establish a grass cover and prevent erosion.
WATER
EXISTING CONDITIONS
The site is surrounded on three sides by the Green River. There is a small seasonal pond
located within the site. The pond is the result of localized surface water perched on
the fill soils, and is not indicative of ground water conditions. The seasonal pond exists
during the rainy winter months. It is created due to the low permeability of the
existing fill and due to the poorly defined drainage, patterns on the site. The pond dries
out and disappears in the spring and summer.
22
Approximate maximum
boundary
of seasonal pond
Beneath the existing fill soils on the site there are water- bearing strata within the
native soils. There are no other watercourses or water bodies within the site, but there
is an existing storm water outfall to the Green River in the north central portion. The
river surface at maximum allowable discharge is 23 feet. Most of the site is presently
at or above this level. There are no levees along the site.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATING MEASURES
Construction of the project will result in most of the site being covered with
impermeable surfaces (see Figure 2, Site Plan). This would result in increases in storm
water runoff. Surface drainage would be collected and routed to an internal detention
facility. The drainage system would also incorporate oil /water separators and silt
traps. Runoff would be discharged to the Green River via the existing storm water
outfall.
Development of this site as proposed will increase the storm water runoff from an
estimated peak rate of 2 cubic feet per second (cfs - 10% frequency storm) to an after
development peak rate of approximately 14.7 cfs, if collected in a conventional storm
drainage system and discharged directly to the Green River. Because of the short
concentration time of this site in relation to the total watershed of the Green River it
is probable that a direct discharge to the river would remove the water long before the
river level reached its peak elevation. Detention on site prior to discharge into the
river, although reducing the peak outflow rate, would delay this flow until river levels
were higher, adding to the impact on the river level. It is suggested that a waiver of
detention requirements for this site would lessen the impact of development on the
Green River.
Present detention requirements, in accordance with the King County Storm Drainage
Control Requirements and Guidelines indicate a total detention storage requirement of
15,900 cubic feet for a 10% frequency storm.
Whenever the river level is at or above the "Ordinary Mean High Water" level (9,000 cfs
river flow), King County may prohibit pumping of runoff water into the river. This
requirement indicates that a gravity drainage system will be the only full -time
protection. Under certain conditions the Corps of Engineers may increase the Green
River flow by discharging surplus water from the Howard Hanson Dam at the rate of
12,000 cfs. This condition, which can last for a 7 -day period will raise the river level
near the storm drain outfall to approximately Elevation 23. When the river is at this
level the outflow rate from the system will probably be slowed and some ponding in
23
parking lots may occur. Because of the potential for high river levels, if detention
storage is required, underground storage will be negligible and all detention storage
would be in surface ponds in parking areas. Should the storage be when within river
levels are low, the underground collection system then would provide additional storage
volume, reducing the extent of surface ponding. No additional diking of the river is
proposed.
Although peak flows of storm water runoff leaving the site would not be increased, the
frequency and duration of runoff would be increased. In addition, although silt traps
and oil /water separators would remove most solids, heavy metals and petroleum
products, there would be an increase in silt, petroleum products, and nutrients in storm
water leaving the site. This would be typical of similar new developments incorporating
the same mitigating measures. Sweeping or vacuum cleaning of parking lots and direct
discharge of roof drains to a storm sewer system would improve runoff quality upon
completion of the project.
It is presently proposed that the seasonal pond be eliminated. As a mitigation measure
to the elimination of the seasonal pond, another pond could be designed with the
buildings and parking arranged around it. This would require a reduction in parking and
building space or an increase in building height. The pond could be used for detention of
storm water runoff eliminating the need for underground storage or storage within the
parking lots. The pond would have to be designed either to drain completely between
storms or to be deep enough to maintain adequate water quality. If properly designed,
the pond could be a landscape amenity similar to the detention pond in the adjacent
Fort Dent Park.
VEGETATION AND WILDLIFE
EXISTING CONDITIONS
As stated previously, the site has been cleared and filled, eliminating native vegetation,
natural wildlife habitat and burying any organic soils. In the years since this
disturbance, the site has begun to recover. Vegetation has become established and
wildlife habitats are developing.
Vegetation on the site is now well established but is still predominately annual grasses
and weeds and some low shrubs. There are small groves of young cottonwood trees.
The wildlife of the site is typical of what is expected in this early successional type of
habitat. It is dominated by small birds (e.g., sparrows, robins, finches) and small
rodents. The seasonal pond is used by puddle ducks such as mallards during the winter
months. The species found on the site change seasonally and a greater diversity may be
found than could be supported just by the site due to the adjacent river and habitats in
24
the surrounding area. For example, insect - eating (e.g., warblers, swallows, flycatchers)
and fish - eating birds (e.g., belted kingfishers) are found along the perimeter of the site
near the river.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATING MEASURES
Construction of the project would result in removal of all vegetation and wildlife
habitat within the site boundaries including the seasonal pond. Riverbank vegetation is
outside of the project boundaries and would not be affected. This would be replaced by
parking areas and buildings. Formally landscaped areas would be established around the
perimeter of the site, around the buildings, along the interior roads and in islands within
the parking areas.
Once established, these landscaped areas would support a much reduced wildlife
population consisting primarily of species that are highly tolerant of human activity
such as robins, house sparrows and starlings.
At the present time, no modifications are anticipated to the riverbank. However, the
riverbank would be revegetated in accordance with the Tukwila Zoning Code, Chapter
18.44.130.
As a mitigating measure, the city could require that the seasonal pond be replaced on-
site with a permanent, landscaped pond to provide wildlife habitat.
AIR
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Meteorology
The closest weather station is at Sea -Tac International Airport which has a complete
U.S. Weather Bureau station operated by the National Oceanographic and Atmospheric
Administration (NOAA), and collects the data on temperature, precipitation, wind speed
and wind direction. The site locality is characterized by a typical Pacific Coast marine
climate with cool, wet winters and warm, dry summers.
Precipitation at Sea -Tac Airport averages about 39 inches annually, with annual
variations between 24 inches and 50 inches. November through February are tradition-
ally the wettest months with over half the annual precipitation occurring in this period.
Annual average temperature is about 50 °F. Temperatures average about 40 °F in the
winter months and about 65 °F during the summer months. Extreme temperatures of up
to 100 °F in the summer and down to 0 °F in the winter occur rarely.
Winter winds on the (Sea -Tac) plateau are predominantly southerly, originating from the
south - southwest 30 percent of the time. Summer and fall winds are .predominantly
25
northerly with 30 percent originating from the north- northeast. Winds of less than 2
MPH are moderately rare occurring about 10 percent of the time. Wind speeds are
generally low, rarely exceeding 20 MPH, but occasional storms may bring gusty winds of
up to 50 MPH. Fog occurs occasionally during the fall and winter months.
A monitoring station operated by the Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency
(PSAPCA) at Southcenter (Andover Park E.) shows that wind patterns in the valley are
slightly different. Southerly (S -SW) winds occur 35 -40% of the time and northerly
(N -NW) winds occur about 20% of the time. Calm conditions are more common,
occurring about 20% of the time at Southcenter.
Air Quality
The closest monitoring stations are located at Southcenter and in Kent. The following
synopsis describes the concentrations and trends of the major air pollutants:
• Suspended Particulate
Particulate levels have been monitored at Southcenter since 1974. The annual
mean has ranged from 36 -50 ug /m3. The annual standard of 60 ug /m3 has not been
exceeded during the eight -year monitoring period.
• Oxides of Sulfur
Oxides of sulfur were monitored at Southcenter from 1973 to 1979. The annual and
24 -hour standards were not exceeded at anytime during the six -year monitoring
period. The one -hour standard of 0.40 ppm was exceeded once in 1973 with a
reading of 0.41 ppm.
• Oxides of Nitrogen
Oxides of nitrogen have been monitored in Kent for the past few years. The annual
averages were 0.01 ppm and 0.02 ppm in 1980 and 1981 respectively. This is below
the 0.05 ppm annual standard.
• Carbon Monoxide
Carbon monoxide has not been monitored in the area since 1977. Measurements
taken along Southcenter Boulevard in 1977 yielded a maximum eight -hour concen-
tration of 9 ppm, the .same as the standard.
• Ozone
Ozone has been monitored at Kent for the past few years. The maximum one -hour
concentrations were 0.08 ppm and 0.11 ppm in 1980 and 1981 respectively, below
the 0.12 'ppm one -hour standard.
• Hydrocarbons
Hydrocarbons and other volatile organic compounds have not been monitored in the
vicinity of the site.
26
Vehicle activity is the primary source of photochemical oxidant . (ozone) and carbon
monoxide. The site is located in a non - attainment area for both carbon monoxide and
photochemical oxidant. This non - attainment area covers most of the central Puget
Sound Basin. A transportation control strategy has been established by the Department
of Ecology and includes a vehicle inspection /maintenance program to reduce vehicle
emissions in order to attain the ambient air quality standards by 1987.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Vehicle activity is the principal source of air pollution from the proposed project. Fuel
combustion and other sources will make a minor contribution to the air pollution levels
when compared to the emissions generated by vehicle activity. The distribution and
volume of vehicle trips is shown in the TRANSPORTATION AND CIRCULATION
section of this report.
Current federal standards for vehicle emissions are becoming more stringent causing a
decline in emissions. Based on existing data and implementation of federal law, vehicle
emission rates are expected to decline about 17% between 1982 and 1984 for carbon
monoxide, the primary vehicular pollutant.
A line source diffusion model (CALINE IV) was used to predict the changes in carbon
monoxide (CO) concentrations. For the same vehicle emission conditions (national
average hot start /cold start ratios and vehicle mix) and atmospheric conditions (parallel
wind, 2 mph and 'E' atmosphere stability) concentrations at the edge of the right -of -way
on Interurban Avenue were predicted as follows:
Without the project 1984 peak hour CO concentrations will decrease about 0.2 ppm.
With the project peak hour CO concentrations will increase about 0.4 ppm. Actual
concentrations in the vicinity of the project are not known but are estimated at
7 -8 ppm during "worst case" conditions as described above. The increase in traffic is
not expected to change the eight -hour CO concentrations nor result in violations of
the 9 ppm eight -hour standard.
The 1982 amendment to the State Air Quality Plan shows that the Southcenter area is
currently within the carbon monoxide standards and is expected to remain within the
standards. Current reductions in vehicle emissions due to implementation of federal
standards, when coupled with local transportation control strategies such as carpooling,
increased use of buses, and vehicle inspection /maintenance, cause emissions to decline
at a rate faster than the projected increase in traffc. This results in carbon monoxide
27
concentrations that are not expected to exceed current levels and that are within the
standards.
There would be a short -term increase in summertime dust levels due to construction.
However, this would be confined to the area under construction and would cease upon
completion of construction and landscaping.
MITIGATING MEASURES
Dust resulting from construction work would be minimized through the use of good
operational techniques such as watering of exposed areas and regular street cleaning
(refer also to PUBLIC SERVICES section). Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agericy
regulations require that precautions be taken to minimize the entrainment of dust in
the ambient air.
Other precautions should include careful design of all street and driveway systems to
provide the best circulation patterns in order to reduce traffic congestion and vehicle -
idling time. (See Mitigating Measures in the TRANSPORTATION AND CIRCULATION
section for methods to improve traffic flow.)
The continued enforcement of the federal exhaust emission standards will be a factor in
reducing future carbon monoxide, hydrocarbon and oxides of nitrogen emissions from
motor vehicles. State legislation requiring maintenance and inspection of vehicles will
further reduce regional and local air pollution problems.
NOISE
EXISTING CONDITIONS
To determine existing noise levels on and adjacent to the site, measurements were
taken at two locations during daytime peak hour and night hours. The measurement
locations are shown in Figure 3. A summary of the noise readings is shown in Table I.
(See Appendix B for a general description of noise, terms and criteria.)
Noise measurements were taken on Thursday, November 18, 1982, with a Quest 215
Type II sound level meter with wind screen attached. The meter was calibrated before
and after each set of readings with a CA -12 calibrator. Weather was overcast with
occasional light rain. The temperature was approximately 45 °F with no winds.
The dominant noise source in the vicinity of the project was traffic from Interstate 405
and Interurban Avenue. Ldn levels adjacent to these roads were in excess of 60 dBA.
This level exceeds the 60 dBA state standard for • noise on commercial property.
28
BLDG.
A 70,000 s.f. 3 story
B 66.000 s.f. 3 story
C 80.000 s.f. 3 story
D 94,500 s.f. 3 story
E 73,000 s.f. 3 story
PONT o.NT PUNK
MAMMY •AIMS
n
a•• AV.II
7.
0 •
ri
0-%
% .• 1 4," - '1 >:
9 4q ,�" !1, 7.1 _ ,1 - y-
,'. n
0
200. 400
. +.N INV•N
Lance Mueller & Associates Architects
Tukwila Bend
Office Park Noise Measurement Locations FIG. 3 .
29
TABLE I
EXISTING NOISE LEVELS
(dBA)
Time
Site 1 Site 2
Southcenter Blvd. Southcenter Blvd. at
at Interurban Ft. Dent Access Road
Day L 10 72 64
11 am -Noon L50 67 58
L90 62 56
Leq 67 58
Peak Hour L 10 74 61
4 -6 pm L50 67 59
L90 64 58
Leq 68 59
Night L10 66 51
L50 52 46
L90 47 45
Leq(n) 52 47
Ldn 66 58
EPA Designation* SA A
Dept. of Ecology Std. 60 60
G - Generally acceptable - Ldn less than 55 dBA.
A - Adverse noise impacts exist - Ldn 55 -65 dBA.
SA - Significant adverse noise impacts exist - Ldn 65 -70 dBA.
U - Unacceptable public health and welfare impacts - Ldn 70 dBA or more.
Source: Wilsey & Ham.
However, since the source of the noise is primarily traffic, which is exempt from this
regulation, the standards cannot be applied directly. In general, the site now has
significant levels of noise due to traffic on adjacent roads. The following is a synopsis
of noise events during the measurement period:
e Southcenter Boulevard at Interurban Avenue
The principal noise source was traffic on Interurban. Acceleration noise was
evident because the intersection has a stoplight.
• Southcenter Boulevard at Fort Dent Access Road
The principal noise source was continuous background noise from traffic on I -405
and Interurban, interrupted by an occasional car entering or leaving Fort Dent.
There were plane flyovers also since the site is in the landing pattern for Boeing
Field.
30
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The principal long -term increase in noise will be due to an increase in traffic volumes
with the project. There will also be a short -term increase in noise levels during
construction of the project.
Table II shows the predicted noise levels for 1982 and 1984 at the monitoring sites.
TABLE II
PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS
(dBA)
1982 1984 1984
(actual) (w /o project) (with project)
Site 1
(Interurban Avenue)
Peak Hour Leq
Ldn
Site 2 (Fort Dent Access)
Peak Hour Leq
Ldn
68.0 68.5 69.0
66.0 66.0 66.0
59.0 59.5 69.0
58.0 58.0 66.0
Table II shows that there will be little change in the noise levels at the intersection of
Interurban Avenue and Southcenter Boulevard. Peak hour levels increase 1 dB while the
Ldn remains unchanged.
There is a 10 dB increase in noise near Site 2 (the turn into Fort Dent). This is due to
the much higher traffic volume going to the interior of the site. At the eastern edge of
the site 1984 noise levels with the project should be similar to current noise levels at
Site 2.
There will be a short -term increase in noise levels during construction. Noise levels (at
50 feet) from construction activities range from 69 -95 dBA. The use of equipment
designed for quiet operation would significantly reduce the peak levels. Noise due to
construction would cease upon completion of the project.
31
MITIGATING MEASURES
During construction, mitigating measures would include: limiting hours of operation to
6 am to 6 pm, use of quiet equipment, having proper mufflers on equipment, and
locating equipment away from noise sensitive sources when possible.
LAND USE
EXISTING CONDITIONS
The site is presently undeveloped and the land is unused for human activities. It is
zoned C -2 or commercial development. The Comprehensive Plan also allows office or
commercial development on the site. Much of the site is within 200 feet of the river
shoreline and land use on the site is therefore regulated by Tukwila's Shoreline Master
Program. The zoning regulations, Comprehensive Plan policies and the Shoreline
Master Program policies are discussed in the DESCRIPTION OF THE PROPOSAL.
The site is surrounded on three sides by the Green River and on the fourth by Interurban
Avenue. Across the river to the north is Fort Dent Park, a regional athletic complex.
To the east across the river are railroad tracks and a sewage treatment plant, and to
the south across the river is a pasture and commercial nursery. On the west side of
Interurban Avenue a very steep hillside is tree - covered and undeveloped with apartment
buildings on top.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATING MEASURES
The proposed project of an office park would have no significant impact to land uses on
adjacent property. The development pattern and trends are well established in the area
and this project would not change the pattern or trends. There is substantial space
between the property boundaries and other properties due to the river and Interurban
Avenue.
A perimeter pedestrian trail is proposed so that public access to the shoreline would be
provided.
LIGHT AND GLARE
EXISTING CONDITIONS
There are presently no sources of artificial light or glare on the site.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT AND MITIGATING MEASURES
The project would add sources of light from buildings, parking areas and automobiles
typical of office developments. Exterior lighting would be directional and shielded to
32
avoid glare on other properties. Reflective glass for windows would be limited to bands
across the building faces. These bands of glass would reflect sunlight.
A study of solar reflection was conducted for the site and, in most instances, reflection
would be confined to the site. In the winter, with low sun angles some reflections would
briefly extend into the pasture south of the site. The only potential impact of
reflections off -site is interference with traffic (driver visibility) on Interurban Avenue
and Southcenter Boulevard, west of the site. However, as shown in the diagram below,
the high hillside west of the site would block sunlight from striking the building below
the angle at which reflections would leave the site to the west. Thus, there would be no
solar reflections off -site to the west and no significant off -site impacts during worst
case (winter) conditions.
-�
1
G� 175' - crest of hill
West
hiilsids
356—
25'
htenirban
Avenue
n11■10 v1111•1=.fl n
limit of I proposed building
reflection
NATURAL RESOURCES
Natural resources of the site consist of undeveloped land, and open space. Any
agricultural soils that were originally present have been buried by the fill.
The project would convert the site from open space to an office park where typical
materials such as lumber, steel, glass and concrete and fossil fuels would be consumed
during construction and operation of the project.
RISK OF EXPLOSION OR HAZARDOUS EMISSION
A temporary risk of equipment accidents would occur during construction. However,
safety requirements are quite stringent and largely compensate for any potential
hazards. Safety precautions would be observed during construction and the risk of
explosion or emission would be no greater than at any other comparable facility. All
safety requirements will be met. No offices carrying hazardous materials are expected
to locate on the site.
33
East
• Elements of the Human Environment
POPULATION AND HOUSING
EXISTING CONDITIONS
There is presently no housing or employment base on the site. Thus, the project would
not displace any homes, jobs or population.
The population in the City of Tukwila has not changed significantly in the past 10 years.
The U.S. Census of Population and Housing shows a 2 percent increase from 1970 to
1980, while King County experienced a 9.5 percent increase over the same period of
time.*
The Puget Sound Council of Governments (PSCOG) projections shown in Table III for
AAM Districts 3650 and 3800 (1979) include large portions of Tukwila and Renton.
TABLE ffi
POPULATION PROJECTIONS
Percent Percent
AAM District 1980 1990 Change 2000 Change
3650 4,555 5,474 20.2 5,989 9.4
3800 410 1,248 104.4 1,566 25.5
TOTAL 4,965 6, 722 35.4 7,555 12.4
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Since the project is for the construction of offices, there would be no direct impact to
the housing supply or population. Based on ITE national standards (Institute of
Transportation Engineers, one employee per 250 square feet of office space), there
would be approximately 1,534 employees on the site at completion of the project. This
could cause an incremental increase in area -wide housing demand but this would be
spread out over a relatively large area and therefore is not likely to cause a significant
impact to population or housing.
The vacancy rate for housing in Tukwila is very low, approximately 1 percent. Tukwila
is also very limited in opportunities to provide increased housing within the city limits.
Thus, new employees that might prefer to live in Tukwila may find it necessary to
reside in surrounding residential areas.
* 1980 Census of Population and Housing Final Population and Housing Unit Counts
35
MITIGATING MEASURES
No mitigating measures were identified.
TRANSPORTATION AND CIRCULATION
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Street System
Interstate 405, a four -lane freeway just south of the project site, provides major access
to the proposed office park. Although this portion of I -405 lies in an east /west
configuration, its connection with Interstate 5, State Route 167 and 1 -405 to the north
enables the project area to be regionally accessed from the north and from the south.
To the west, State Route 518 connects with I -405 at I -5. (Refer to Figure 1.)
State Route 181 /Interurban Avenue is the principal arterial currently serving the
project site. Operating primarily as a four -lane arterial (on occasion a two -way left
turn lane is added as a fifth lane), Interurban Avenue provides local access from the
north and from the south. Access onto and off of I -405 is also possible via Interurban
Avenue.
An alternate local east /west roadway to I -405 which is normally congested during rush
hour is Southcenter Boulevard and Southwest Grady Way. These two roads have a
functional classification of "minor arterial" from 1 -5 into Renton. Southcenter
Boulevard between 62nd Avenue South and Interurban Avenue is a narrow, two -lane
curving road with unpaved shoulders and open drainage. These roads are on occasion
heavily traveled due to the congested peak hour traffic occurring along I -405. There
are plans to improve Grady Way to a five- lane roadway with curb, gutters and
sidewalks.
At this time, preliminary studies have been completed addressing possible realignments
of Southcenter Boulevard between 62nd Avenue South and Grady Way. Consequently, in
the future Southcenter Boulevard may be improved and realigned such that it connects
directly with Grady Way, thus bypassing the office park entrance at Interurban Avenue.
Traffic Volumes and Operating Conditions
Current average daily traffic volumes along roads surrounding the project site are
shown in Figure 4. These volumes are based on 1981 traffic volumes developed by
Entranco Engineers for a recent Southcenter Boulevard design report. The 1981 traffic
volumes were increased 2.9 percent to reflect an annual growth rate between 1981 and
1982. This rate is an average annual increase developed by Entranco for the years 1980
to 1990. (At this time, there is not sufficient traffic count data with the City of
36
10(00
Q
NORTH
Tukwila Bend 1982 Average Weekday
Office Park Traffic Volumes FIG. 4 .
37
Tukwila to obtain an accurate traffic growth rate; consequently, the 2.9 percent rate
developed by Entranco is used here and will be used to forecast 1984 background traffic
volumes.)
Given the traffic counts in Figure 4, p.m. peak hour (4:00 to 5:00) turning movements
were developed to determine the level of service at nearby intersections. Table IV
shows the level of service at three major intersections. The term "level of service" is a
qualitative measure which describes the performance of an intersection or street
segment. The levels vary from LOS A to LOS F, as described in Table V. The method
used to determine level of service is described in Appendix C. Capacity analysis
worksheets are appendicized in Appendix D.
TABLE N ,
EXISTING LEVEL OF SERVICE
(PM Peak)
Intersection
Level of Service Volume /Capacity
Interurban Avenue S. & C 0.72
Southcenter Boulevard
Interurban Avenue S. & F 1.01
S.W. Grady Way /I -405 SB Ramp
Interurban Avenue S. & A 0.56
I -405 NB Ramp
TABLE V
DESCRIPTION OF LEVEL OF SERVICE
Level of Service
General Description Capacity Ratio
A Free Flow Below .60
B Stable Flow (slight delays) .60 - .70
C Stable Flow (acceptable delays) .71 - .80
D Approaching Unstable Flow .81 - .90
(tolerable delay)
E Unstable Flow (intolerable delay - .91 - 1.0
capacity)
F Forced Flow (jammed) Undefined
Source: Transportation Research Circular, Number. 212, January 1980.
38
As shown in Table IV, the intersection with the worst operating condition is Interurban
Avenue and Grady Way.
Accidents
The total number of accidents at the three nearby intersections for the years 1980 and
1981 is 45. This includes 25 accidents at or near Southcenter Boulevard and Interurban
Avenue South, 20 accidents at Interurban Avenue South and Grady Way and 1 accident
at Interurban Avenue South and the I -405 northbound off /on ramps. Table VI shows a
four -year accident history at the three intersections.
As shown in Table VI, the total number of accidents at Interurban Avenue and
Southcenter Boulevard has increased 116 percent between 1979 to 1981. Accidents at
Interurban Avenue and Grady Way have increased approximately 60 percent over the
same four years. This increase in accidents may be attributed to a greater number of
vehicles using Southcenter Boulevard /Grady Way as an alternate route to I -405 between
Tukwila and Renton.
TABLE VI
FOUR -YEAR ACCIDENT HISTORY
Intersection
Injury Property
Year Fatalities Accidents Damage Only TOTAL
Interurban Avenue 1978 0 0 6 6
& Southcenter 1979 0 5 4 9
Boulevard 1980 0 5 7 12
1981 0 5 8 13
Interurban Avenue 1978 0 2 3 5
& Grady Way /I -405 1979 0 2 4 6
SB Ramp 1980 1 1 10 12
1981 0 2 6 8
Interurban Avenue 1978 0 2 3 5
& I -405 NB Ramp 1979 0 0 1 1
1980 0 0 0 0
1981 0 0 1 1
Public Transportation
The project site is served by eleven Metro bus routes. The majority of these routes
provide peak -hour service only (morning and evening) while the remaining routes
provide all -day service as well as weekend operation. Table VII shows the route
numbers, major areas served by each route and type of service. Given the availability
of the peak -hour routes, the proposed office park should have fair public transit service.
39
TABLE VII
EXISTING TRANSIT SERVICE
Route Number Type of Service Major Areas Served*
145 Commuter Seattle CBD /Renton /Candlewood
146 Commuter Seattle CBD /Renton /Candlewood
148 Commuter Seattle CBD /Renton /Candlewood
149 Commuter Kent /Renton /Harbor Island
150 Full Service Seattle CBD /Auburn /Southcenter
154 Commuter Harbor Island /Kent /Auburn
157 Commuter Seattle CBD /Renton /Kent /Auburn
158 Commuter Seattle CBD /Kent /Timberlane
159 Commuter Seattle CBD /Kent /Timberlane
240 Full Service Burien /Renton /Bellevue
340 Full Service Bothell /Bellevue /Renton
*Includes Tukwila except for routes #240 and 1/340.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Trip Generation
A 1976 report prepared by the Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) provides a
guide on trip generation rates for many land uses and building types (Trip Generation -
An Informational Report, ITE, 1976). These trip generation rates are presented in
various forms including average weekday, Saturday and Sunday, and peak hours of the
generator and of the adjacent street traffic.
For the land use "office ", several office types are identified in the ITE report. The
most applicable type in this case is "office park." According to the ITE report, 20.65
trip ends are generated for every 1,000 gross square feet of floor area. Given the
proposed total building size of 383,500 square feet, this is equivalent to 7,919 trip ends
per day. (A trip end is defined as the total number of trips entering plus all trips
leaving the site.) Table VIII summarizes the trip generation rate and volume during the
p.m. peak hour.
40
TABLE VIII
OFFICE PARK TRIP GENERATION
(PM Peak)
Gross Floor Trip Rate* Trip Generation
Area In Out In Out Total
383,500 sq. ft 0.33 1.84 127 707 834
*Per 1,000 square feet of gross floor area.
Trip Distribution
Project - generated trips were distributed along adjacent arterials based on a micro -
model developed by Entranco Engineers for traffic patterns in the Tukwila area.
As shown in Figure 5, the majority of the trips are generated west and east of the
project site. For the most part, vehicle trips generated from the west and from the
east use 1 -405 to access the site. Consequently, 65 percent of the trips entering and
leaving the site will travel south on Interurban Avenue towards the I -405 on /off ramps.
The primary movement at the office park entrance, then, will be northbound right turns
off Interurban Avenue during the morning and westbound left -turns from the office
access road during the afternoon.
Traffic Impacts
During the fall of 1981, Entranco Engineers completed the Tukwila Micro -Model Study.
This study involved a computer simulation of traffic patterns in the Tukwila area. As
part of that study, an extensive land use inventory and forecasting process was
undertaken. The forecast indicated a growth in vehicle trip ends of about 33 percent
during the ten -year period between 1980 and 1990. This is an average growth of about
2.9 percent per year and is consistent with recent traffic growth trends in the area.
Given the trip distribution patterns in Figure 5 and the trip generation volumes in
Table VIII, 1984 traffic volumes were projected with and without the office park. (At
this time, a specific schedule for construction phasing has not been determined. It is
planned that construction of the five office buildings will proceed as demand and the
economy warrants it.) For purposes of this study, completion of the entire project was
predicted for 1984.
Figures 6 and 7 show the 1984 daily traffic volumes with and without the office park.
The resulting level of service with and without the office park are shown in Table IX
below. (Capacity analysis worksheets can be found in Appendix D.)
41
TABLE D(
1984 LEVEL OF SERVICE -- WITH AND WITHOUT THE PROJECT
(PM Peak)
Intersection
Level of Service
Without Project With Project
LOS V/C LOS V/C
Interurban Avenue South and C 0.77 F* 1.16*
Southcenter Boulevard
Interurban Avenue South and F 1.09 F 1.13
S.W. Grady Way /I -405
WB off -on ramps
Interurban Avenue South and
I -405 NB off -on ramps
C 0.75 D 0.82
*Does not include project - related improvements.
Even without the project there will be severe congestion at Interurban Avenue and
Grady Way. With the project, congestion will become severe at Interurban Avenue and
Southcenter Boulevard since the project will add approximately 834 vehicles during the
p.m. peak hour. Delays may increase from between 28 seconds to over 40 seconds per
vehicle at the intersection. Delays in traffic will be greatest here than at the
remaining intersections. Project- related vehicle trips leaving the site during the p.m.
peak will constitute approximately 21.5 percent of the total vehicle trips at the
intersection for all directions in 1984, an increase of 25 percent.
Conflicts with seasonal fluctuations in traffic volumes (during the racing season) is not
expected. Over a 24 -hour period, traffic volumes can increase by fifty percent on a
raceday as compared to a non - raceday. Any fluctuations in traffic volumes during the
4:00 to 5:00 p.m. peak hour is not available at this time. Discussions with City of
Renton Traffic Engineering Division and Longacres personnel reveal that the peak hours
for the racetrack generally occur before 3:00 p.m. and after 8:00 p.m. during the week.
Since the proposed office park's peak hour is expected to occur between 4:00 to 5:00
p.m., there should not be any significant overlap with project - related traffic and
Longacre - related traffic. Additional secondary peak traffic conditions occur during the
a.m. peak hour and due to Longacres. The project would result in additional delays
during these peaks, but the delays would be significantly less than during the p.m. peak
as discussed above.
43
17,524
8,320
NORTH
0 500'
1000'
r
ukwila Bend 1984 Average Daily
Office Park Traffic Volumes (without project) FIG. 6 .
44
1$3(00
56410
z
2»q0
10170
11,600
adg<
NORTH
0 500' 1000'
Tukwila Bend 1984 Average Daily
Office Park Traffic Volumes (with project) FIG. 7
45
MITIGATING MEASURES
Project - Related Improvements
To handle the increased traffic, changes in the existing signal phasing and timing may
be required such that the heavier traffic flows are progressed through adjacent
intersections. Consideration should be given to providing a dual left -turn lane from the
site (the east leg of Southcenter Boulevard) in addition to the through /right lane. A
northbound separate right -turn lane should be added to handle the increase in right -turn
movements due to the project. This three -lane approach and separate right -turn lane
would improve the level of service from LOS F to LOS E in 1984. Project phasing over
a period of years (or as demand warrants it) will lessen the immediate short -term
impacts.
The actual design changes necessary to provide adequate operation are beyond the
scope of this report. Specific details regarding the signal wiring and controller, as well
as geometric details of the intersection, would be required.
The developer should encourage use of transit and carpools by providing convenient
walkways to existing bus stops, shelters for those waiting, and incentives such as
preferential, close -in parking for carpools and vanpools. Tenants should be encouraged
to provide a subsidy towards Metro monthly bus passes, provide carpool /vanpool
program assistance, and to implement flex -time or staggered work hours. These
measures will reduce the total number of vehicles leaving the site and lengthen the
time span during which employees leave the site. The effect will be to reduce the
volume of project - related traffic entering onto Interurban Avenue thus minimizing the
impacts during the 4:00 to 5:00 p.m. peak hour. The Seattle -King County Commuter
Pool can provide valuable assistance in implementing these incentive measures.
Final design of the on -site circulation and parking system should provide appropriate
treatment for geometric, traffic control, and circulation route layout features to
ensure adequate movement for automobiles, delivery trucks, fire apparatus and other
emergency vehicles, as well as pedestrians and bicycles.
Planned Long -Range Improvements
Substantial changes to the area's traffic circulation system are planned by 1990. The
Grady Way Bridge will be replaced with a four -lane facility and will be widened to
provide a four -lane section from Interurban Avenue to Renton. There are also plans to
widen and realign Southcenter Boulevard between Interurban Avenue and 62nd Avenue
South. The new section would intersect Interurban Avenue at Grady Way, rather than
at the Fort Dent Park entrance. The I -405 southbound ramps would be aligned with the
46
Fort Dent Park entrance, rather than with Grady Way. The reduction in turning
movements (Southcenter Boulevard to Grady Way would have a straight- through
movement rather than a right turn and then a left turn) will improve maneuverability
and traffic flow through these intersections. However intersection volumes at the Fort
Dent entrance will not vary considerably whether the new alignment is constructed or
not.
Based on 1990 projected traffic volumes contained in the Entranco report, capacity
analysis was conducted with and without the proposed realignment. (See Appendix D
for capacity analysis worksheets.) As a worst case scenario, it is assumed that 1990
background traffic volumes will not include project - related traffic although future
traffic projections (at a rate of 2.9 percent per year) are intended to account for
development growth in the area. Consequently, the addition of project - related traffic
will cause 1990 projected volumes at the Fort Dent entrance to be exceeded by 19
percent without the new alignment and 20 percent with the new alignment. Results of
the capacity analysis are shown in Table X.
TABLE X
1990 LEVEL OF SERVICE -- WITH AND WITHOUT THE NEW ALIGNMENT
(PM Peak)
Without New Alignmenta With New Alignmenta
expected to use the I -405 southbound ramp. With the new alignment, level of service at
the I -405 northbound ramps will improve from LOS E to LOS D with the project. In the
event that the recommended six -lane improvement to Interurban Avenue between
Southcenter Boulevard and the south city limits is not constructed, level of service at
the Fort Dent entrance will not change. Level of service at the remaining two
intersections, however, will vary somewhat. With the alignment and the project,
Interurban Avenue and the I -405 northbound ramp will operate at LOS F, or at LOS E
without the project. Without the project, Interurban Avenue and Grady Way will
operate at LOS F.
In 1990, project - related vehicle trips will constitute approximately 23.0 percent of the
total p.m. peak hour intersection traffic volume at Interurban Avenue and the Fort
Dent entrance with the new alignment and 21.0 percent without the new alignment.
With or without the new alignment, background traffic volumes at this intersection will
be considerable.
Additional transit service is also expected to be implemented by Metro. The increased
service is linked to the construction of a transit center in the Tukwila commercial
district. New routes will provide direct service from Tukwila to areas currently
without service. Service will also be improved on existing routes.
Finally, the Washington State Department of Transportation has programmed for the
mid -1980s the construction of transit /carpool lanes along I -405 from Bellevue through
Tukwila to I -5. Use of these lanes will be restricted to transit, carpools, and vanpools
during peak periods, thereby enhancing the accessibility of these travel modes to the
Tukwila Bend Office Park and reducing vehicular travel growth pressures around the
site.
PUBLIC SERVICES
EXISTING CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
Fire Protection
The City of Tukwila Fire Department has two fire stations, each approximately a mile
from the site. The Andover East Station has three pumpers, one 100 -foot aerial ladder,
an aide car and support vehicles. The fire rating in Tukwila is Class 4 on a scale of 1 to
10 with 1 as excellent.
The water supply available to the site is adequate for fire protection requirements.
The project would require additional service from the Fire Department for inspection,
fire suppression and emergency medical services. This increased demand will be offset
48
by additional tax revenues generated by businesses in the project. The buildings will
comply with city building code requirements for fire safety.
Police Protection
Police protection is provided by the City of Tukwila. The police station is located in
City Hall approximately one -half mile west of the site. There are presently 27
commissioned police officers. Response time to the site would be two to three minutes
for emergencies and service is considered adequate.
A variety of circumstances in the proposed office park will require additional police
service including car prowls, burglaries and domestic squabbles. This increased demand
for services will be offset by increased revenues generated for the city.
Schools
There wouild not be a significant impact on local schools since there would be no
significant shift in population as a result of the project. The project would generate
approximately $86,200 in property tax revenues directly to the school district each
year.
Parks and Recreation
The project is immediately adjacent to the Fort Dent Regional Park. This park is an
athletic complex with large open spaces and picnic facilities. Employees from the
proposed office complex will use Fort Dent Park for picnicking, jogging and informal
athletics. This will result in an incremental increase in demand for park maintenance
services which would be offset by increases in tax revenues.
Maintenance
The project will result in incremental increases in the demand for maintenance of
public facilities. Maintenance requirements will not be unusual and will be offset by
increased tax revenues.
There may be a need for additional street cleaning service during the period of
construction. However, the applicant could provide this service as well as incorporating
wheel washing for any vehicle exiting the site before it is paved.
ENERGY
EXISTING CONDITIONS
Currently, there is no energy consumption occurring on the site. Energy is available to
the site through an underground electrical distribution cable, and from natural gas
mains in Interurban Avenue.
49
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The proposal would generate additional energy consumption in three ways: during
construction, for long -term operation, and for travel to and from the facility by
employees and visitors.
Using an indirect method for estimating energy usage, roughly 46 billion Btu's of energy
would be required to construct the proposed office complex, including energy invested
in materials, and fuel used by construction equipment. The same expenditure would
allow for the construction of approximately 44 single - family houses of 1,500 square feet
each. Applying a similar estimation technique to determine operational energy usage,
the annual energy consumption at the proposed project would be on the order of 7
billion Btu's, assuming conventional building practices. Using single - family residences
as a means of comparison again, approximately 62 single- family houses (1,500 square
feet each) would consume an equivalent amount of energy each year.
In addition to construction and operation, energy in the form of gasoline would be
consumed for vehicle trips that the proposed office complex is anticipated to generate
each day.
MITIGATING MEASURES
The energy requirements for the project are small in terms of total energy resources
available in the region, Puget Sound Power and Light staff indicate that the electrical
supply system is adequate. Since gas lines are already in existence along Interurban
Avenue, heating of the proposed office complex could be provided by natural gas.
However, plans have not been finalized to the extent necessary to determine heating
sources at this time.
The proposal site is located in an area planned for office, commercial or industrial
development. With adequate energy services already in existence, total . development
can occur without requiring extension into an unserviced area.
Implementation of all necessary traffic revisions in the vicinity of the site and an
effective ridesharing program will result in more efficient traffic circulation; thus, it
will promote more efficient use of gasoline by minimizing idling 'time, and reducing the
number of vehicles driving to and from the office facility.
The proposed office complex will be constructed to incorporate appropriate materials
and design to aid in its energy efficiency, including both active and passive methods of
energy conservation, in compliance with the Washington State Energy Code. All
exterior walls, ceilings, and floors above unheated spaces will be insulated, per state
50
energy code requirements, windows will be double glazed, and the area of glass will also
be reduced to increase the energy efficiency of the structures.
These measures do not represent the entire system of energy conservation techniques
that will be used in the proposed office complex, but are illustrative of the type of
system that will be employed. These and other measures will work together to create a
system that will help to minimize the consumption of energy resources.
UTILITIES
Energy
Adequate underground electrical utilities are available within the street through the
site. A natural gas main is located in Interurban Avenue adjacent to the site. It has not
been determined whether the project will be heated with gas or electricity, but
adequate service is available to the site for either.
Communication
The proposed site is within the service area of Pacific Northwest Bell Telephone
Company and telephone lines are underground through the site.
Additional underground capacity would be necessary within the site to serve the new
project. The telephone company can accommodate additional service as long as they
have adequate advance notice.
Water and Sanitary Service
At the time that Fort Dent Regional Park was constructed, water and sanitary sewer
lines were constructed through the site. Because the lines were designed and sized to
accommodate anticipated development, adequate water and sanitary sewer lines are
available on the site.
Storm Drainage
An on -site underground collection system with silt traps, oil /water separators and
detention would be constructed.
Solid Waste
The area is presently served by Sea -Tac Disposal. Solid waste is taken to a King County
Transfer Station.
The proposed project will increase the demand for collection services in the local area.
51
AESTHETICS
EXISTING CONDITIONS
The project site is visible from I -405, Interurban Avenue adjacent to the site,
Southcenter Boulevard through the site and from the upper units of several apartment
complexes on the hillside west of the site. The site has been cleared, filled and graded
previously and presently appears as an undeveloped field.
Due to the filling and levees, the river surrounding the site on three sides is generally
visible only when crossing it or north of the site where it parallels Interurban Avenue.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The project would be visible from adjacent streets but would be set back a substantial
distance from Interurban Avenue, the adjacent arterial. Due to the setback and a
change in topography, the project would be partially screened. From Interurban
Avenue, the project would appear as a complex of unified office buildings in a
landscaped office park constructed on either side of an existing street. All visitors
entering Fort Dent Regional Park pass down this street and would pass through the
office complex. Thus, the appearance of the project would become a part of the park
experience. .
The site is only partially visible from all but the upper -story units in the apartment
complexes west of the site. During field work for this document it was not possible to
find a ground level vantage point where the majority of the site was visible for
photographs. Thus, development of the site will be only partially visible to most
residents on the hillside west of the site. No views will be blocked. Residents of the
upper stories of apartments west of the site will be able to see the site but their views
are generally oriented over and beyond the site. Thus, the project would not create a
significant impact on views of nearby residents.
The project would be built in phases with the schedule dependent on market conditions.
This could result in portions of the site having an unfinished appearance for periods of
time following grading but prior to completion of the building. This would be mitigated
by seeding all graded areas with grass if construction is not to proceed immediately.
MITIGATING MEASURES
Mitigating measures included in the project include masterplanning of the entire site as
a unified visual element, unified architectural control, landscaping of the site and
provision of a perimeter trail and greenbelt along the river.
52
Additional mitigating measures should include continuing the existing street tree
landscaping concept throughout the site. This concept presently is in place through the
site on the north side of Southcenter Boulevard and into Fort Dent Park. Also,
driveways north of Southcenter Boulevard should be located to avoid the existing trees.
During design review for building permits, the city should consider limiting or requiring
screening of rooftop structures since residents in the apartments on the hillside west of
the site will be able to look down on the site.
ARCHAEOLOGY /HISTORY
The Green River Valley was one of the earliest areas in the Northwest to be settled by
Euro- Americans. The project site was first claimed between 1850 and 1855. During the
Indian Wars of 1855 -56, Fort Dent was constructed across the river from the site.
Railroads were first built through the valley in the 1880s. The site is adjacent to the
former right -of -way of the Interurban Railway, once an important transportation link
between Seattle and Tacoma.
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT
The site was investigated by the University of Washington Office of Public Archaeology
to identify the potential for historical or archaeological resources on the site. (See
Appendix D.) Since the site was filled and graded many years ago, any potential
cultural remains have been covered by several feet of fill. Construction of the project
will occur entirely on previous fill, and will not cause any additional impact to
potential cultural resources on the site.
MITIGATING MEASURES
As a mitigating measure to the previous filling of the site, an interpretive display
describing local history could be constructed along the river trail.
RECREATION
The site is privately owned, and is not presently used for recreation. However, Fort
Dent Regional Park is adjacent, and its sole access is through the site. The publicly
owned riverbank along the site is lightly used for recreation.
The project would have no significant adverse impacts to recreation on the site. Access
to the publicly owned riverbank would be improved. The land for a trail and benches
along much of the riverfront would be deeded to the city as part of the project. The
53
city could then construct a trail and install benches. This would increase the
opportunity for public recreational use of the site.
Some of the employees from the office park would use Fort Dent Regional Park for
picnicking or informal athletics during favorable weather. The park is only very lightly
used during the week at mid -day and such additional use would not have a significant
adverse impact.
FISCAL IMPACTS
Cost of Services
To project the cost of public services that the City of Tukwila would be required to
provide the completed office park, the "Proportional Valuation Fiscal Impact Method"
was selected from the Fiscal Impact Handbook by Burchell and Listokin (1978).
The proportional valuation method determines the proportion of municipal costs
required for commercial land uses. Then, the proportions of nonresidential property
values to total property values in the community and the proportion of the value of the
proposed project to total nonresidential property values are determined. These.
proportions are used to determine the proportion of the cost of city services that would
be demanded by the new office park.
Data relating to property values within the city were taken from the Draft EIS for the
Tukwila Hotel issued in June, 1982, by the City of Tukwila. That document includes the
following:
Total Real Property Values $ 702, 681, 000
Commercial /Industrial Real Property Value $ 562,144,800
Average Commercial /Industrial Property Value $ 690,595
Total Nonresidential Property Value $ 609,018,050
The city's budget, as obtained from the City Clerk is $15,505,160 for 1982. To obtain
the share attributable to industrial /commercial land use, the total budget is multiplied
by the proportion of nonresidential land value to total real property value. This is then
multiplied by a coefficient provided in the Fiscal Impact Handbook.
Proportion of
Commercial /Industrial Total Nonresidential Value Refinement
Municipal Expenditure = Municipal x to Total Local x Coefficient
Expenditure Real Property Value
$17,861,944 = $15,505,160 x
54
$562,144,800
$702,681,000
(0.8)
x 1.44
(Since the proportion of the municipal expenditures attributable to commercial /in-
dustrial according to the formula exceeds the total city budget, the total city budget is
used in the following steps.)
The next step in the process is to identify the share of commercial /industrial municipal
expenditure that will be required in the future to serve the proposed office park. This
is accomplished by multiplying the commercial /industrial municipal expenditure by the
proportion of the proposed project value to the total local nonresidential real property
value and multiplying that by another refinement coefficient.
According to the proportional valuation method of forecasting, the project will require
approximately $184,511 annually in public services:
Total Expenditures
Demanded for the
New Facility
Total Existing
Municipal
Expenditures
Attributable to
Nonresidential Uses
x
Proportion of
Facility to Total Refinement
Local Nonresidential x Coefficient
Real Property Value
$184,511 = $15,505,160 x 0.07 x 0.17
Revenues
The next step is to forecast the annual revenues generated by the project. Primary
annual revenue sources include property taxes and sales taxes. With an estimated value
at completion of $40,000,000 the project would generate approximately $384,360 in
annual property tax revenues as follows:
TABLE XI
PROJECTED PROPERTY TAXES
Levy Millage Rate Tax
City 2.082 $ 83,280
State 4.740 189,600
School 2.155 86,200
G. O. Bond 0.503 20,120
Emergency Services 0.129 5,160
9.609 $384,360
To forecast sales taxes generated by the project, a method developed by the University
55
of Puget Sound Department of Economics was used. This method was developed for the
EIS on the Koll- Bothell Business Park published by the City of Bothell in 1981.
"Based on Washington State, Department of Employment Security data the
ratio of office sales per employee to retail sales per employee is 0.41. We
used this factor to calculate sales per office employee as $27,660. This
figure times the number of office employees ... produced our estimates of
total office sales. We assumed that only 25% of all office sales would
actually be subject to the retail sales tax."
Using this methodology with the projected 1,534 employees on -site, a total of
$42,430,440 in sales would be generated annually by the project. Assuming 25% of this
would be subject to sales taxes would yield taxable sales of $10,607,610. With a 1983
sales tax rate of 6.7 %, the project would generate $710,710 sales tax revenues, and of
this, approximately $66,298 (0.625% of the taxable sales) would go directly to the city.
The remaining sales taxes go to the state, Metro and King County.
To summarize, the following annual revenues would accrue directly to the city as a
result of the project:
City Property Tax Levy $ 83,280
G. O. Bond 20,120
Emergency Services Levy 5,160
Sales Taxes 66, 298
Total $174,858
In addition, substantial revenues would go to the local school system, the county, the
state and other taxing districts such as the Port of Seattle.
Substantial secondary revenues would also be generated by project employees eating
and shopping at other Tukwila businesses.
Analysis
According to the forecasting method employed, the proposed project would pay slightly
less taxes ($174,858) directly to the City of Tukwila than it would demand in local
services ($184,511). Secondary revenues to the city cannot be accurately forecast at
this level of study, but would probably make up the difference between services
demanded and revenues generated. In addition, the project would generate substantial
tax revenues annually for the local schools ($86,200).
The forecasting method used (Proportional Valuation) is the most applicable method,
but it does have its limitations. It assumes no difference in demand for city services
56
between office, retail and industrial land uses. It is likely that offices require less city
services than either retail or industrial (notably police and emergency services). As
explained previously, the entire city budget was attributed to commercial /industrial
services in the forecasting method used. Thus, the cost of services for the project are
probably over - stated.
This fiscal impact analysis is for annual costs and revenues at project completion only.
It does not consider the start -up costs of public services during construction or the lag -
time until the project begins generating the higher property taxes and sales taxes.
These factors are offset by city permit fees, sales taxes on construction and the present
property taxes.
57
Irreversible or Irretrievable Commitments of Resources
and
Short Term Environmental Uses
vs. Long -Term Productivity
(THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN LOCAL SHORT -TERM USES OF MAN'S ENVIRONMENT AND
MAINTENANCE AND ENHANCEMENT OF LONG -TERM PRODUCTIVITY)
Implementation of the proposed Tukwila Bend Office Park would, for all practical
purposes, commit the site to urbanized, non - residential use for the foreseeable future.
Short -term gains from the proposal would include additional tax revenues for the city,
and additional employment opportunities.
Delay of the project would preserve existing habitats and delay traffic impacts to local
streets. A delay in implementing the project may increase its cost, and similar impacts
would occur whenever the project proceeded.
Building the proposal would require an initial and continuing commitment of material
and capital resources. Material resources that will be consumed for construction and
maintenance of the project include water, sand and gravel, lumber products and metal
products. Hydroelectric energy and fossil fuel will be required to heat and light the
office buildings. Construction vehicles, delivery trucks, buses and private automobiles
will consume petroleum products. In addition, the development complex will require
expenditures of capital, both initial investment and operating costs and manpower.
The land is not now utilized for agricultural or mineral resources and does not provide
significant recreational opportunity.
59
Alternatives to the Proposal
NO- ACTION
If the project is denied or the city takes no action on the application, the adverse
impacts associated with the project will be delayed for several months while an appeal
is processed or an alternative plan to use the site is developed. The likely result is that
the site would be developed in individual parcels by separate developers, since the site
has been subdivided previously. In the past several years, a variety of proposals have
been made for developing the site. The most recent have included an athletic club and
a hotel on portions of the site.
Without the unified development of the site, impacts would probably be greater than
the present proposal. It would also be more difficult to coordinate financing of
mitigating measures.
LESS INTENSIVE USE
Since the site is zoned for regional retail use and the Comprehensive Plan also allows
the retail use, the present proposal is a less intensive use than is allowed by the city
codes and ordinances. Reducing the intensity further would probably mean an office
use with fewer square feet on the site. This would result in comparable on -site impacts
but would reduce traffic impacts off -site.
Residential uses would also be less intensive uses but are not economically feasible due
to the cost of the land. Residential uses often have a relatively higher demand for
public services and generate relatively fewer tax revenues. In addition, the high noise
environment reduces the suitability of the site for residential use.
Other uses permitted by the zoning and comprehensive plan include regional retail uses.
These uses generally have greater on -site and off -site impacts than office develop-
ments.
PHASING
The project will be built in phases in response to market demand. This may allow time
for the city to address and solve the area -wide traffic problems. Portions of the site
that are graded but not developed immediately would be seeded to control erosion and
minimize aesthetic impacts.
60
Unavoidable Adverse Impacts
Earth
Changes in topography because of grading; decrease in soil permeability due to the
introduction of impermeable surfaces.
Water
Increase in storm water runoff volume increasing urban pollutant levels; potential
decrease in groundwater quality.
Vegetation and Wildlife
Removal of vegetation from the site; elimination of resident wildlife species.
Air
Short -term increase in particulate matter during construction; localized increase in
carbon monoxide levels due to increased traffic.
Noise
Short -term increase in noise during construction; long -term increase in noise because of
increased traffic.
Light and Glare
Increased light and glare from reflective building surfaces, lighting equipment and
automobile traffic.
Transportation and Circulation
Increase in traffic to and from the site on adjacent roads.
Public Services
Increase in demand for police and fire protection; increase in demand for solid waste
disposal.
Energy
Increased energy consumption of all types for construction, operation, and transporta-
tion.
Utilities
Increased consumption of water and electricity; increased demand for telephone
service.
61
List of Elements of the Environment
ELEMENTS OF THE PHYSICAL ENVIRONMENT
Earth
Air
PAGE
Geology 21
Soils 21
Topography 21
Unique physical features 21
Erosion 21
Accretion /avulsion 21
Air quality 25
Odor NA
Climate 25
Water
Surface water movement 22
Runoff /absorption 22
Floods 22
Surface water quantity 22
Surface water quality 22
Ground water movement 22
Ground water quantity 22
Ground water quality 22
Public water supplies 51
Flora
Numbers or diversity of species 24
Unique species 24
Barriers and /or corridors 24
Agricultural crops NA
Fauna
Numbers or diversity of species 24
Unique species 24
Barriers and /or corridors 24
Fish or wildlife habitat 24
Noise 28
Light and Glare 32
Land Use 32
Natural Resources
Rate of use 33
Nonrenewable resources 33
Risk of Explosion or Hazardous Emissions 33
62
List of Elements of the Environment
ELEMENTS OF THE HUMAN ENVIRONMENT PAGE
Population 35
Housing 35
Employment 35
Transportation /Circulation
Vehicular transportation generated 40
Parking facilities 13
Transportation systems 39
Movement /circulation of people or goods 36
Waterborne, rail and air traffic NA
Traffic hazards 39
Public Services
Fire 48
Police 49
Schools 49
Parks or other recreational facilities 49
Maintenance 49
Other governmental services NA
Energy
Amount required 50
Source /availability 50
Utilities
Energy 51
Communications 51
Water 51
Sewer 51
Storm water 51
Solid waste 51
Human Health (including mental health) NA
Aesthetics 52
Recreation 53
Archaeological /Historical 53
Fiscal Irpacts 54
63
References
Beaton, J. L., A. J. Ranzieri, E.C. Shirley and J.B. Skog, Mathematical Approach to
Estimating Highway Impact on Air Quality, CA- HWY -MR 6570825(4)- 72 -08, State of
California - Division of Highways, 1972.
Burchell and Listokin, The Fiscal Impact Handbook, Rutgers, The State University of New
Jersey, 1978.
City of Bothell, Final EIS for the Koll- Bothell Business Center, Bothell, 1981.
City of Tukwila, Tukwila Zoning Code, Tukwila, Washington, 1982.
City of Tukwila, Office of Community Development, Land Use Survey, 1978, Tukwila,
Washington, 1978.
City of Tukwila, Office of Community Development, Data Inventory: Tukwila Planning
Area, Tukwila, Washington, 1975.
City of Tukwila, Comprehensive Land Use Policy Plan, Tukwila, Washington, Adopted
September 19, 1977.
City of Tukwila, Draft Environmental Impact Statement for Tukwila Hotel, Tukwila,
Washington, June 1982.
City of Tukwila, Draft Environmental Impact Statement for Tukwila City Center,
Tukwila, Washington, December 1979.
ENTRANCO Engineers, Transportation Improvement Plan, City of Tukwila Department of
Public Works, Bellevue, Washington, August, 1979.
. Environmental Protection Agency, A Manual for the Review of Highway Noise Impact,
55/9 -77 -356, Washington, D.C., 1977.
Environmental Protection Agency, Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, AP -42
(with revisions), Research Triangle Park, N.C., 1973.
Environmental Protection Agency, Information on Levels of Environmental Noise Requi-
site to Protect Public Health and Welfare with an Adequate Margin of Safety, 55019-
74 -004, Washington, D.C., 1974.
Pacific Northwest River Basins Commission, Climatological Handbook - Columbia Basin
States, Vancouver, Washington, 1968.
Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency, Air Quality Data Summary, Technical Services
Division, Seattle, Washington, Published Annually.
Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency, Attaining Air Quality Standards for Carbon
Monoxide and Ozone in King, Pierce and Snohomish Counties, Seattle, Washington,
1982.
Puget Sound Council of Governments, Central Puget Sound Region- Population and Housing
Estimates as of April 1, 1978, Seattle, Washington, 1977.
64
U.S. Census Bureau, Characteristics of the Population - 1980 Census of Population,
Washington, D.C. 1982
U.S. Department of Energy, Estimating Energy Impacts of Residential and Commercial
Building Development, Mathematical Sciences Northwest, Bellevue, Washington, 1979.
Washington State Department of Ecology, Ambient Air Quality Standards, Olympia,
Washington, 1971.
Washington State Department of Ecology, Maximum Environmental Noise Levels (WAC
173 -60), Olympia, Washington, 1975.
Washington State Department of Ecology, Motor Vehicle Noise Performance Standards
(WAC 173 -62), Olympia, Washington, 1975.
ORGANIZATIONS CONSULTED:
City of Tukwila City Clerk
City of Tukwila Department of Public Works
City of Tukwila Police Department
King County Hydraulics
Washington Natural Gas Company
65
Appendix
APPENDIX 'A
REPORT OF GEOTEC NICAL INVESTIGATION
PLANNED OFFICE PARR DEVELOPMENT
TUKWILA, WASHINGTON
FOR
GREEN RIVER INVESTORS
MODERN SKYLINES, INC.
12275- 001 -05
JANUARY 14, 1981
e�
67
MODERN SKYLINES INC.
JAN 20 1981
RECEIVED
Dam(, & Moore
Green River Investors
c/o Modern Skylines, Inc.
1818 Westlake Avenue North
Seattle, Washington 98109
Attention: Mr. Jerry 8. Sheets
Gentlemen:
INTRODUCTION
155 N.E. 110th Street. ( • son
Seattle, Washington 98taa
(206) 523 - 0560
TWX: 9111 -444 -2021 Cable address: DAMEMORE
January 14, 1981
Report of Geotechnical Investigation
Planned Office Park Development
Tukwila, Washington
This letter presents the results of our geotechnical investigation
for the subject office park development. The site is located just north
of the northern dead end of Southcenter Boulevard. It is bounded on the
north and east sides by the Green River and on the south by a gravel
access road. It lies immediately east of the Fort Dent Park entrance
road.
We understand that the development will involve three- or possibly
four -story wood -frame office buildings with a slab -on -grade lower floor.
No significant changes from the existing site grades are planned.
SCOPE
The purpose of our study is to investigate the properties of the
site soils as a basis for specific recommendations with regard to site
preparation and foundation support of the buildings. We have completed a
number of past investigations in this area, including one investigation
which dealt with this specific property. Our recommendations are based
primarily on the data developed by our earlier investigations; however,
we have also excavated four backhoe test pits on the property and have
68
completed laboratory testing to evaluate the consolidation properties of
the soils.
The scope of our services was developed during a number of telephone
discussions between Mr. Sheets and the writer and was summarized in our
revised proposal dated December 8, 1980. Authorization was provided
by Mr. Sheets' signature to our proposal on December 26, 1980.
FIELD EXPLORATIONS
The locations of our four test pits are shown relative to the site
boundaries and existing features in the area on the site plan, Plate 1.
The test pits extended to depths of about 12 to 12 -1/2 feet below the
existing site surface.
The fieldwork was coordinated by an engineering technician from
our staff, who located the test pits, maintained a log of the soil and
ground water conditions encountered, obtained representative disturbed
and undisturbed samples of the soils, and observed and recorded general
site features. The test pit logs are presented on Plates 2 and 3. The
soils were classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification
System, which is described on Plate 4. The samples were re- examined
in our laboratory. Selected samples were tested to evaluate their
consolidation properties and in -place moisture content and density.
The results of the consolidation tests are presented on Plate 5. The
moisture and density information is presented on Plate 6.
SITE DESCRIPTION
The site is a roughly rectangular parcel of property; its north-
western and northeastern boundaries are formed by the Green River.
Overall dimensions are about 670 feet in the northeast - southwest
direction and approximately 360 feet in the northwest - southeast dimen-
sion. The site terrain is nearly level in the overall sense, but it is
somewhat lower near the riverbank and is gently rolling. Total relief
within the area to be developed is on the order of 4 to 5 feet. The site
is vegetated with a relatively sparse growth of light brush and grass.
69
The site has been filled in the past. Apparently the bulk of the
fill was placed more than 8 years ago. The fill thickness across the
site is in the range of about 4 to 11 feet. No pattern to the fill
thickens variation was detected; it appears to be random. Three of the
four test pits excavated during, our current study encountered fill
thicknesses of about 9 to 10 feet. However, Test Pit 3, near the south-
western end of the site, penetrated only 6 feet of fill. The fill
consists primarily of silt and sandy silt with some zones of clayey sandy
silt and organic bearing silt. Test Pit 6 penetrated about 2 -1/2 feet of
silty sandy gravel at the surface. All of the fill appears to have been
placed without benefit of engineering control and specific compaction
effort. It mostly ranges from stiff to medium stiff (medium dense to
dense) in consistency. Our consolidation test
soils are slightly to moderately compressible.
underlie the fill consist primarily of sand and
the natural sands are moderately dense in the
more dense with depth.
indicates that the fill
The native soils which
silty sand. In general,
upper portion and grade
The test pits excavated for this study did not encounter a true
ground water table. However, slight to moderate seepage was noted at
depths of 6 to 8 -1/2 feet in Test Pits 3, 4, and 5. During our earlier
studies the ground water table was encountered at depths of about 20 to
28 feet in this general area. No doubt the .ground water table will vary
somewhat in response to changing water levels in the Green River.
CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
The existing silt and sand fill soils will not provide adequate
support for spread foundations in their current condition. Footings
founded on these materials would probably experience significant amounts
of both total and differential settlement. We have considered several
potential approaches to site development and foundation support to
overcome this settlement issue. The basic options include: (1) support
of the buildings on deep foundations (piles); (2) preparation of the site
by preloading so that the settlement is induced before the building loads
are applied; and (3) improvement of the surficial soils within building
70
areas. This latter approach would involve excavation of the existing
soft fine - grained fill soils at each building location and replacement
with compacted granular fill. This method would also allow the use of
higher allowable bearing pressures for footings than the preloading
method. In our opinion, the fill replacement approach would probably be
the most cost - effective method of site preparation for your planned
development. Based on our understanding that the structures will be of
light wood -frame construction and a maximum of three to four stories in
height, we recommend the following procedure for site preparation and
foundation support:
1. The existing fill soils should be excavated from each building
area to a depth of 3 feet below the planned floor slab and
footing subgrade elevations. (Since the footings must be
founded at least 18 inches below the lowest adjacent finished
grade, the depth of excavation will need to be approximately
1 -1/2 feet deeper beneath footings. This deeper excavation
should also extend laterally beyond the footing limits by
1 -1/2 feet.) The general excavation limits should extend about
6 feet outside the perimeter of each building.
2. When the excavation is completed, the bottom should be inspected
and proof rolled to detect any pockets of organic material
or unusually soft areas. Any such zones should be further
excavated to firm bearing or a maximum of 2 additional feet.
The excavation should then be backfilled to footing grade with
clean granular fill (imported sand and gravel with not more than
about 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve). All backfill should
be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density based on the
AASHTO T -180 Compaction Test Procedure.
3. Footings and stem walls or columns should be constructed and
allowed to cure.
71
4. Additional granular fill should be placed to achieve the planned
floor subgrade elevations. All fill should be placed in lifts
with a maximum loose thickness of about 8 inches and compacted
to the recommended density by mechanical means.
Alternatively, all of
level before footings are
excavation of the footing
procedure than two phases
decision.
the fill could be placed to the floor subgrade
constructed. Although this would require re-
areas, it may be a more practical construction
of filling. This is essentially an economic
Individual column footings and continuous wall footings should be a
minimum of 2.feet and 16 inches in width, respectively. For footings
designed and constructed as recommended, an allowable bearing value of
2,500 pounds per square foot may be used. This value applies to the
total of dead and long -term live loads and is exclusive of the weight of
the foundation and any backfill placed above the foundation. This
value may be increased by one -third when transitory loads (such as wind
or seismic) are considered.
We estimate that the total settlement
the manner recommended above will be less
settlement should occur during construction.
of footings constructed in
than 1 inch. Most of the
The differential settlement
across structures should be small and within tolerable limits for
structures of the planned type. This conclusion is based on the under-
standing that final lower floor grades will not be more than 1 foot above
existing site grades and that live loadings will not exceed the typical
range for office buildings.
The recommended granular fill soils will provide adequate support
for floor slabs without the need for any special base course. Prior to
the_ pouring of the floor slabs, care should be taken to assure that the
fill soils are well compacted and have not been loosened and disturbed by
the construction operations.
72
In areas to be paved, the existing fill soils should be proof
rolled and any soft zones which are discovered should be corrected by
recompaction,, or excavation and replacement with properly compacted fill.
All pavements should be underlain by a well compacted granular base layer
consisting of about 9 inches of clean sand and gravel or 6 inches of
crushed rock. Normal asphaltic concrete sections for an office park of
this type are appropriate.
Drainage conditions across the site are relatively good; no special
attention to drainage issues is necessary. Grades should be chosen so
that the terrain slopes down and away slightly from all buildings. Care
should be taken to assure that the backfill for all utility excavations
is placed in lifts and compacted to the same general consistency as
the in -place soils. This step is often overlooked in site development,
since utility lines are usually installed after general site grading .
activities have been completed. This creates unsightly pavement depres-
sions along utility corridors when the backfill later settles. Another
action that can be taken to enhance pavement performance is to provide
small openings such as drill holes in catch basin structures within
the pavement base zone. This allows free drainage of water which can
accumulate within the base layer. Such accumulations of water are the
major cause of deteriorated pavements which often develop around parking
lot and roadway catch basins.
There is no indication that pile support could be needed for the
type of structures that are planned. However,• if plans should change to
involve more heavily loaded and /or settlement- sensitive buildings, pile
support could become necessary. Eight -inch tip treated timber piles
would appear to be the most appropriate type for the site. If your
plans should change so that pile foundations are needed, we can provide
specific recommendations for pile capacity and driving criteria.
During site preparation and foundation construction activities,
inspection should be provided to evaluate the satisfactory completion of
excavation, stripping, compaction of fill, and preparation of footing,
floor slab, and pavement subgrades. We would'be pleased to provide these
73
services at the appropriate time. Please let us know when you desire a
specific proposal in that regard. In the meantime, if you have any
questions or if we can be of further assistance, feel free to contact us.
The following plates are attached and complete this report:
Plate 1 - Plot Plan
Plates 2 and 3 - Log of Test Pits
Plate 4 - Unified Soil Classification System
Plate 5 - Consolidation Test Summary
Plate 6 - Moisture /Density Test Summary
•
5 6 .Hqq %
• l` •r'' w .`• •
• of �Afty ti�'f' i
• • Q
•
LLM:JBH:mb
3 copies submitted
12275- 001 -05
•
•
•
5, 4.,C788 17885
i '4b �
• •• ..••
fSS. '• /ONb l EM
Yours very truly,
DAMES & MOORE
By
74
/01-0777-4071
Larry L. Morrison
Associate
(
RtiUer (
Green
Test Pit 5
*Test Pit 4
PROPOSED OFFICE DEVELOPMENT
(Green River Investors)
Test Pit 3
sit
Test Pit 2 l c
PROPOSED OFFICE
PARK DEVELOPMENT
(Fort Dent
Office Associates)
,Test Pit 14
__J
Test Pit 6+
Ce
Interurban Avenue
SITE PLAN
240 100 9 190 240
Scale In Feet
12275- 001/002 -05
25
sunrr ■s s woo•s
PLATE 1
TEST PIT 3
0' - ML /PT) MOTTLED BROWN AND GRAY SANDY SILT WITH
PEAT (SOFT - MEDIUM STIFF)(FILL)
6' - 12' (SM) BROWN SILTY VERY FINE SAND (MEDIUM DENSE)
TEST PIT COMPLETED 12 -29 -80
MODERATE SEEPAGE NOTED AT DURING EXCAVATION
AT 6' DEPTH
UNDISTURBED SAMPLES OBTAINED AT 3' AND
9' DEPTHS
DISTURBED SAMPLES OBTAINED AT 14', 7}' AND
11' DEPTHS
TEST PIT 4
0' - }' (ML) BROWN SANDY SILT WITH ROOTS AND ORGANIC
MATTER (MEDIUM STIFF)(TOPSOIL)
- 5}' (ML). GRAY CLAYEY SANDY SILT (MEDIUM STIFF TO
STIFF) (FILL)
5}' - 9' (ML) BROWN SILT WITH ORGANIC MATTER (MEDIUM STIFF)
(FILL)
9' - 12P (SM) LIGHT BROWN SILTY VERY FINE SAND (MEDIUM
DENSE)
TEST PIT COMPLETED 12 -29 -80
GROUND WATER ENCOUNTERED DURING EXCAVATION
AT 8' DEPTH
UNDISTURBED SAMPLE OBTAINED AT 5' DEPTH
DISTURBED SAMPLES OBTAINED AT 6' AND 9' DEPTHS
LOG OF TEST PITS
o•■-• S ■.00..1111
76
12275- 001 -05 rt.AT! 2
TEST PIT 5
0' - }' (ML) BROWN SANDY SILT WITH ROOTS AND ORGANIC
MATTER (MEDIUM STIFF)(TOPSOIL)
- 9' (ML) BROWN SANDY CLAYEY SILT WITH OCCASIONAL
ROOTS (MEDIUM STIFF)(FILL)
9' - 12 }' (SM) BROWN SILTY VERY FINE SAND (MEDIUM DENSE)
TEST PIT COMPLETED 12 -29 -80
SLIGHT SEEPAGE NOTED DURING EXCAVATION
AT 81' DEPTH
UNDISTURBED SAMPLE OBTAINED AT 4' DEPTH
TEST PIT 6
0' - 2}' (GM) GRAY SILTY SANDY FINE TO COARSE GRAVEL
(DENSE) (FILL)
2 }' - 10' (ML) GRAY SANDY SILT WITH ROOTS (MEDIUM STIFF
TO STIFF) (FILL).
•
10' - 12/' (SM) BROWN SILTY VERY FINE SAND
TEST PIT COMPLETED 12 -29 -80
NO GROUND WATER ENCOUNTERED
DISTURBED SAMPLES OBTAINED AT 3', 4' AND
5' DEPTHS
12275- 001 -05
LOG OF TEST PITS
77
a+►■1111•• a 11100011111111
PLATE 3
N
W
x
z
z
O_
1-
0
N
z
8
LOAD IN LBSJSO. FT
0 lY fr " Q ,r ( �' ere" Or ,W ',ere' 4
.co
.01
.Q2
.O3
.nT
.a
.07
.0e
.o+
.10
.11
.12
.13
7
—
-
,
TEST PIT
DEPTH
8011 TYPE
MOISTURE CONTENT
CRY OCGTY N
LSS /CU.FT.
BEFORE
AFTER
1
3'
CIAY[Y SANDY SILT
23.3
3L1
N
CONSOLIDATION TEST DATA
78
IDA...s a r000ea,
12275- 002 -05
PLATE 4
ON
o-
ee
LOAD IN LBSJSQ. FT.
doe
�� ® 0� 0 #�
r
TEST PIT
DEPTH
SOIL TYPE
MOISTURE CONTENT
BEFORE
AFTER
4
r
CLAYIY SANDY sat
50.7
50.0
CRY DENSITY N
LBS /CU. FT.
Al
1 .vi■12o1 -06/
CONSOLIDATION TEST DATA
79
Daum is meanie
W
J
Test Pit Sample Depth Moisture Content Dry Density
Number (feet) (percent, dry weight) (pcf)
3 3 50.0 55
3 9 23.1 86
5 4 58.2 54
SUMMARY O! MOISTURE DENSITY TEST RESULTS
6U
APPENDIX B
General Description of Noise
Noise is any sound which is undesirable because it interferes with speech and hearing or
is otherwise annoying (the term "environmental noise ", as used by the Environmental
Protection Agency, means the intensity, duration and character of sound from all
sources). Noise is a physical phenomenon created primarily from mechanical vibration.
Man's response to noise is determined by the sound level emanating from the source of
noise and the frequency spectrum of the sound. Noise intensity represents the level of
sound which is weighted in accordance to the apparent loudness perceived by an average
human observer. This number is expressed in "A "- weighted decibels and is written as
dBA. This descriptor is the one generally accepted as having the best correlation with
human judgements of loudness. Each increase of 10 dBA in the noise level is
subjectively judged as an approximate doubling of loudness.
Noise intensity covers such a broad range that it is measured logarithmically and noise
levels usually represent a statistical average for a given period of time. Since noise is
rarely steady or constant for long periods, average noise levels do not readily account
for very high noise levels of very short duration. For example, a long -term average of a
60 decibel (dBA) sound level over a 24 -hour period might include peak sound levels of
110 dBA, but such an event might be less than one second in duration. This fluctuating
noise can be described statistically by noise levels exceeded for given percentages of
time during a prescribed time period. The commonly used statistical levels are L90,
L50, and L 10, for which the number in the subscript indicates the percentage of time
that the given level is exceeded. The L90 is indicative of background noise in the
absence of local noise events. The L50 is the median or "average" sound level exceeded
50 percent of the time. The L10 is usually indicative of maximum noise from recurring
events such as traffic during peak volumes.
The total noise exposure for a prescribed time period is given by the Leq, or equivalent
level, which is the dBA level of a constant sound having the amount of acoustical
energy contained in the time - varying measured noise. The Ldn, or day -night sound
level, is the Leq over 24 hours with a 10 dBA weighting applied to the nighttime (10:00
p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) noise. The Ldn environmental noise descriptor is preferred by the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
Regulations and Guidelines for Environmental Impact Statements
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Noise Guidelines for Environmental Impact
Statements identify levels which can be used to evaluate noise impacts. These levels
are not to be construed as standards. The document states that "until more definitive
81
guidelines are established for various types of projects, EPA personnel will be guided by
the general considerations" indicated below for residential areas:
Ldn 55 dBA Levels are generally acceptable; no noise impact is generally
associated with these levels.
Ldn 55 -65 dBA Adverse noise impacts exist; lowest noise level possible should be
strived for.
Ldn 65 -70 dBA Significant adverse noise impacts exist; allowable only in unusual
Ldn 70 dBA
cases where lower levels are clearly demonstrated not to be
possible.
Levels have unacceptable public health and welfare impacts.
The guidelines classify noise increases over the present ambient as follows:
0 -5 dBA slight impact
5 -10 dBA significant impact
over 10 dBA very serious impact
The guidelines also specify the information that is needed to evaluate noise impacts and
the abatement measures that should be considered if abatement is required.
The Washington State Department of Ecology (WAC 173 -60) has also specified regula-
tions relating to maximum environmental noise levels. They have classified various
areas or zones and established maximum permissible noise levels.
These "EDNA's" (Environmental Designation for Noise Abatement) are classified as:
a) Residential area - Class A EDNA
b) Commercial areas - Class B EDNA
c) Industrial areas - Class C EDNA
The maximum permissible noise levels for these zones are shown in Table B -I.
EDNA OF NOISE SOURCE
TABLE B-I
NOISE LIMITATIONS
EEDNA OF RECEIVING PROPERTY
CLASS A CLASS B . CLASS C
CLASS A 55 dBA 57 dBA 60 dBA
CLASS B 57 60 65
CLASS C 60 65 70
82
Between the hours of 10:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., the noise limitations of the above table
shall be reduced by 10 dBA for receiving property within Class A EDNA's. These noise
levels may be exceeded on the receiving property by 15 dBA for 1.5 minutes, 10 dBA for
5 minutes, 5 dBA for 15 minutes for any one hour, day or night.
The limitations suggested by the State are approximately equivalent to the Ldn levels
indicated by the EPA in residential areas. Design noise levels and activity categories of
FHWA are outlined in Table B -II.
TABLE B-11
FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION
DESIGN NOISE LEVEL /ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIPS
Activity Design Noise Levels - dBA- 1/
Category Leq(hr.) L10(hr') Description of Activity Category
A 2/ 57 60 Tracts of land in which serenity and quiet are of
B 2/ 67 70
(Exterior) (Exterior)
C 72 75
(Exterior) (Exterior)
D --
E 52 55
(Interior) (Interior)
extraordinary significance and serve an important
public need and where the preservation of those
qualities is essential if the area is to continue to
serve its intended purpose. Such areas could include
amphitheaters, particular parks or portions of parks,
open spaces, or historic districts which are dedi-
cated or recognized by appropriate local officials
for activities requiring special qualities of serenity
and quiet.
Picnic areas, recreation areas, playgrounds, active
sports areas, and parks which are not included in
Category A and residences, motels, hotels, public
meeting rooms, schools, churches, libraries, and
hospitals.
Developed lands, properties or activities not in-
cluded in Categories A or B above.
No requirements on undeveloped lands.
Residences, motels, hotels, public meeting rooms,
schools, churches, libraries, hospitals, and auditor-
iums.
1/ Either L10 or Leq (but not both) design noise levels may be used on a project.
2/ Parks in Categories A and B include all such lands (public or private) which are actually
used as parks as well as those public lands officially set aside or designated by a
governmental agency as parks on the date of public knowledge of the proposed highway
project.
83
APPENDIX C
METHODS USED TO ANALYZE LEVELS OF SERVICE
The method used to estimate peak -hour levels of service involved a critical movement
summation technique described in the January, 1971 issue of Traffic Engineering. It is
based on a concept of temporal capacity for conflicting vehicle movements, which is
that a maximum of approximately 1,500 conflicting movements may share an intersec-
tion in an hour.
The critical movement summation technique was programmed on a Hewlett- Packard
calculator. The method is as follows:
(1) For each approach, left -turns are divided by number of left -turn lanes and through
plus right volumes are divided by number of through lanes. If there is no left -turn
lane, left -turns are added to through; if there is a right -turn lane, right -turns are
subtracted from through.
(2) The sum of conflicting north -south volumes is found, defined as the higher of:
a) northbound left plus southbound through
b) southbound left plus northbound through
(3) The sum of conflicting east -west volumes is found in a similar way.
(4) The sum of the results of steps (2) and (3) are added and divided by 1,500, the
theoretical maximum of conflicting movements which may be processed through an
intersection per hour. The result is an intersection volume /capacity ratio assuming
signal phasing has been optimized.
The TRB and critical movement techniques require intersection lane configurations and
intersection turn volumes. Where existing turn counts were available, the individual
turns served as the basis for estimating future turn volumes.
85
APPENDIX D
CAPACITY ANALYSIS WORKSHEETS
PM Peak Hour - Existing Conditions,
1984 and 1990 Traffic Volumes
87
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ANALYSIS
LEVEL OF SERVICE DETERMINATION AT SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS: INTERSECTION:
1. Insert magnetic card (set on "Run'.')
2. • Input data (punch "f" then "CHS" where �wtr�Y�oa„� 'j-�„ti ° �o_����� �`.�•�
3. Push A to run needed)*
INPUT DATA: *To input data, enter volume, press "STO ", enter Storage Register #.
CO
Volumes
Laney `v ■
w
Separate
.Storage
Register
U.) rv' v\
B Left
1 I
1
2
170
!a3
I °,�
1 I 9
Thru
Z I Z
Right
o I p
3
190
411_
L1 �.1
4-7<
B Left
'?
4
1-'4,(.,
1�1
B Left
Z Z
Thru
( 1
5
2
2,
' D u
3�-�
Right
O o
6
10
II
L±►.,
Li =„1
Thru Lanes EB 7
Z,
1
Thru Lanes WB i ' 8
7—
Z
2-
1
N
S
fp s
B Left
1 i
1.
3 11
?(„q
3t,�
6A3
Thru
Z I Z
2
iS
'892
e )2
Ions- ICI =c).3L.
Right
1 1 1
3
'?
34
1-'4,(.,
1�1
B Left
Z Z
4
q
4
10
1G
Thru
(� 1 0
5
S7(�
c) 1-17
0) y`/
c)la
Right
6
Thru Lanes NB
7
Z
Thru Lanes SB
8
1_
.�
Z
OUTPUT:
it
LuS C. I, )S L
(c.
88
7�
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ANALYSIS
LEVEL OF SERVICE DETERMINATION AT SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS: INTERSECTION:
1. Insert magnetic card (set on "Run ")
2. Input data (punch "f" then "CHS" where
3. Push A to run needed)*
wat
C
INPUT DATA: *To input data, enter volume, press "STO ", enter Storage Register #.
Lane
Storage
Separate Register
Volumes
/o X0,4- w 10 4A
w X
199D n,
B Left
1
1
13 t o ...r
141
9
1 9
421
Thru
I
2
(p
7
7
_
��- °�i _ ���
Right
0
3
a8 I
goy
: ()LI
27 I
B Left
O
4
1'313
Z4P9
Zo
D∎ 7,
Thru
5
-189
231 A-gI-
►GA _
-mil
4$1 tao°i -6.41 =
-10°)
.2S1 +2rf)-Lul=
.`,:^? - (I'1S= ",
Right
I
6
(old
lo(.4
(0(,1
G'?S
Thru Lanes EB
7
)
I
7
�.
Thru Lanes WB
- 8
..
1.
2
S
fp. s
0
B Left
1
1
I(t59.o
auS
26 7
1,01
;A37
40 -
1 ; o1,
Thru
2
2
'13 0
2,5"7
4 01
.. -"4-7y =
53 4-
Right
v
3
ILto
IS"
ISI.
X71
B Left •
1
4
5
s7
71V)
- ,2b= srZ
16
^2:A41
Las-a13 --
;-g
�"1
g(3)1
'87=1 -31(c= ss8
21(
iroS
77..)-!2.: -
),
60I
Thru
a.
Right
(
6
Thru Lanes NB
7
:1-
Thru Lanes SB
8
•Z
,
OUTPUT:
*
isly,o
1l412:..5
I(t59.o
)51Z i-2-
VAC
1,01
1.09
1.13
1 ; o1,
1,aS
07
L. Ca
Ws F
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ANALYSIS
LEVEL OF SERVICE DETERMINATION AT SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS: INTERSECTION:
1. Insert magnetic card (set on "Run ")
2. Input data (punch "f" then "CHS" where
3. Push A to run needed)*
1 LAr:r-v r\oems A s I - 405 K)$ L�
INPUT DATA: *To input data, enter volume, press "STO ", enter Storage Register #.
Lane
Storage
Separate Register
T/7`L sTA
Volumes
old o� wl Pw;
G)90
B Left
p
1
v
O
4
D
, .
0
.
0
Thru
2
1 -1 k 1.s -i -1s(
)41.11.5..lal -3 q
: UI xI.5 =u l-5c4
f ?
= c1.« I. e- ,o
Right .
I
3
S9
30°1
30a
401
B Left
Right
4
—
Thru
b
5
—,
p
4
Right
p
6
_
_-
Thru Lanes EB
7
I
1
I
4i98
Thru Lanes WB
8
1
)
1
7;i:
N
S
fps
B Left
'
1
,S 1
' 13 lrq, 407
. 90
SS)
5 S9
6 ^4„
Thru
2_
2
Iol(P
10)31
Me-4"
Iglu
Right
O
3
B Left
p
4
Thru
5
650)- ►i t =
4i98
713 -18A =
s).9
s -
,3
/0 Qa - 55 =
7;i:
Right
l
6
1,)
l84
.2g1.-
.)-.
3s-1R
Thru Lanes NB
7
71.
sl.
�--
Thru Lanes SB
8
.
3
OUTPUT:
*
VAC
8L1.,.5
, s(.
1118.5
,-75
11.2,9.5
' 13 lrq, 407
. 90
i S A
L o3 c- Los D
�v�lsWt..P 4.!`) lwC b (^ s/
90
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ANALYSIS
LEVEL OF SERVICE DETERMINATION AT SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS: INTERSECTION:
1. Insert magnetic card (set on "Run ")
2. Input data (punch "f" then "CHS" where \GAO w l am 1 \°)9O w% v\
3. Push A to run needed)* wf o rt:' I w/ who per,
INPUT DATA: *To input data, enter volume, press "STO ", enter Storage Register #.
Lane
Storage
Separate Register
W/0 O '\
w/o l l umes
w %oco.
B Left
l (, 5
1
i 19
Z. la-
_2(,4
). c °
Thru
/,0-7-
2
% '14c0
JG-1- I ; -.tic =
55-
3 Co
Right
3
a7j
Gin
r.,10
B Left
4
372
q-2,5- 1, (, =586
:71
Thru
5
c10
I X ea
�-C
Right
6
coo
132
c,q
Thru Lanes EB
7
L
Thru Lanes SB
8
2
Thru Lanes WB
- 8
1
1
2
N
S
fpZs
B Left
l (, 5
1
tsZ
Z. la-
,..1(:.
). c °
Thru
/,0-7-
2
/u.S.5
OW- Id(,= R65
/014
Right
3
SL
141 Z
44
B Left
4
l0
I C,
/0
Thru
5
1 g
o
) I
Right
6
Oj2
9Z
3
c1?
3
Thru Lanes NB
7
3
Thru Lanes SB
8
2
OUTPUT:
;A-.
L_t F Lis �s
_ C
l (, 5
' /23.5
I CpP-
V/C
). c °
1.11..
/,0-7-
;A-.
L_t F Lis �s
_ C
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ANALYSIS
LEVEL OF SERVICE DETERMINATION AT SIGNALIZED INTERSECTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS: INTERSECTIONN:
1. Insert magnetic card (set on "Run ")
� � G W13*
2. Input data (punch "f" then "CHS" where c)qo cA;/Ii —�� 'Pik) �,lojc
3. Push A to run needed) * LA-VD Q�°� w/ ��o r-t�.
INPUT DATA: *To input data, enter volume, press "STO ", enter Storage Register #.
Lane
Separate
Storage
Register
w /4 -5h
,u/o an";
Volumes
„/A�■ c.G /n o`rc
B Left
1 471, 83
1
LI 22.
l07,
/...3/
,9s,
Thru
hi's
2
,p.--7- 0-71-"oArd
v
Right
3
S7I
r2771
?-7I
B Left
4
�8'.3
A :3
3
Thru
5
' n; .n.,-- 0.
- .11 S
-, c .,
Right
6
I,a►o
(,Qc
6,90
Thru Lanes EB
7
3
I
1
Thru Lanes WB
- 8
A
2
2
S
fp s
B Left
1 471, 83
1
oa
WM.
q82
,9s,
Thru
hi's
2
763– ;74_ 43 `
Right
3
B Left
4
IIIMEIMENIMIENIII
Thru
5
' n; .n.,-- 0.
as-D-3271.- C, g
OI- -14 = :7
Right
6
d,3
3..-
Thru Lanes NB
7
3
2
Thru Lanes SB
8
3
,�
3
OUTPUT:
*
1 471, 83
l eci2:. o
17 u 3
V/C
,9s,
I.?-4
hi's
Los Lcsr
Los
92
APPENDIX E
' UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON
SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98195
28 May, 1982
Institute for Environmental Studies
Office of Public Archaeology
Engineering Annex, FM -12
(206) 543 -8359 Y'•, `a'
' DEC 1 1
vwLsF. !N:.
Thomas E. Moore, Project Manager
Construction Division
Evergreen Management Company
1721 132 Avenue N.E.
Bellevue, Washington 98005
Re: Archaeological reconnaissance of the 16 acre Tukwila Bend Project
Dear Mr. Moore:
The following report, in letter format, details the findings of the Office of
Public Archaeology's recent assessment of the proposed Tukwila Bend office
complex. Assessment procedures included archival research and field investi-
gation. Assessment activities were conducted by Mr. Guy F. Moura and Mr.
Stephen Elmore on 7, 10 and 11, May, 1982.
The Project Area
The project is located on the west bank of the Green River, just north of
the Interstate 405 and SR 181 junction, in the town of Tukwila, King County,
Washington. The project is more specifically located on the western boundary
of the NW and SW 1 /4s of Sec. 24, T23N, R4E (Figures 1 and 2).
The project area now forms a rectangular peninsula on the Green River. This
peninsula was created when a river bow was truncated by the Great Northern
Railroad some time prior to 1949 (U.S.G.S. 1949). Immediately west of the
site is a 150 foot bluff; to the north, east, and south lies the floodplain
of the Green River Valley. An isolated hill rises 150 feet above the flood -
plain, on the east side of the river, northeast of the proposed office com-
plex.
During on -site inspection, it was discovered that river sediments had been
removed from the site and /or bulldozed into several mounds. Except for a
narrow band of sands, retained by rip -rap around the periphery, the site is
now composed of pebble to boulder sized rocks in a fine grained matrix which
is presumably of glacial origin. When the river sediments were removed is
unknown; it could have occurred when the road to the Fort Dent Athletic Com-
plex was built (it now transects the site), or during railroad or highway
construction.
Recycled Paper
93
T. E. Moore
28 May, 1982
Page Two
Brush growth on the dozer mounds and a small, established marsh in the cen-
ter of the peninsula indicate that sediment removal occurred at least sev-
eral years prior to this survey. Vegetation on the site consist of a ring
of mature trees along the bank, with brambles, brush, grass and marsh vege-
tation over the remainder of the site.
Archival Research
Archival research revealed that the project area had good potential for cul-
tural resources because. of:
1. its proximity to known prehistoric sites;
2. the ethnographic evidence. This area of the green river is known to
have been heavily utilized by the Duwamish Indians; and
3. the historic evidence. Some of the earliest EuroAmerican settlers in
what is now Washington State lived along the waters of the Green River;
and Fort Dent was erected just north of the project properties, on the
east side of the river, in 1856.
A more detailed cultural resource overview of the region is presented in
Dalan, et al. (1981).
Prehistorically, the Green River was part of a drainage complex which formed
a highway for canoe passage between Puget Sound and the interior prairies and
mountains. Besides temporary camps and fishing sites, major Indian villages
were located along the river courses. Prehistoric archaeological sites are
common in the vicinity. Three such sites, 45 -KI -6, 45 -KI -51 and 45- KI -59,
are located within a kilometer of the project, along existing and extinct
river banks.
Ethnographically, the area was within the territory controlled by the Duwamish
Indians (Haeberlin and Gunther 1930:10; Smith 1940:16; Spier 1936:38 and 42).
Evidence of the Duwamish peoples' familiarity with the area is provided by
the following place -names excerpted from T. T. Waterman (ca. 1920). These
places are readily identified on modern topographic maps.
200. Where black river enters White river, Squoa'l -qo, "meeting
of the rivers," a village.
201. The level land below the mouth of Black river at Renton
Junction, on the E. bank, T3awe'd1tc, "river duck."
202. An isolated knoll. There were "piles" of snakes there
(apparently water- snakes). An informant found three piles,
each of them a yard high when he was a boy. This place
would not submit to transformation, so it is a part of the
"old" world, as it was before the Transformer came.
94
T. E. Moore
28 May, 1982
Page Three
203. A sandy point, now occupied by the picnic - grounds at Renton
Junction, Cuhu'dutugwEl, "burning each other;" (hud, "to
burn "). Snakes who land here after swimming across the
river, in the summer time, get burned by the sand and die.
203a. A place on the W. bank of the river, Bjs /g3a'ka, "where
there are crows."
203b. Number not used.
203c. A bluff overhanging the river on its W. side, Bsts/ xEbe'dats,
"place of ironwood." People used to go there for ironwood,
tsE1x""bJd. (Waterman, ca. 1920:31 and 32).
Two historically documented villages (Dalan et al. 1981 and Hedlund 1981)
are within a kilometer downstream of the project. These villages are
distinct from the prehistoric sites mentioned earlier.
The green river was settled by EuroAmericans early in the history of the
Pacific Northwest. The property on which the cultural resource reconnais-
sance was conducted may have first been claimed by William H. Gilliam be-
tween 1850 and 1855. It is known that at the time of his claim, Gilliam
was a single man who had not been in the territory prior to 1850. Gilliam
claimed 160 acres in portions of Sections 23 and 24, for which he later re-
ceived title under the provisions of the Donation Claim Land Law. Although
residence and cultivation were required to receive title for the land,
General Land Office plat maps (1861 and 1863) do not depict structures or
farmed lands; nor do they even locate Gilliams' claim, which was patented
in 1866 (Shackleford 1940).
During the Indian Wars of 1855 -56, the local settlers constructed Fort Dent
for protection against raids by the hostiles. It was built across the river
from the project area, and today an historic marker indicates the former
location (Dalan et al. 1981).
Field Reconnaissance
As stated earlier, upon arriving at the site it became apparent that consider-
able surface sediment removal had occurred several years ago. The entire site
was surveyed in 10 meter intervals and 14 core and 8 shovel test holes were
placed to determine the limits of disturbance and to look for cultural re-
sources. Because of this disturbance, and the small marsh, -core locations
and shovel tests were not systematically placed. Virtually all of the site,
except for a narrow strip along the bank, was disturbed. It appears the
site was bulldozed and several mounds of earth remain on the grounds to attest
to this theory. No cultural resources were located during this survey.
Recommendations
While archival research indicated a high potential for discovery of cultural
material, the disturbance to the site would have eradicated any such materials.
We therefore recommend that this project be allowed to proceed. However, in
95
T. E. Moore
28 May, 1982
Page Four
the event that cultural material is unearthed during construction, even in
the dozer mounds, work should stop immediately in that area and the Office
of Archaeology and Historic Preservation should be notified forthwith. A
professional archaeologist should then assess the significance of the find
prior to any further disturbance. The possibly intact peripheral strip of
sediments is, at this time, protected on the river side by riprap and on
the site by the. mandatory .40 foot from high water setback....
This report should not be considered to be permission to proceed with the
project in question. It contains professional opinions on cultural resources
which might be affected by the project. This report should be submitted to
the appropriate review agencies for their comments prior to the commencement
of any ground disturbing activities.
Sincerely,
Guy F. ,Moura,
Staff Archaeologist
GFM:ALL
Encl.
96
^^~Elm~^^
..
^~~~~^~Imomm^^~■~^^ ^~~•■■^^
IMAM K.A141
^^~~•■■^^~MM~^^
••'
.".~.~
\ °Tl���--''
'N .1 .
`-__. .~~,~ '- ^°^'
\��
' ' ��l�UU��� �����
� STUDY ~^=~ , °""""-�" '-
.
. '.�'
( 'V
l'^~^^ \,
| `
_
-
-1~°°~~~ '`—^ ' it
•
..°
k {
» l
,/.~'•■••• ^,0.00.^ •
– '~~°
(
`--..~^^.
.~~~••.. 1�.
�
FIG. 1 VICINITY MAP
r
..^
. ..
..
/^^.^
^~..
.. .. .'�_—_�
w°�
._11:)_..20 30 40 50
!!n
Scale In Mlles
FIGURE 2. Project location is circled and blacked out.
98
REFERENCES CITED
Dalan, Rinita, Sandra Hunt and Steve Wilke
1981 Cultural resource overview and reconnaissance: Green River flood
damage reduction study. Geo -Recon International, Seattle.
Government Land Office
1861 Plat Map T23N R4E A. On file in microfilm, Suzzallo Library,
University of Washington, Seattle.
1863 Plat Map T23N R4E B. On file in microfilm, Suzzallo Library,
University of Washington, Seattle.
Haeberlin, H. and E. Gunther
1930 The Indians of Puget Sound. University of Washington Publications
in Anthropology 4(11). Seattle.
Hedlund, G.
1981 Archaeological resources at the mouth of the Black River; a survey
conducted for the King County Department of Public Works. Copy of
ms. on file at the Office.of Public Archaeology, University of
Washington, Seattle.
Shackleford, C.
1940 Donation Claim Land Law. In Building a State, Washington 1889 -1939
Vol. 3, edited by 0. B. Sperline and C. Miles. Washington State
Historical Society, Tacoma.
Smith, M.
1940 The Puyallup- Nisqually. Columbia University, Contributions to
Anthropology Vol. 32.
Spier, L.
1936 Tribal Distribution in Washington. General Series in Anthropology 3.
United State Geological Survey
1949 Renton, Washington. 7 1/2 minute Quadrangle Map. Federal Center,
Denver.
Washington State Archaeological Site Survey Records.
On file, Office of Public Archaeology, University of Washington,
Seattle.
Waterman, T. T.
ca. 1920 An unpublished manuscript of Indian place - names. On file, Northwest
Collection, University of Washington, Seattle.
99
ARCHAEOLOGY OF THE SBABADID SITE
45KI51, KING COUNTY
WASHINGTON
by
James C. Chatters
Office of Public Archaeology
Institute for iSnvironmental Studies
Jniver;ity of Washingtcn
1981
ARCHAEOLOGY OF THE SBABADID SITE
45KI51, KING COUNTY
WASHINGTON
by
James C. Chatters
A final report submitted to CHG
International prepared in fulfill-
ment of contract specifications.
Office of Public Archaeology
Institute for Environmental Studies
University of Washington
1981
TABLE OF CONTENTS
List of Figures iv
List of Tables vii
INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY 1
The Site 1
Personnel 3
Acknowledgements 3
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING 4
Geography and Geologic History 4
Living Environment 6
CULTURAL DEVELOPMENTS 13
Prehistory 13
Historic Culture: The Duwamish Indians 14
"Tribal" Identity, Organization and Relationships
to Neighbors 14
Settlement and Subsistence 18
Written History: The Whites Arrive 24
PROJECT HISTORY AND TECHNICAL APPROACH 30
Preliminary Investigations: Surface Survey and
Test Excavations 30
The Survey 30
Testing 31
Site Evaluation 35
MITIGATION PROCEDURES 37
Intensive Coring 37
Excavation 37
Procedures 1979: 45KI51 "A" 38
Procedures 1979: 45KI51 "D" 40
Procedures 1980: 45KI51 "D" 40
Procedures 1980: 45KI51 "A" 41
Summary 44
DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS 46
Primary Analysis 46
Secondary Processing 46
Object Analysis 47
Artifacts 47
Fauna 48
Flora 50
Spatial Analysis 50
Features 50
ARTIFACTS 52
Ground Stone Area "D" 52
Whetstones 52
"Adze" Fragments 52
Pipe Fragment 52
iii
"Shaft Smoother" 57
Slate Object 57
Chipped Stone Area "D" 57
Arrow Points 57
Scrapers 59
Denticulate 59
Bifaces 59
Worn Flakes 59
Cores and Flakes 60
Stone Area "A" North 60
Bone Area "D" 60
Antler Wedge 60
Metapodial Wedges 60
Bipoints 60
Bone Barb 62
Bird Arrow Point 62
Smoothed Splinters 62
Dog Tooth Pendant 62
Decorated Pieces 62
Scrap 63
Shell Area "D" 63
Disc Bead 63
Iron Area "D" 63
Nails 63
Rods 63
Iron Bipoints 63
Fishhooks and Fragments 64
Adze 64
Chisels 64
Knives 66
Arrow Points 66
Other Fragments 66
Iron "A" North 66
Bail Fitting 68
Copper Area "D" 68
Fishhooks 68
Knives 70
Bars 70
"Bracelets" 70
"Bangles" 70
Beads 70
Copper Scrap 72
Brass Rings 72
Copper Area "A" North 72
Awl 72
Lead Both Areas 72
"Bangle" 72
Shot 74
Glass Area "D" 74
Flat Glass 74
Vessel Glass 75
Beads 75
iv
Glass Area "A" North 76
Flat Glass 76
Vessel Glass 76
Beads 76
Ceramic "A" North 77
FLORA AND FAUNA 78
Flora
Area "A" North
Area "D"
Discussion
Fauna
Area
Area
Area
Area
Area
FEATURES
"DI
"A"
„D„
"A"
"A"
Vertebrates'
Vertebrates
Invertebrates
North Invertebrates
South Invertebrates
78
78
80
80
82
82
82
84
84
84
86
Area "A" North 86
Hearths 86
Refuse Pits 86
Berry Pit 87
Post Features 87
Area "D" 89
Longhouse 89
Hearths 92
Pits 94
Clay Lined Pit 94
Trash Piles 94
Area "A "South 94
INTRASITE PATTERNS 96
Area "A" 96
Area "D" 99
Discussion and Summary 113
INTERPRETATION 115
When
Area
Area
„A„
"D"
Lifeways
Area "A"
The Occupants
Area "D ": Sbabadid
REFERENCES CITED
115
115
116
116
117
118
118
121
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1. The location of the Sba'badid Site, 45K151 2
Figure 2. Topographical map of the Black River area 5
Figure 3. Vegetation map of the 45K151 vicinity 8
Figure 4. Approximate territories of the Duwamish 16
Figure 5. Ethnographically and /or historically reported villages
of the Black River Duwamish 28
Figure 6. Topographical map of archaeological site 45K151
showing inventory and testing locations 32
Figure 7. Geologic stratigraphy of trench E, 45K151 34
Figure 8. Map of excavated areas, 45K151 39
Figure 9. Plan map of 45K151, Area "D" excavations 42
Figure 10. The extent of excavation efforts; 1979 and 1980 at
45K151, Area "D" 43
Figure 11. The extent of midden layers CL 0 and CL 1 at 45K151 . 45
Figure 12. Sampling strata used to choose floral and faunal
remains for analysis, 45K151 "D" 49
Figure 13. Ground stone artifacts, 45K151 "D" 56
Figure 14. Chipped stone artifacts from 45K151, Area "D" 58
Figure 15. An example of the worked bone and tooth objects fro
45K151 Area "D" 61
Figure 16. Some of the better preserved bipoints, fishhooks,
and wood working tools from 45K151, Area "D" 65
Figure 17. Iron projectile points fround at 45K151, Area "D" . . 67
Figure 18. The sequence of steps used in the manufacturing fo
copper fishhooks 69
Figure 19. Additional copper tools and detritis from the man-
ufacture of copper objects from 45K151 "D" 71
Figure 20. A sampler of beads from both site areas shown with
the fragment of ceramic vessel 73
Figure 21. Topographical map of midden layer CL 1, 45K151
"A" North 87
Figure 22. Map of the longhouse feature at 45K151 "D" 90
Figure 23. Selected profiles from 45K151 "D" 91
Figure 24. Plan map of the features in CL 1A, 45K151 "D" 93
Figure 25. Divisions of the 45K151 "D" longhouse 95
Figure 26. Distribution maps of all classes of artifacts found in
CL 1 of Area "A" North 98
vi
Figure 27. Fire cracked rock distribution in CL IA at 45K151 "D" . 100
Figure 28. The distribution of unworked bone in CL 1A, 45KI51 "D ". 102
Figure 29. Bead distributions in CL 1A, 45K151 "D" 103
Figure 30. Locations of iron artifacts and whetstones in CL 1A,
45KI51 "D" 105
Figure 31. Copper artifact distributions 106
Figure 32. Distributions of lithic artifacts 107
Figure 33. This map of bone'artifact locations clearly illustrates
the uneven distribution of worked bone inside the
longhouse 108
Figure 34. Arrow points of stone, bone and iron in CL IA at
45K151 "D" 110
Figure 35. Like bone artifacts in general, bone bipoints and their
iron counterparts are concentrated in sections II and v. 111
Figure 36. The locations of other objects show the same tendency
for patterning 112
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1. Dates of spawning migrations of adult fishes in the
Cedar and Duwamish Basins 12
Table 2. Artifacts recovered from 45KI51, presented by material 52 •
Table 3. Flora and insect parts identified in samples from
45K151 "A" North 79
Table 4. Floral remains from feature and midden samples,
45KI51 "D" 81
Table 5. Vertebrate fauna from 45K151 "D" 83
Table 6. Invertebrates from 45K151 85
Table 7. Numbers and percentages of artifacts from the six
sections of 45K151 "D" longhouse and associated
exterior midden, CL IA only 109
INTRODUCTION AND SUMMARY
In June of 1979, the Office of Public Archaeology conducted an archae-
r'logical inventory of the site of Earlington Woods Planned Unit Development,
an enterprise of CHG International located in Renton, Washington. This
study resulted in the discovery of an archaeological site, 45K151. Coring
and test excavation later proved 45K151 to be an extensive archaeological
site in an excellent state of preservation. It appreared to be a large
winter village occupied less than 500 years ago. Because intact village
sites of this age range are rare in the highly urbanized Puget Sound area,
45K151 was rated as highly significant and mitigation of the adverse impacts
of construction on this important cultural resource was necessary. CHG
entered into a contract with the University of Washington in which the
Office of Public Archaeology was to conduct extensive excavation of the site
to salvage as much data as possible before the area was developed. This
mitigation plan was verbally approved by the Washington State Office of
Archaeology and Historic Preservation, and work commenced.
Excavations were conducted during September and October, 1979 and
June and July, 1980. The research generated intense public interest with
well over 1500 people visiting the site in 1979 and up to 500 more in 1980.
Media coverage was continuous during each excavation season. Many volunteer
laborers were attracted in this way and are, in large part, responsible for
the project's success.
Artifacts and records were analysed in OPA laboratories from 1979
through 1981. This report presents the findings of that study.
THE SITE
45KI51 is located in Renton on Hardie Avenue S.W. across from the
Renton Shopping Center (Figure 1). It consists of two separate, historic
village sites, one occupied for a period between 1790 and 1825 when the
coastal fur trade was just getting underway, and the other used for only
one to three years between 1850 and 1856. The older village was the single
large communal longhouse occupied by a wealthy household, identified as
the Sbabadid village of Duwamish Indians. The occupants pursued a largely
traditional way of life but were in possession of trade beads and metals
and had learned to fashion the latter into utilitarian and decorative
objects.
4
B•Ilsvu
1
I
leant Arts
Figure 1. The location of the Sba'badid Site, 45K151.
3
People of the later village had moved into smaller, single family
houses, five in all, and except for their food supply and cooking practices,
had lost much of their traditional way, of life. This village, in which most
of the houses were occupied no more than a single year,is identified as part
of the large Duwamish population that gathered at the village of Tuxudidu
before moving onto the Port Madison Reservation in 1956.
PERSONNEL
Principal Investigators on this contract were James C. Chatters, Robert
C. Dunnell and Jerry V. Jermann; Mr. Chatters directed all phases of the
actual research. Field crew foreman in 1979 were Joan Robinson and M. Lee
Stilson and Lisa Vance coordinated analysis efforts. Douglas Brewer, Virginia
Butler and R. Lee Lyman analyzed vertebrate fauna and David Rhode identified
plant remains. Actual field tasks were accomplished by a professional crew
and an enthusiastic group of volunteers of all ages. A. Lynn Leonard and
Dawn Brislawn handled budgetary and•secretarial matters. Marilyn Morrison
prepared the graphics and maps for this report.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
It is unusual for private companies to provide such generous support for
archaeological investigations as did CHG International. Nearly $60,000 was
spent by that company on the 45KI51 project and the public has benefited by
the increased knowledge obtained thereby.
I wish also to thank the people of Renton and the whole of King County
for their interest, support and assistance in the field. Special recognition
belongs to the Michael Shong's and Vivian White for their help and kindness
throughout the project. Cecile Maxwell. and. Jerrie Marie Bennett, represent-
ing the Duwamish tribe, were helpful in many ways and David Buerge provided
invaluable assistance during the preparation of part of this report. Good
luck to you all.
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING
GEOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGIC HISTORY
The present -day Duwamish and Green River Valleys, along with Lake
Washington, were once arcs of Puget Sound; salt water channels carved into
ancient seabed and more recent glacial deposits left by the advance of the
Vashon ice lobe. By 14,000 years ago, the glacier had retreated and sedi-
ment from the green, White and Cedar Rivers began filling the saltwater
channels with gravels, sand and silt washed down from the Cascade Mountains
and glacial hills of the lowland. An alluvial fan quickly formed at the
mouth of the Cedar, eventually damming off one channel and creating fresh-
water Lake Washington. White and Green River fans separated saltwater
bodies in the Green and Stuck Valleys. With the help of. the Osceola mud -
flow off Mt. Rainer some 5000 years ago, the Green and White gradually
filled their valley with sediment. At present -day Tukwila, the White
River, now called Green, joined the, now defunct Black River draining from
Lake Washington, and became the Duwamish (Dunne and Dietrich 1979).
Gradually, over probably less than 2000 years, the Duwamish extended
a delta down its valley and into Elliot Bay.
At the time 45K151 was inhabited, Lake Washington still overflowed
down the Black River, its waters joined shortly by the Cedar (Figure 2).
The Black River flowed around the north end of Earlington Hill, and after
a little over 5 km (2.5 miles) joined the White River. The White was a
slow, deep, meandering stream, kept within its banks by natural levees of
sand, to either side of which were expansive backswamps. Where the Black
crossed the White River flood plain, beginning near the east end of
Earlington Golf Course, it too began to meander, forming low natural
levees. Above that however, the Black was fairly swift, with wide gravel
bars along its banks. '
It was on these gravel bars, formed at different times in the late
13th and mid 19th centuries, that the villages of 45K151 had been built.
To the south lay the floodplain and backswamps of the White River.
Earlington Hill stood immediately to the north and west, with more low
hills eastward across the Cedar River fan and to the west beyond the
White River.
5
R4W R5E
45 -KI -51
Topographical Map of Vicinit
\ \• * \\ \ / / / 1\ \
LAKE
WASHINGTON
Figure 2. Topographical map of the Black River area, as it existed
in the late 19th century. Based on U.S.G.S., Tacoma and Snohomish,
Washington Quadrangles, 1898,1900. Scale 1 :62,500.
6
The overall character of local geography can be summarized as low,
level wet floodplains and alluvial fans bounded by steepsided, loaf- shaped
ranges of hills and drained by broad rivers. In 1916, the U.S. Army Corps
of Engineers altered this pattern with their programs of flood control and
port development (Board of Engineers 1907). Lake Washington was lowered
7 feet and the Cedar channelled into the lake, thus ending the flow of the
Black River. Once on the west bank of the Black River, 45K151 is now west
of Hardie Avenue S.W., across from the Renton Shopping Center.
LIVING ENVIRONMENT
The terrain of hills, floodplains, backswamps and rivers once provided
many distinct habitats wherein a variety of plants and animals existed.
Although today this area is almost entirely urbanized, good information
about its former flora and fauna can be obtained from the writings of early
explorers and from the detailed notes of surveyors working in the 19th
century for the U.S. Government Land Office.
The earliest account of the Duwamish and Black Rivers is found in a
letter written in 1850 by Col. I.N..Ebey, then a homesteader on Whidbey
Island. Writing to M.T. Simmons, Ebey states:
The next river north (of the Puyallup is the Dewams. This
river falls into a bay of the same name, below Vashon's
Island, and immediately opposite Port Orchard. This bay
forms a beautiful little harbor of about four miles in width,
and some six miles in length. This bay, like the Powalp
(Puyallup) is surrounded by woodland. The river, for a
distance of about twenty miles (sic) has an average of about
forty yards, with a deep channel and placid current.
The river meanders along through rich bottom land, not heavily
timbered, with here and there a beautiful plain of inrivalled
fertility, peeping out through a fringe of vine maple, alder
and ash, or baldly presenting a full view of their native rich-
ness and undying verdure. Other plains of more extensive
character are presented as being near at hand, and of suffi-
cient fertility to satisfy the most fastidious taste.
At a distance of about twenty miles (sic) from the bay, the
river forks - the right fork (east) bears the name of Dewams
(the Black River). It has an average width of about twenty
yards. The country along its banks partakes of the same
character as that lower down the river (Bagley 1928:27).
7
A more complete, if less literary description of the native flora can
be gleaned from the original field notes of surveyors, written between
1861 and 1865. Having noted the species and size of trees that stood near
section and quarter section markers, as well as any large trees or changes
in plant cover encountered along section lines, these surveyors have left
us not only a record of the kinds of plants in the area, but also inform
us about the ages of forests themselves. Figure 3 is a simplified map of
the flora then found in parts of Townships 23E, R4 and 5W, taken from these
notes (King County Field Notes, Book 2). Because it is based on data re-
corded only a decade after the first white settlement of the Duwamish River
Basin, this map can be taken as an accurate representation of natural plant
distributions.
In the mid 1800s, the hills on either side of the Cedar River, Earling-
tion Hill and patches of the hills to the west were supporting young forests.
Most trees in these areas were under 10 inches across, with a few over 20
inches in diameter. Only on steep hillsides and much of the range of hills
west of the White and Duwamish Rivers were there mature forests. There,
trees of 30 to 50 inches across were common. Apparently, much of the area's
forest cover had been burned or blown down one or two generations before
American settlers arrived. Because Indian people are known to have burned
prairies and berry fields (cf. Bagley 1916; Smith 1940) it is quite possible
they were responsible for burning the forests in our study area in an effort
to maintain an optimum habitat for their way of life.
Forests of the hills were largely dominated by various species of
conifers, but contained a good proportion of large deciduous trees as well.
Today, this plant community is called the Mixed Forest type (Franklin and
Dyrness 1973; cf. Erckmann 1979). Dominant trees in this community are
varying proportions of Douglas fir (Psuedotsuga mensiesii), western red
cedar (Thuja plicate), western hemlock (Tsuga heterophyla), red alder
(Alnus rubra) and bigleaf maple (Acer macrophyllum). As Figure 3 shows,
hemlock was more common in the hills, between the Cedar and White Rivers
and Douglas fir and cedar dominate east of the Cedar and west of the White
and Duwamish. Alder and maple are most abundant in other stands.
8
�4
4 44 4 ,. 4 4'•:
X4444
444444�,��44'.
444444
444 ,. 444
444 4 4 4
444444 `4
4
4 +44444444 4 44444
4 4
X 4 4 4 '4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4444444444444444444
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4444444444444 4
444444
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 44\ 4 4
k
4 4 '4 4 4 \.
' 4444444444444444444444444444441
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4)
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4i
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
;��, 444444444
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
rr'�r 1 4 4 4 4 4/
44444
�'�tf�,,'t.^t;;f �( 4 4 4
fy y... f• 4 4
~ 1
4 4 4� /
4 4 4 444444
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 /
44444444444 4 444
4.4.4.4.4. 4.4.4.4
•4.4•4•4.4.4•4•1•1.
• 4.4.4.4.1.4•/.4.1
4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.
• 4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4
.4.4.4.1.4.4.4.4.
.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.1
4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.
4.4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.
4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4.4
4.4.4.4.4 A.A.A.
.4.4.4.4.4.4.1
.4.4.4.4.1•
.4.4.4
4 4
4 4
45 -KI-51
Vegetation of Vicinity ca. 1865
LEGEND
Prairie 0 Cattail and Willow Swamp
Cottonwood/ Ash/ Maple/ Alder/ Willow Q Young Stands Hemlock/ Fir/ Cedar/ Alder
•-•-4:; Young Fir/ Cedar U Old Growth Fir /Cedar Q New Growth Alder/ Cedar
Young Alder/ Willow � New Growth Maple/ Alder/ Fir
Figure 3. Vegetation map of the 45K151 vicinity, based on land
surveyor's field notes taken between 1861 and 1865. Scale 1:62,500.
9
Several other tree species mingled with the dominant forms and a dense
understory of ferns and shrubs lived below the canopy. Edible berries,
shoots and roots were to be found in this understory vegetation, including
native blackberry (Rubus ursinus), thimbleberry (R. parvifolius), Oregon
grape (Berberis spp), huckleberry (Vaccinium spp) and ferns. According
to the surveyors, some form of "wild cherry" was also present, and may
have been either the Indian plum (Osmaronia cerasiformis) or one of several
species of the genus Prunus (cherries, plums).
There were prairies of varying sizes in forest clearings and meadows
on the floodplains. These communities were dominated by either grasses or
hardhack (Spirea douglasii) plus various forbs. Camas (Camassia quamash),
wild onion (Allium spp) and lupine (Lupinus spp) may have been present in
these areas.
F,equent flooding and variations in the height of land surfaces above
water table made river bottoms the setting for a great diversity of plant
life. In addition to the meadows mentioned by Col. Ebey, there were
three major plant communities, now called the Riparian Woodland, Marsh and
Shrub Swamp (Erckmann 1979).
According to the surveyors, most of the floodplain was in varying aged
stands of Riparian Woodland, comprised of black cottonwood (Populous trich-
carpa) and willow (Solix spp) the largest cottonwoods grew on natural levees
where they were less often flooded out. Among these trees were scatterings
of bigleaf maple, Oregon ash (Fraxinus latifolia), red alder, pacific crab-
apple (Pyrus fusca) and "wild cherry ". Occasional douglas fir or cedar
were seen, but they were not at all common.
A variety of shrubs, many of them bearing edible fruit, grew as an
understory among the cottnwoods. Salmon berry (R. spectabilis), wild rose
(Rosa spp), thimbleberry and wild gooseberry (Ribes divaricatum), were
among the tastiest members of the understory. Red elderberry (Sambucus
racemosa) was. abundant.
Nearly continuous fields of cattail (Typha latifolia), grew in marshes,
associated with willow, hardhack and various aquatic plants. Adjacent to,
and integrading with marshes, were thickets of willow swamp (Erckmann 1979).
10
Because of the diversity of habitats which they provide, the area's
plant communities are home to many species of wildlife. Forest and wood-
land were the habitat of mammals and songbirds, while waterfowl populated
the marshes and swamps by the tens of thousands. Only some of the larger
or more abundant species are mentioned here. A complete list of the modern
fauna is presented in Erckmann (1979 :9-12) and descriptions of the mammals
now or formerly present are provided by Dahlquest (1948).
Two species of deer were once abundant in the area. The small columbian
blacktail (Odocoileus hemionus columbianus) is a browser and frequented both
forest and woodland, living predominantly in brushy areas. Its large cousin,
the elk (Cervus canadensis) may have been even more common, grazing on prai-
ries and floodplain meadows. Black bear (Ursus americanus) lived on berries
and insects and shared forested lands with the unique mountain beaver
(Aplodontia rufa). These animals, with the possible exception of bears,
fell prey to wolf (Canis lupus), mountain lion (Fells concolor) and lynx
(Lynx canadensis).
Waterfowl shared marshes, rivers and swamps with beavers (Castor
canadensis), muskrats (Ondatra zibethicus) and their most effective enemy,
the river otter (Lutra canadensis). Beavers were so abundant in one marsh
south of the Black River that land surveyors, who rarely commented on an-
imals, were moved to remark of their great numbers. Coot (Fulica americana),
great blue heron (Ardea herodias), and mallard (Anas platyrhynchos) were
year round neighbors to the beaver, american widgeon (Mareca americana),
shoveler (Spatula clypeata), green winged teal (Nettion carolinensis), and
Canada Goose (Branta canadensis), and were perhaps the most common seasonal
visitors.
In spite of the diversity and richness of forest and marshland, by far
the greatest populations of edible species lived in the areas rivers, lakes
and streams. Many species of fishes, mollusks and crustaceans could be
found both in freshwater and in the nearby Duwamish estuary and Puget Sound.
At least eight species of migratory fishes passed within a mile of
45K151, most of them swimming up the Black River directly in front of the
site.
11
Four species of salmon (Oncorhynchus tschawytscha), King; nerka,
sockeye; keta, chum; and Kisutch, coho; steelhead and cutthroat trout (Salmo
gairdneri and clarkii), Pacific lamprey (Entosphemus tridentatus) and long
fin smelt (Spirinchus thaleicthys) are anadronous, hatched in freshwater,
growing to maturity in saltwater and returning to freshwater to spawn. In
addition, three other species of migrants mature in Lake Washington and
ascend the Cedar River and other tributaries of the lake on annual spawning
runs. These are landlocked varieties of long fin smelt, sockeye salmon
(or kokanee), and the largescale sucker (Catostomus macrocheilus) (Wydoski
and Whitney 1979). Table 1 presents a spawning calendar for these various
fishes and shows that varying numbers of migrant species would have been
present in or near the Black River throughout the year.
Resident fishes were also present in the Black, although certainly in
lower abundance than the anadromous species, and would have included the
northern squawfish (Ptychocheilus oregonensis), peamouth (Mylocheilus
caurinus), rainbow trout (Salmo gairdneri) and some cutthroat trout and
suckers. Various smaller fishes, such as sculpins, daces and darters
would also have been present.
In the brackish estuary of the river and in Puget Sound, were numerous
species of fishes; various sole, flounders, sculpins, cods and smelts plus
dogfish (Squalus acanthias) and ratfish (Hydrolagus colleii).
The only large invertebrates inhabiting the freshwater streams were
crayfish and the river mussel ( Margaritifera margaritifera). The latter
species prefers rapidly flowing freshwater and would have been common in
the Cedar River and in swifter sections of the Black. The intertidal zone
of Elliot Bay and Puget Sound, by contrast, was an abundant store of
invertebrate fauna. Crabs and various limpet, clam, snail and mussel
species could be found there. In the muddy tide flats and sandy beaches
one would have found horse clam (Tresus capox), Geoduc (Panope generosa),
Olympic oyster (Ostrea lurida) and moonsnail (Polinices lewisii). Pebbly
shorelines supported the horse clam plus the abundant little neck (Proto-
thaca staminea) and butter clam (Saxodomus giganteus), and rocky beaches
were populated with bay mussel (Mytilus edulis) and various barnacles,
snails and limpets.
12
Taken as a whole, the environment within a half days journey from
site 45K151 was arich one in which some form of food was available through-
out the year.
Table 1. Dates of spawning migrations of adult fishes in the
Cedar and Duwamish Basins. Salmon and steelhead trout data
are from Salo and McComas (1979) except for the sockeye
which, along with the other species is from Nydowski and
Whitney (1979).
Species
Month
J F M A M J J A S O N D
King Salmon *
Coho Salmon
Chum Salmon
Sockeye Salmon t
Cutthroat Trout
Steelhead Trout +
Longfin Smelt
Lake Washington
Puget Sound
Largescale Sucker
Pacfic Lamprey
* Most migrate from September to November
t Though they once entered the Cedar River and Lake Washington
via the Black River, they now enter Lake Washington via the
ship canal during the period represented by the solid line,
ascending the Cedar River and smaller streams during the
period shown by a dashed line
+ Only the more abundant winter run is shown here The summer
run of much fewer fi.sh lasts from April to October
CULTURAL DEVLEOPMENTS
PREHISTORY
Like most of Lower Puget Sound and its drainage basin, the Duwamish
River and Lake Washington drainages are little known archaeologically.
Only 71 archaeological sites have been found in the whole of King County.
Fewer of these are in any sense intact fewer still have been studied exten-
sively. Besides 45K151, only three other sites have been excavated in the
aforementioned drainages: the Duwamish No. 1 Site (45KI23) on the lower
Duwamish estuary (Campbell n.d.; Lorenz et al. 1976; Jermann et al. 1977);
Tualdad Altu (45K159) on the Black River, 1200 feet from 45K151 (Chatters,
n.d.) and the Marymoor Site (45KI9) on the Sammamish River (Greengo and
Houston 1970).
Duwamish No. 1, situated near the historic tide flats of Elliot Bay, is
a salt water /riverine site inhabited between 600 A.D. and 1600 A.D.
(Campbell 1981); Tualdad Altu was occupied briefly 1500 years ago and
is a riverine site near the tidal estuary of that time; Marymoor is an un-
dated riverine site which on the basis of artifact style, appears to be
older than 45K159.
Although a few other sites have been excavated in this general area;
(45KI19, near Snoqualmie Falls [Onat and Bennett 1968], 45SN100, somewhat
lower down the Snoqualmie [Nelson 1962, 1976], 45KP9, across Puget Sound
in East Bremerton, and various marsh -side encampments in the Enumclaw area
[cf. Hedlund 1973]). there is certainly nowhere near enough information for
a regional synthesis of local prehistory to be developed. All we have thus
far is a set of data sporadic in both its spatial and temporal coverage.
What can be said is this: sometime after the retreat of Vashon Ice,
possibly as early as 12,000 years ago, human beings of Siberian origin
entered the Puget Sound area. Remains of stone chipping stations and per-
haps campsites dating from that period to as recently as 4000 years ago
(Nelson 1976) are found on high river and beach terraces from Point Roberts
(Jermann 1977) and the Fraser River (Matson 1976) to the Stilliguamish,
Snohomish and Pilchuck River systems (Butler 1961; Chatters and Thompson
1979; Kidd 1964: Stilson and Chatters n.d.) and as far south as the Cowlitz
drainage (Dancey 1969).
14
This early period, called the Olcott Phase, is represented in the
vicinity of 45K151 as sporadic finds of leaf- shaped projectile points at
Poulsbo, on Queen Anne Hill in Seattle, on Earlington Hill in Renton and
near several lakes south of the latter city. Projectile points of Olcott
style are common at the Marymoor site along with side notched and stemmed
forms, leading Nelson (1976) to conclude that the site dates to shortly
after the end of the Olcott Phase, or around 4000 to 3500 years ago.
Olcott is believed by some (e.g. Kidd 1964) to represent an early big
game hunting tradition, but there is no firm evidence in support of such a
conclusion (Stilson and Chatters n.d.).
Following the Olcott Phase, a uniform culture of riverine, estuarine
and salt water villages plus temporary fish and shellfish collecting encamp-
ments appears to have formed in the area and seems to have remained as a
relatively stable adaptation until modern times. The important word here
is seems. As already mentioned, the archaeological record is sketchy.
The apparent stability of human cultures may be an artifact of a poor
record coupled with the overly simplistic approach most archaeologists have
thus far taken to this region's prehistory.
HISTORIC CULTURE: THE DUWAMISH INDIANS
The following description of aborignial Duwamish culture is derived
from a few primary sources: George Gibbs (1855, 1877) descriptions of
Puget Sound peoples in general; Marion Smith's (1940) Puyallup - Nisqually,
and her later work on Puget Sound Indians in transition (1949); Harriet
Turner's Ethnozoology of the Snoqualmie Indians (1976); records of the
U.S. Court of Claims case: "The Duwamish et al. vs. the United States"
(1926); Bancroft's Native Races of the Pacific States, Vol. 1 (1848)
and Bagley's histories of Seattle and King County (1916, 1928). In addi-
tion to these published works I have made extensive use of unpublished
information from David Buerge historian for the Duwamish Tribe. In the
following work the only sources given are those not on this list.
"TRIBAL" IDENTITY, ORGANIZATION AND RELATIONSHIPS TO NEIGHBORS
Native peoples of Puget Sound were not highly organized in a political
sense and to speak of the Duwamish Tribe in the sense of a political body
under the leadership of a formally recognized individual is to misrepresent
15
the aboriginal culture of lower Puget Sound. Rather than being pledged
to a nation -like governing authority, an individual's allegiance, if indeed
he had any, was to the household and village in which he dwelled. Each of
these villages was, in turn, an autonomous unit which could be allied with
or opposed to any other village at any point in time. Intervillage polit-
ical alliances did occur, usually for the repulsion or desturction of a
mutual enemy, but these were short lived. The early 19th century alliance
of some villages of the Duwamish, Suquamish and Klallam for the annihilation
of the Chimaukum is one such case.
Villages were named for their geographic locations and each individual
born into a village identified himself and was identified by people from
other nearby settlements according to the village name. A person born at
the Stuck or Log Jam Village in the lower White River Valley, for example,
was known as Stukabsh, a "person of the log jam ". Village identification
was used among people inhabiting a single drainage system, but outside that
area the same folk were identified by the drainage of their birth. Hence,
the people living on the Duwamish, Black and lower Cedar Rivers, plus the
people of the Stuck (who had originated on the Black, [Ballard n.d.]) were
known as dwellers of the Txwudao River or Txwduwabsh. Thus, at one and the
same time, a man or woman of the log jam village was Txwduwabsh to people
from another river, Stukabsh to members of other villages, and was known by
his or her personal name at home.
To the white settlers who immigrated into Puget Sound in great numbers
after the mid 19th century, such a complex system of identity and simple
system of government was as incomprehensible as the name Txwduwabsh was
unpronouncable. For administrative convenience, native peoples were organ-
ized into tribes under the leadership of appointed "chiefs ". This organ-
ization, fortunately, followed lines of local identity and the Txwduwabsh
became the D'Wamish Tribe and, finally, the Duwamish, as we know them today.
The Duwamish were closely related both culturally and linguistically
with other peoples of Puget Sound, which we now call Puyallup, Nisqually,
Snoqualmie, Suquamish, Sammamish and Muckleshoot. Members of these groups
inhabited the approximate areas shown in Figure 4 and all spoke mutually
intelligible dialects of Nisqually, a Salishan language (cf. Snyder 1968).
16
0
V//
S
(KLALLA
d / /,,.(SKOK
V
T
0P
1
MX a • a army it
MI -H)
�sr
ter.
RI leer
.ry S K A G I T
.tie / /16th
Qwe7tz c / / // •
f/.41/./ / / / / / / / ///
4 ///
/
feet SNONO�ISH� SKYKOMISH
/ % fi SIk/taTediabc
,p. /
f
DWitm dale L
/
N
Sh.yho..!•a
////////////// $.
Tala7toz /ice •b4
*S9ua1_to
• • /.tc
ID/AMISH
1 4)
ISH
MUC ESHOOT
//i4
ca.nn & • A
N %SQUTALLY ye
newer •
•Rochester
Seals d .,.I.•
0 .0 10
Figure 4. Approximate territories of the Duwamish
and neighboring tribes. (Haeberlin and Gunther 1930)
17
Although they were generally similar in culture, all living in similar
houses, wearing similar clothes, using the same kinds of implements, etc.,
these peoples differed in their ecological adaptations. The Suquamish and
probably the Saltwater Nisqually, Puyallup and Duwamish were adapted to the
open, saltwater environment of Puget Sound and rarely went far inland.
Villages of these groups were often larger than those found in other areas
and the people relied heavily on marine fish and shellfish for subsistence.
Dwellers of lower rivers (where prairies were small or absent) concentrated
their subsistence efforts on the salmon runs and wild berries of their
vicinity, while the inland tribes, living above .the weirs of lowland groups,
were forced to depend more on hunting and root gathering in the prairies.
The presence of varied adaptations in so small an area resulted in a partial
interdependence among saltwater, lowland, and inland groups, each trading
extensively with the others for foodstuffs and raw materials or for manu-
factured goods more efficiently produced by others. Thus, peoples inhab-
iting the area from Puget Sound to the Cascades or any large drainage formed
a loose, symbiotic unit. In historic times, the Snoqualmie, River Duwamish
and Elliot Bay Duwamish resembled such a unit.
Aside from this loose informal economic dependence, lower Puget Sound
peoples were interconnected by more formal ties, principally through marriage.
The village was an exogamous unit and intermarriage helped develop amicable
relationships and form economic interconnections between villages both in
and outside local drainages. Inland groups were also heavily intermarried
with the Yakima, Kittitas and Wenatchees from east of the Cascades.
Trade seems to have both fostered and been facilitated by these ties
of marriage. Anything which one village produced and another lacked or was
unskilled in was an item of trade. Baskets, dentalium shells, dried clams
and other items were traded with eastern Indians for soft stone pipes, skins,
goat wool and, surprisingly, dried salmon. Intervillage trade among Puget
Sound peoples is less well documented, but several authors do mention that
the Snoqualmies were the only remaining people (in the 19th century) who
made stone arrow points, which they produced from stone found near the Tolt
River (cf. Tweddell 1953).
18
There are rare references to trade between Puget Sound people and
Tlingit and Haida expeditions from southeast Alaska. One such account
mentions mid 19th century visits by 40 foot Alaskan trading canoes to the
mouth of the Cedar River, where the visitors exchanged "beads, lead, copper
and even slaves for dried salmon " (Slauson 1976:2). The original source of
this information is unknown to me, but it must have been an event attended
by the Duwamish with as much trepidation as by the anticipation of exotic
purchases. Haida and Tlingit were powerful marauders who regularly raided
Puget Sound villages for slaves to trade along the Pacific Coast.
People of the main Duwamish, who lived from present day Boeing Field
on the Duwamish to Maple Valley, on the Cedar, plus the people of the Stuck,
were recognized as the most economically powerful villages of the entire
drainage. Living as they did on the major channels of large rivers up
which fish runs must pass before reaching smaller tributaries to spawn,
these folk could effectively control the fish resources of inland groups.
The most wealthy Duwamish inhabited the Black River villages and were
recognized as the only "high class" people of the area. In 1800, when the
White River log jam formed, five high class families (read wealthy and
influential - there was no class recognition as such) moved there from
the Black River to take advantage of the highly effective, natural salmon
wier (Ballard n.d.).
Relations between these high class villages and their neighbors were
often strained because of the jealousy and animosity engendered in up -river
folk over the scant salmon supplies allowed to reach them. Enmity rarely
developed into open warfare, since intermarriage between these various
villages was extensive, but blood feuds did occasionally flare and slaving
raids were not unknown. The Snoqualmie, the most warlike and feared people
of Puget Sound were most often the perpetrators of such raids.
SETTLEMENT AND SUBSISTENCE
Economic as well as social life centered on the village, a collection
of one or more large, rectangular cedar buildings. Villages were permanent
settlements in the sense that houses built on the site remained intact year
after year. Villages were situated at favorable locations that afforded
optimum access to fresh water and wild food resources on which the people
19
depended. Because the factors that made a site desirable usually remained
constant over a few generations time, villages remained on or near the same
places for many years. Six villages were inhabited by the Duwamish in the
vicinity of 45K151 during the early half of the 19th century (Figure 5).
One of these, Sba'badid was on the site itself. Tuxudidu stood on the
opposite side of the Black River, where the Renton Shopping Center is today.
The houses in permanent villages were built from Douglas fir and cedar
and took two forms, the common shed type and the rarer, enigmatic gambrel
roofed type. For a full description of each, plus the gable roofed house
in use elsewhere, see Waterman and Greiner (1921). A short description of
the shed type will suffice here.
A double row of large posts was first set in the ground parallel with
a river bank. If an especially wide house was to be built or perhaps if
roof beams were relatively light, a third row might be set between the first
two (cf. Underhill 1944: fig. 51). Post height decreased progressively from
around 12 feet at the front (river side) to varying heights at the back,
depending on the roof pitch desired. Once posts were firmly set, equally
large cross beams were laid across pairs of posts, perpendicular with the
long axis of the house and overlapping 3 to 4 feet on either end. Stringers
of stout poles were then lashed across these beams, running the length of
the house and a roofing of cedar planks was laid parallel to the slope of
the roof. These planks had been fashioned from clear, straight- grained
cedar and fir, first split with antler or wooden wedges and shaped using
a stone or metal bladed adze. Planks also formed the walls and were laid
horizontally or vertically, often both on the same building. Walls might
also be made from mats if the occupants were poor.
For a horizontal wall, planks were stacked edge to edge and held in
place by pairs of poles, one each on the inside and outside of the planking.
Details of vertical plank construction in shed houses are not available,
the procedure may have been the same as for gabled structures (cf. Smith
1940). In gabled houses, vertical planks were lashed to a plate set along
the ends of crossbeams and to a pole attached to the main house posts about
half -way down. Paired poles were not used to keep vertical planks in place.
20
Doors were cut in end walls, although additional doors might be built
for escape from enemies or to ease congestion in a large dwelling. Circular
openings a short distance above the ground covered by a mat or plank served
this purpose. There were no windows.
Mats of cattail and bullrush lined the walls and parts of the floor and
two sets of benches were constructed against end and side walls. The lower
bench was a sleeping platform some 3.5 to 4 feet wide, depending on the
distance from wall to main post. These too were covered with mats used as
bedding. The second set of shelves, well above the first, was for storage.
Long, narrow poles were laid at varying heights the length and /or width of
a house to serve as smoking and drying racks for meat and fish.
Houses were large buildings, the communal habitations of from four to
eight or more families, depending on house dimensions. Duwamish houses have
been reported in varying sizes by witnesses at the U.S. Court of Claims case
of the Duwamish et al. vs. the United States (1926). Major Hamilton, a
Duwamish descendant, reported houses of two sizes, 48 x 90 feet and 60 x 120
feet, but modest dwellings were described by older Duwamish. Jennie .Davis
had lived in a house 30 feet wide by 75-80 feet long, and other witnesses re-
membered 30 and 36 by 60 foot long buildings, though one said chiefs lived in
houses up to 100 feet long.
Down the center of a finished house was a walkway, the areas on either
side of which were divided into dwelling spaces for single familes. Although
Smith (1940) stresses the absence of partitions between family compartments
among the Nisqually, testimony by Duwamish before the U.S. Court of Claims
mentioned the presence of mat partitions. Each family kept one or more fires
burning at all times and the result, in an open, partition -less house was a
double row of fires extending the entire length of the building.
Even though the houses were . large, they would not have seemed spacious
inside. Rack upon rack of stored provisions (dried fish and baskets of roots,
clams and berries) filled the ceiling space and temporary racks hung above
cooking fires. Storage shelves were filled with every sort of possession.
The population of each household included related and non - related familes
and unmarried adults, and membership was obtained and maintained through the
possession of some necessary skill. Ideally each adult in the household was
an expert at something the others could not do as well. Unlike some hunting
21
and gathering societies, Puget Sound peoples had a highly developed division
of labor. Tasks were assigned by sex; men hunting, fishing, and working wood,
women cooking, making basketry, clothing and mats and collecting and preserv-
ing roots, berries and invertebrates. This division was not strictly adhered
to, though, and members of each sex helped the other whenever possible. In
addition to sexually defined tasks, some people became specialists at partic-
ular skills. Hunting, harpooning, gambling and basket making were all skills
that required constant practice and were most successfully engaged in by
professionals.
A specialist might help with other economic pursuits, but his main
occupation was paramount. A hunter, for example not only sought deer, elk
and bear, he also made all his bows and arrows, tanned hides and often pro-
duced all the hunting implements and stone tools used by the household.
Because the goal of a household was to function as an independent eco-
nomic unit and, through productive efficiency, to amass wealth and power,
specialists were highly sought after as household members. Each family in a
house gathered its own supplies. But because of their varying skills, fam-
ilies relied on one another to a great extent. The more each person's skills
complemented the skills of others, the more efficiently the household operated.
The house was usually owned by a single, wealthy man and he and his wives
and children occupied the place of honor, to the right of the downstream door.
Occupancy of other compartments may have been rigidly prescribed, but there
is no record of it. It is known that membership was not permanent, and an
efficient specialist might be lured away to a more wealthy household or a
lazy or ineffective family might be ejected in favor of another, more
productive one.
Household groups remained together from late fall through early spring,
when they began to break up into families or small bands and for the foraging
season. New berry and cattail shoots lured some away in earlier spring, but
the major exodus was not until May, when bands dispersed to beaches or prai-
ries, where they set up temporary camps of small conical or rectangular mat
lodges.
Black River people, at least those of the Tuxudidu village, collected
saltwater fish and clams and other invertebrates on Elliot Bay (Paige 1856).
Flounders, sole, sculpins and various cods and rockfishes were caught by hook
22
and line and eaten freshly roasted. In historic times, hooks were of iron,
but may previously have been bent wood or a composite hook with wooden shank
and a bone or ivory barb (cf. Croes 1981; Ruby and Brown 1976:17,19).
Various clams, mussels, moon snails and barnacles were dug with sharp-
ened ironwood sticks and baked, boiled or roasted on the beach. Horse clam
shells, some as large as bowls were occasionally kept and used as spoons, or
as receptacles for such purposes as catching the grease from roasting meats or
heating the salmon skin used as wood glue.
Familes who went to prairies engaged in digging roots, chiefly camas,
Brodiaea, wild onion, tiger lilly and fern. While women dug, men hunted the
deer and elk that inhabited the prairie environment. Root digging was done
with a curved ironwood digging stick. Camas, at least, were baked and dried
in small cakes for later use. Many of these families would go to salt water
after the short root season had ended.
By late summer, shell fish had often become poisonous from red tides and
salmon runs were well under way. Families once again converged at the rivers
near favorite fishing sites which, in the case of Black River groups, were
close to village sites. Salmon were taken in great numbers from river weirs
(see Bagley 1928:Figs. 1,2,3), and by river seines, spears, gaff hooks and
nets used from canoes. Salmon spear points were double pronged, each prong
tipped with a 2i inch point. The point consisted of three parts bound to-
gether and glued with pitch; a straight rounded point and two barbs hollowed
or flattened on one side to receive both point and shaft (cf. Underhill 1944:
Fig. 8). Gaff hooks were originally unbarbed and made of hardwood, but barb-
ed and unbarbed hooks of iron were later substituted (Ruby and Brown 1976:18).
The favorite places for wiers, were near bends in the river where steep
banks stood along one side. Two such bends were present in the middle Black
River near Sba'badid and Tuxudidu villages. Other forms of fishing would
have been effective in deep holes, where salmon rested; these were also
within a few hundred yards of the two villages.
Salmon were used fresh, cooked by many means including boiling, baking
and roasting on stakes set around the fire. For storage, King, Sockeye and
Silver salmon were dried outdoors; chum salmon and steelhead were smoked
indoors on racks above house fires. Indian women preserved separately the
flesh, heads and backbones with adherent flesh of salmon and steelhead.
23
Fishing contiunued into the winter months, but the high waters of Nov-
ember usually halted weir fishing for the season. When salmon were not in
season or during any other time of year, resident trout, suckers and squaw -
fish could be caught and eaten.
In early fall, during the start of salmon season, berries of may species
ripened in the hills and lowland of Duwamish territory. If trips were short,
women might go alone for picking, but longer journeys and extended picking
exursions were accompanied by men who hunted and provided protection. Most
kinds of berries were gathered in quantity and preserved in some way. Salal
(Gaultheria shallon), service (Amelanchier spp) and huckleberries were dried
over fires like raisins and blackberries were dried, pounded, formed into
cakes and dried again. Elderberries collected near villages were taken home,
where, they were cooked and placed in lined openwork baskets. The baskets
were either set in running water, or in pits in the ground (Gunther 1945)
and the berries allowed to ferment into a yellow butter -like mass. Elder-
berry goo kept for months if stored in water. Chokeberries (Prunus virgin -
iana) and Indian plum were also gathered.
Fall and early spring were the principle hunting seasons, though game
was sought year- round. Men would to out individually or in small groups
after deer, elk, beaver and bear, other animals being considered too much
work for little return. Bear were shot or taken in pitfalls; deer and elk
were shot at night, by torch light, and beavers were driven from their
lodges and shot or clubbed. Snares and nets caught small deer and were the
principal tools used for ducks. Some ducks were taken with multi - pronged,
barbed bird arrows (Ruby and Brown 1970 :14,15) but in general, birds were
little used. Some hunters drove game with packs of small dogs, though this
practice seems to have been fairly uncommon.
Hunters took various members of the mink family, lynx and mountian
beaver for their fur, but did not eat them very often.
Meat, like fish was preserved by smoking and drying or was cooked and
eaten fresh. Large game killed some distance from the village would be
boned and dried before it was brought home. The hunter's bow was sinew -
backed yew or syringa and arrows had shafts of cane, split cedar or fir. The
arrow's nocked end was feathered; the business end pointed with hardwood,
bone, iron or stone.
24
Early winter found the village households back together, where they
again spent the cold seasons. Individual men and women might make forays
into marsh or forest to collect wappato roots or hunt, and small fish and
steelhead were caught in the rivers. But the food gathering season was
largely over. Winter provisions were predominantly stored foods.
Women prepared a meal only once a day, in later afternoon. This con-
sisted of meat or fish served with mashed berries or soups and stews made
from roots, berries and stored meats. Other meals were of the snack form,
consisting of various preserved foods. Thus, during any one season, the
Duwamish used food collected throughout the year.
WRITTEN HISTORY: THE WHITES ARRIVE
No one is certain when European sailors first made contact with local
Indians, but we do know that Spanish explorers first reached the Pacific
Coast of California as early as the 16th century (Bagley 1928). After that
time, if any contacts did occur, they were almost certainly sporadic and
short lived. By the 1780s and 1790s, however, European and American fur
trading ships were swarming to the coast. In 1792, Menzies (Newcombe 1922)
counted 30 ships from five nations moored on Nootka Sound, all trying to
secure control of the lucrative sea otter trade that ran between North
America and China. Blue beads, sheet copper (used for lining ship's hulls)
and iron ships nails known as chisels were principal items of barter.
Historians believe that the first Europeans to explore the sound were
the parties under Captain Vancouver's command who visited the area in 1792
(Vancouver 18.01). Vancouver's science officer, Menzies provided a brief
description of the natives, noting that they were in possession of iron from
which their arrow points were made. He also mentioned on several occasions
the overwhelming value the Indians placed on copper (Newcombe 1922). Van-
couver and Menzies also commented on the small pox scars of the majority
of adults they encountered and Vancouver described at length the depopulation
of villages and the scattered bones of people believed to have been killed
by epidemics. Small pox must have reached Puget Sound by 1770 and had a
devastating effect. Historians of the mid 19th century often wondered at
how low the native population was for such a mild and productive environment
25
(e.g. Gibbs 1855) and in his speech during treaty talks at Point Elliot,
Seattle, headman of the Elliot Bay Duwamish, mentioned the dwindling of his
people from a much greater host (in Bagley 1926).
An American, John Jacob Astor founded a fur trading post at the Columbia
River's mouth in 1811, the first permanent settlement on what is now American
soil, (the English had kept a garrison at Nootka Sound since 1792). The post,
Fort Astoria, was taken over in 1812 by the British Northwest Company and
engaged in the beaver fur trade. As described by Simpson (1931), the stock
of Northwest Company trade in 1824 -5 consisted mainly of blankets, beads,
buttons, gun flints, guns and rifles, gun powder, knives, kettles, brass
rings, thimbles and vermillion. Trading ships still plied the coastal and
inland waters during this period; what they sold I do not know.
The Hudson's Bay Company (HBC) absorbed the Northwest Company in 1824 and
in 1833 constructed a trading post at Nisqually Prairie, a distance of some
30 -40 miles from Duwamish territory. Notes of the chief of traders do not
describe the inventory of trading stock in any detail, but they were defi-
nitely dealing primarily in blankets, cloth, clothing, guns, ammunition and
tobacco. Indian trading parties visited the fort in person, where they made
contact with the many domestic plants and animals of the whites. Though they
had possessed horses for almost a century, these people now saw cattle, sheep,
pigs, and peas, potatoes, oats and wheat. Perhaps because roots were already
familiar to them as staple foods, Indian people readily took to potatoes and
were raising thousands of bushels of them by 1849 on river bottoms near their
camps (Court of Claims 1926; Gibbs 1855; Hancock 1927). Cows became numerous
in the Nisqually area only after 1841, when the HBC drove a large herd over
Snoqualmie Pass from forts east of the Cascades (Bagley 1928).
In 1845 John C. Holgate filed a claim on Elliot Bay, encouraged others
to join him and by 1851 several homesteads had been taken there and on the
Duwamish River. With the coming of settlers, the HBC at Nisqually changed
its stock, trading now in axes, seed, wool, cattle, horses, nails, hooks .
lead and condiments. Customers must have been many. By 1853 claims had been
occupied along the White, Black and Green Rivers as well as at Nisqually
Prairie, Olympia and Seattle. The first white settler in the Black River was
Henry Tobin, whose claim encompassed much of the area south of the Black /Cedar
26
confluence. There he and two partners constructed a water powered saw mill,
perhaps employing Indian laborers who took a great interest in the mechanics
of the operation.
About this same time Isaac Stevens, Governor and Superintendant of Indian
Affairs for Washington Territory, was attempting to make treaties with all the
state's Indian peoples and consolidate them on a few, small reservations. In
1855 the Duwamish, along with the Suquamish, Sammamish, Snoqualmie, Snohomish
and other bands signed the Treaty of Point Elliot. Among other things the
treaty promised schools, hospitals, educations, and 80 acres of good farmland
to every man, woman and child. The large reservation was to be near Everett,
but never materialized (Court of Claims 1926). Various groups were aksed,
instead, to move temporaily to small reservations. For the Duwamish that
meant Port Madison, the present -day Suqamish Reservation.
They were wont to go. Not only were they unfriendly with the Suquamish,
but the river and inland people among them were not familiar with many as-
pects of subsistence on salt water. In 1856 and 57, most did comply, but
some elected to remain in their homes and the resultant communications be-
tween G.A. Paige, the Indian Agent, and Governor Stevens are most interesting
with respect to the Black River population of that time.
In December 1856, Paige visited the Black River (where he does not say)
where he found the Indians completely opposed to the Port Madison move. By
their own account, they would be unable to find food there during the winter,
and would strave. During this visit, Paige states:
At this place I saw 14 large winter houses in which I counted
217 persons, 162 of which have left their reservations since the
first of October....On the eastern shore of the Lake there are
three large houses containing 38 persons all of them having left
their reservation since the 1st of October (Paige 1856).
Some Black River people did eventually go to Port Madison, Tulalip or
the later - established Muckleshoot Reservation on the White River. But one
band, under the leadership of a man the whites called William remained on
the Black River permanently.
Some Indians found the treaties so grossly inequitable that they sought
to expell the white invaders. During the winter of 1855-56, about 150 men
under the leadership of the Nisqually, Leschi, attacked white travellers and
homesteaders and even had a brief skirmish with Seattle's inhabitants. Henry
27
Tobin's Black River Mill was burned by some of the warriors and he died at
about the same time of unknown causes.
Erasmus Smithers, arriving in the area the same year, shortly married
Tobin's widow, took over Tobin's land and added a homestead of his own.
Friendly to the Indians of William's village, who still lived at the tradi-
tional Tuxudidu (Figure 5), on Smither's claim, the white man granted the
band permanent use of a few acres along the Black River for their village
(Slauson 1976). Surveyor's notes record a population of 50 in 1865. There
they continued to live in small plank and mat shacks well into the early
20th century (Bagley 1926; Buerge personal communication).
Shacks had begun to replace long houses as soon as whites arrived on
homesteads(Noel 1980). Indian men were soon employed as lumberman, farmers,
sailors and fishermen, and were incorporated into the wage economy of White
America. Although some of their customs, such as a few games and parts of
their subsistence technology remained intact, the structure of the communal
household collapsed and each family became a self sufficient economic unit.
Eventually the Duwamish dispersed, many taking up their own claims, and some
leaving the area entirely. Today some 300 people are members of the Duwamish
tribe of Indians. Most of these live in the Seattle area and recognize Ms.
Cecile Maxwell as their chairman.
As the Indian population waned, whites came in droves. Renton was plat-
ted in 1875 and quickly grew into an industrial and mining center. After it
was abandoned, the old village of Tuxudidu remained a part of Smither's dairy
farm until 1953 when it was purchased for the site of the Renton Shopping
Center. The Black and long since ceased to flow, and its channel soon became
Hardie Avenue S.W.
Across the Black River, at the base of Earlington Hill, the site the
Duwamish called Sba'badid was first farmed by Christian Clymer, then became
part of the Earlington Golf and County Club's golf course and later (1895-
1913) was the dairy farm of Nesbit Hardie (Slauson 1976).
In 1877 the Seattle and Walla Walla Railroad constructed tracks around
the south end of Earlington Hill and in 1911 the Seattle Frog and Switch
foundry was built on part of the Hardie Place. Coal and iron scrap from
the mill still blanket part of the property near the railroad tracks. Later,
28
LAKE
G _ WASHINGTON
,Twubquo
Sbabadid 'Z f Skltiibsh
Black ;4
Squalils-
A Tuxudidu
C
m
■Sgoalgo
0 1mi.
Historic Duwamish Villages
LEGEND
• Early 19th Century
D 1890's
Figure 5. Ethnographically and /or historically reported
villages of the Black River Duwamish, circa the early
and late portions of the 19th century.
29
the land was again farmed but was abandoned in the 1960s. Now, CHG Inter-
national has obtained a commercial zoning on this tract and it will soon be
covered by shopping center -like stores.
PROJECT HISTORY AND TECHNICAL APPROACH
PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATIONS: SURFACE SURVEY AND TEST EXCAVATIONS
In April 1979, while preparing an environmental impact statement on
the proposed Earlington Woods residential development, personnel from Wilsey
and Ham, Inc. contacted the Washington State Office of Archaeology and His-
toric Preservation to learn whether construction on the Renton site would
adversely effect any known cultural resources. Sheila Stump, Archaeologist
for the State office, replied that no known archaeological or historic sites
existed there but:
Although no sites are known in the project area, this may be due
to the lack of survey. Sites 45K12 and 45K16 have been identi-
fied nearby; early Olcott-type sites are known to occur on upper
river terraces. We recommend survey of the project area prior
to development (letter from Stump to P.J. Bredouw, Wilsey and
Ham, 10 April 1979).
Subsequently, Wilsey and Ham contacted the Office of Public Archaeology
(OPA) at the University of Washington, requesting an archaeological investi-
gation of Earlington Woods, Parcels B and C, located on the south end of
Earlington Hill. Parcel A, on the former floodplain of the Black River, was
later added and an initial inventory of the site was conducted in June by
J. R. Hanley, an OPA Staff Archaeologist.
THE SURVEY
Hanley searched all three parcels on foot, finding nothing but modern
debris and dense undergrowth. Although we could safely assume that a surface
inspection of Parcels B and C was adequate to reveal any important cultural
resources that might have been present, this was not the case for Parcel A.
No sign of early habitation had been found on the surface of this eight
acre area but there was a high probability that a buried archaeological site
might exist there. The Black River was known to have been densely populated
by historic Duwamish Indians and we knew a village had been located in the
late 19th century at the nearby site of the Renton Shopping Center. As yet
unaware of the former existence of Sbabadid village on the Parcel A site,
we surmised that "villages might also have existed prehistorically on the
site of Parcel A and been buried by silts and sands deposited during floods"
(letter from Chatters to Zimmerman of CHG, July 24, 1979). Hanley, therefore,
conducted minor subsurface tests of this parcel.
31
Initially, four shovel tests were excavated into the floodplain: one
(Figure 6, No. 1) near the northeast corner of CHG property and three others
along the west side of Parcel A (Figure 6, No. 2, 3, 4). A larger number of
such tests is ordinarily recommended, but in Hole #1, Hanley immediately
found a concentration of charcoal, bits of burned bone and fire broken rock
about 1 m (39 inches) below the modern surface. Such a combination of
phenomena does not occur naturally and was recognized as the remains of in-
tensive human activity. Such a deposit is called a midden.
More thorough test excavations were necessary to ascertain the thickness,
horizontal extent, content and age of this archaeological deposit. Only then
could the site's significance be determined and recommendations be made re-
garding disposition of this newly discovered archaeological resource.
TESTING
With additional funding from CHG International, a crew of four, lead by
Hanley and by Ann Ramenofsky, an experienced excavator, began making tests
to determine the significance of the site, now called 45K151. Additional
shovel tests were first dug at 10 m (33 feet) intervals south and west of
test hole #1. When nothing was found in these, a final hole was placed just
north of the #1 test and, again contained a dense, black midden.
Suspecting that the site might consist of unevenly distributed midden
deposits, and to ensure that no part of the property remained uninspected,
the investigators did extensive testing. A backhoe was brought in for this
purpose and eleven narrow trenches were excavated; 10 of them in two lines
parallel with Hardie Avenue (Figure 6, A to F, H to K).
The six trenches closest to Hardie all contained from one to three mid -
den layers ranging from 50 cm (20 inches) to just over 1 m (39 inches) below
the modern surface. Trench J was the only one on the west side of the pro-
perty to contain midden, two thick layers of ash, bone, charcoal and anthro-
pogenic (human introduced) sands and gravels. Taken together, these deposits
and the thin silt layer between them were up to 40 cm (16 inches) thick and
many fire hearths could be clearly seen. Here, the midden was only 30 cm
(12 inches) below the modern surface and overlay a bed of coarse sand and pea
gravel (Figure 23). The upper midden was later named CL 1A; the lower CL 1B.
Sz
45 -KI -51
Inventory and Testing
Contour Interval 50cm
PROPERTY BOUNDARY
LEGEND
o Shovel Test
__3 Backhoe Trench
• Core Test
® Datum Point
G1 : Midden Concentrations
(Predicted;
Figure 6. Topographical map of archaeological site 45K151
showing the locations of test holes, cores, test trenc:ies
and midden concentrations. Scale is 1:1000 or 1 cm = 10 m.
33
Stratigraphy of trenches A through G at first seemed more complex, but
on closer inspection could be readily interpreted (Figure 7). On the bottom,
directly underlying the lowest midden layer (C1 2) were the coarse sands and
gravels of a river bar. CL 2 lay on, and intermixed with, the gravels, and
occurred only in A, B, and E. Fire deposits were present in this layer
along with charcoal stained gravels and bits of bone.
Between CL 2 and the CL 1 layer above was either a single layer of fine
silt or interfingered and alternating lenses of silt and fine sand. In some
areas, uneroded ripple marks were visible on the silt's surface, below the
sand. Interfingering and the presence of intact ripple marks are solid
evidence that all of this layer was deposited over a short period of time,
probably during a single flood.
Midden layer CL 1 had been deposited directly on this lowest flood layer,
before a soil could begin to form. This midden was the most continuous of
the three and was present in trenches A through G. Hearths represented by
ash, burned fishbone and charred earth were common, seen in all trenches
but B, which had barely intersected the edge of the midden. Outside the
hearths, midden consisted of charcoal bits, rotted plant material and anthro-
pogenic pebbles in a layer usually under 2 cm thick (4/5 inch). The layer
was not entirely continuous, appearing for several meters and then disappear-
ing. It was often compact and very level.
Another set of silt and sand layers overlay CL 1, again almost celtainly
a single flood's deposit. In most areas, the uppermost midden, CL 0, was
scattered only lightly over this silt surface. Hearths occurred in this
layer only in Trench C.
At least three flood layers capped the sequence, each thicker than the
one below. First came a fine silty sand, then fine sandy clayey silt and
finally, a dense clayey silt. Only the uppermost layer showed any soil
development, and that was an entisol (incipient soil) mixed by plowing.
There also had been very few disturbances to any of the layers. Root casts
and rodent burrows were nearly absent and no soil faulting was observed.
Trench J was equally devoid of disturbance.
Profiles were drawn of one wall from each trench in which midden had
been observed, soil samples were taken of each geologic and cultural layer
and charcoal was collected for radiocarbon dating. Artifacts were found
34
TRENCH E (West Watt)
o c 0
0000 o 0 0 a o o ° 00,00
0. 0 0•• 0 0 0• o o° 0 ° o e o,
o, 0 C 0 • 0° o 0 o 0
Legend
CLAY LENS
TAN SILTS AND FINE SANDS
CHARCOAL FLECKS AND SMEARS
ASH AND BURNED BONE
GRAVEL
CHARCOAL LENS
Figure 7. Geologic stratigraphy of trench_E,
45KI51. Profile is 2 m wide.
0
o° ° 0O_ —�°
CL -1
—C L-2
35
only in Trench A (nails, glass and a polished bone tube), but because they
had come from backhoe piles, the origin of these objects could not be con-
firmed.
The entire site was mapped with trench locations determined relative
to concrete datum points (Figure 6, Datums A, B, C) which were tied into a
City of Renton bench mark ( #609).
SITE EVALUATION
The dense fire - riddled deposits in Trench J and the many hearths and
compact, level nature of CL 1 in several other trenches indicated that some
sort of dwellings had existed here. Because at least the supposed building
cut by Trench J was thought to have been quite large, the site appeared to
have been a winter village of plank houses. At the time, unaware that Trench
J deposits were a different age from midden layers in all other trenches, we
believed that this "village" clearly covered nearly three acres of Parcel A
and extended north onto an adjacent field.
The village site was nearly undisturbed, a•rarity for any Puget Sound
site, and therefore was certainly quite recent. Its presence at the modern
bank of the Black River and clear evidence that the midden was deposited
during the historic sequence of meander development all corroborated this
supposition. On this basis, 1 estimated that the site could be no older than
500 years and was likely to be much more recent.
Although many winter village sites are known from historic reports and
many more villages must have existed in prehistoric time along ancient river
channels, very few such sites have been confirmed by archaeologists and none
as well preserved as 45K151 had even been recorded in Lower Puget Sound.
These facts in themselves made the site very valuable scientifically,
but there was an additional factor as well. The site in all areas but J con-
sisted of thin deposits separated by single floods. This fact showed that
the site had been occupied only briefly and that there was probably less than
a year's elapsed time between the deposition of each cultural layer. What
this meant was that, if the site was excavated, the pattern of village life,
revealed by material residue, would not have been obscured by changing
patterns of human activity as they shifted over the site throughout many
generations. We would see Duwamish life as it had existed for only a few
36
years or as little as a season, represented in artifact patterns little al-
tered by what one archaeologist has called cultural transformation processes
(Schiffer 1976). Study of the site would clearly provide people with a
fairly clear picture of what we all suspected then to have been the prehistoric
Duwamish way of life.
My conclusion, therefore, was as follows: "Destruction of this site
without adequate mitigation, would be a tremendous loss to the cultural heri-
tage of the Seattle- Renton area" (letter from Chatters to Zimmerman, 24 July
1979).
The Office of Public Archaeology then proposed a plan to mitigate_the
adverse impacts of development on 45K151. The plan included intensive coring
of the site and large scale excavation of portions of the site area. The
plan was verbally approved by the then Deputy Historic Preservation Officer
of Washington, Jeanne M. Welch, and a contract was signed between the Uni-
versity of Washington and CHG for the implementation of that plan. Work com-
menced in September 1979.
MITIGATION PROCEDURES
INTENSIVE CORING
In floodplain deposits, the extent and depth of archaeological layers
and, to some extent, the patterning within them can be mapped through the
removal of soil cores at close intervals (Chatters 1981). Cores taken from
45K151 were spaced 10 m apart on grids measured from Datum Points A and C for
the area along Hardie Avenue. A new Datum, D, was set up near Trench J and
used as a base point for the coring grid in that area (Figure 6). Wherever
possible, cores were taken to gravel and the depth and character of each
midden layer was recorded.
Six midden concentrations were identified through the analysis of coring
data. Each had been conveniently intersected by one or more test trenches.
Five of the concentrations were parallel with Hardie Avenue, along the level
crest of a gravel bar, then only recently abandoned by the Black River. Con-
centrations were spaced at intervals of between 10 and 20 m (35 - 65 feet)
and were from 200 to 300 m2 in area. No concentration was very dense. This
area is called 45K151A. The sixth concentration, Area "D ", lay across a slight
swale from "A ", on anolder gravel bar. Midden was much thicker here and fires
were numerous. Site 45K151D covered about 700 m2.
Maximum elevations of midden deposits were: Area "A" at6.7 m a.s.l. (22
inches) and Area "D" at6.5 m a.s.l. (21.3 inches).
EXCAVATION
Site 45K151 was originally to be investigated only during the fall of
1979, but with permission from CHG, additional work was done in July 1980.
Excavation strategy consisted of (1) choosing areas for study which held the
greatest promise of undisturbed living deposits, (2) stripping the overlying
silt and sand with a bulldozer and (3) horizontal exposure of midden areas
totalling approximately 400 m2. During excavation, an effort was made to map
all discrete features (fire hearths, pits), post patterns and the extent of
the midden itself. Fine mesh screens (see below for details) were used to
sift midden so that as many tools, bones and plant fragments as possible could
be collected and excavators were required to save midden samples from each 1 m
square area from which seeds and other tiny organic artifacts could later be
38
floated. Finally, a photographer kept a pictorial record of work in progress,
including important finds such as features and post patterns.
Because of the differences between the midden deposits in Area "A" and "D"
and improvements in techniques between 1979 and 1980, excavation techniques
differed from area to area and year to year. Details of these differences
are discussed below.
PROCEDURES 1979: 45K151A
Silts and sands overlying portions of two midden concentrations in
45K151A were stripped to within 15 to 30 cm (6 to 12 inches) of the midden and
a trench was bulldozed between the two exposures. The northerly area, which
had been opened around Trench E was 10 X 14 m in extent, the southern, to
either side of Trench C was slightly larger. The two areas were named "A"
North and "A" South (Figure 8).
"A" North was chosen because CL 1 was here a thin, compact, level band
with at least one fire hearth, reminiscent of a house floor. It was totally
undisturbed and CL 2 was clearly present in the gravels below. Reasons for
choosing "A" South were similar. The midden was less pristine and level, but
more hearths could be seen in the original trench and might provide more data
on the plants and animals in the inhabitants diet.
Both areas were gridded at 2 m (6.5 feet) intervals, but only "A" North
could be excavated. Professional excavators skim shoveled remaining overburden
down to the uppermost cultural layer and began working with small hand tools.
CL 0 and CL 1 were both completely exposed, their visible features and contents
mapped and the midden carefully removed. Post patterns in the underlying silt
layers were then mapped. Photographs were taken of the upper surface of CL 1
in each 2 X 2 m unit and also of the surface of the underlying silt. A 1/16
inch mesh window screening was used to search midden for artifacts and all bone,
glass, stone and metal artifacts and fire broken rock were sent to the labora-
tory for analysis. Pieces of charcoal, 0.5 cm or larger, were also saved.
Smaller plant fragments were to be obtained from the 10 X 10 cm2 midden samples
taken from each square meter.
Artifact provenience was recorded by the square meter when objects were
not found in situ and elevations were measured relative to the "A" North Datum
using both a transit and line levels. Balks (walls of soil) were left along
39
45 -KI -51
Excavations
-7.5
.
s •
®A N
• , 4 A North\
Bulldozer
Stripped
Areas
• 4ts• ; : A Sout
LEGEND
Backhoe Trenches
0 Excavations
• • -• Intensively Cored Only
® Datum Point
Midden Concentrations (Predicted;
Figure 8. Map of excavated areas, 45KI51, showing midden
concentrations, backhoe trenches, cored areas and
horizontal exposures.
40
east -west grid lines to preserve a record of the geologic and cultural
layering of this site.
At the end of the 1979 season, 88 m2 each of CL 0 and CL 1 had been ex-
posed in "A" North. During monitoring in 1981, I quickly exposed an additional
4 m2 of CL 1 to clarify information on site patterning.
PROCEDURES 1979: 45KI51D
The whole of this area was skimmed by bulldozer to 10 cm (4 inches)
above midden. A grid was then laid out and excavation progressed much in
the same way as with "A" North. Midden thickness and complexity however,
occasioned some tactical variations. Screen size was 1/8 inch here, except
for the greater of one fourth of each square meter or one bucket load of fill
from each 1 m2 area, which was sifted through window screening. One half
of each feature was also fine screened, with the remainder saved, as before.
Balks were retained on all grid lines.
To gain an understanding of the midden deposit and its stratigraphy we
began by excavating a row of pits along the west side of Trench J and extend-
ing north. When the extensive distribution of the silt layer between upper
and lower middens became apparent, additional pits were excavated west of the
original trench to the surface of what we thereafter called Feature 3 silt.
After a post pattern representing the house wall appeared, other pits were
opened to expose more wall sections, an activity we were engaged in at season's
end. Only 135 m2 of the upper midden layer (CL 1A) and 48 m2 of the lower
(CL 1B) had been removed, not nearly enough for us to understand this area of
the site.
Profiles were drawn for all 4 walls of each pit that had been excavated
through both midden layers and excavators backfilled the site.
PROCEDURES 1980: AREA "D"
For scheduling reasons, all additional work at 45K151 had to be completed
in one month and three questions were to be answered during this time: (1)
what was the size and extent of the house in Area "D" and how did people pattern
their lives within it, (2) did Area "A" South contain structures like that found
in "A" North and (3) did "A" South contain artifacts not found in "A" North.
41
The Area "D" house was definitely large, original estimates were around
10 X 20 m (33 X 67 feet) and an area of nearly 200 m2 would have had to be
removed to expose the whole floor. Deposits in "A" South added at least 120 m
to the total and it was obvious we could not answer our questions using the
painstaking techniques of the previous year. The solution to this dilemma
was two fold. First, the areas would have to sampled statistically to insure
complete coverage and allow us to make accurate statements about site pattern-
ing and second, we must dig faster.
Before sampling the site, we took cores at each point on the two meter
grid. Because midden outside the house, a sticky black mixed deposit, differed
from the often laminated anthropogenic sands of the house interior, it was thus
possible to map the probable extent of both house floor and exterior midden
deposit from core data (Chatters 1981).
The house and exterior midden were then divided into statistical strata
(areas assumed to be internally homogeneous) and a random 80 percent sample
was chosen for excavation. This sampling scheme is known as stratified ran-
dom sampling and takes into account the fact that people pattern their activi-
ties in space and aren't likely to leave the same stuff behind in all parts
of the house or its grounds (cf Mueller 1974). Fortunately, an unexpected
army of volunteer laborers appeared for this project and the entire upper
house layer was exposed and mapped. Based on this map, a more refined statis-
tical stratification could be devised and used to select the 50 percent
sample excavated from the lower cultural layer (Figure 9).
Excavation was facilitated by two changes in procedures. First, arti-
facts found below the upper midden surface were not mapped and only unusual
objects or tools were mapped in situ. Secondly, excavators studied profiles
of cores taken at the corners of a new grid square before excavating, thereby
learning how much midden to remove before reaching the Feature 3 silt layer
at the base of CL 1.
These changes speeded excavation to the extent that 166 m2 of the upper
layer and 140 m2 of the lower were removed in four weeks (Figure 10).
PROCEDURES 1980: 45KI51A
Total success at Area "D" was achieved at the expense of "A" South and
it was only possible to intensively core this area. Again cores were taken
42
45 -KI -51 D
CL 1B
Excavated Sample
—20N
20W
10W
Figure 9. Plan map of 45K151, Area "D" excavations showing
the location of units excavated through CL 1B.
45 -KI -51 D
Boundary of Excavations
E 1979
❑ 1980
43
20N
0 'm
L DATUM
20W
10W
Figure 10. The extent of excavation efforts; 1979 and
1980 at 45K151, Area "D ".
44
at 2 m intervals and profiled. Cultural layers 0 and 1 were both extensive
here, as shown in Figure 11 and had nearly coincident distributions.
Although it had not been possible to improve the Area "A" artifact col-
lection in 1980, 1 was present in 1981 to monitor utility trenching through
"A" South. With an assistant and cooperation from the heavy equipment crew,
I was able to quickly trowel through 20 m2 of CL 1 in Area "A" South and in-
spect midden removed from a much larger area. No new kinds of artifacts,
in fact, few artifacts of any kind could be found. Two new species of shell-
fish and some well preserved mammal bone did turn up and will be discussed
under Faunal Remains.
During breaks in the monitoring operation I was also able to make seven
additional shovel test holes in the south edge of "A" North and thereby con-
firm my belief that the midden contained a single, small dwelling (see Features
and Intrasite Patterning).
SUMMARY
By using heavy equipment, problem oriented coring and horizontal excava-
tion techniques, crews from the Office of Public Archaeology were able to
expose and record 393 m2 of one cultural layer each in Areas "A" North and "D"
and a combined total of 228 m2 from a second layer in the two areas. In addi-
tion, 128 m2 of Area "A" South were intensively cored and this concentration
was shown to be much like the contemporary "A" North.
Extent of Cultural Deposits
Area A South
•
•
•
45
•
Coordinate A30S 1 OW
•
LEGEND
-- Boundary of Cultural Layer 0
ES Fire Areas CL 0
- -- Boundary of Cultural Layer 1
Fire Are CL 1
• Core Hole
N
Figure 11. The extent of midden layers CL 0 and CL 1
at 45K151, Area "A" South, as revealed by coring.
The probable location of the structure in which
they were deposited is shown. The interval between
core holes is 2 m.
DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS
Artifacts and records collected during the excavation phase of research
-were processed and analyzed in four stages: 1) Primary Processing; 2) Sec-
ondary Processing; 3) Object Analysis and; 4) Spatial or Distributional
Analysis. Results of these procedures were used to achieve the interpre-
tations of when and by !whom each area of the site was occupied and of the
structure of human actilvities in and around both site areas.
PRIMARY ANALYSIS
A field laboratory, was maintained on or near the work -site during both
excavation seasons and a full time laboratory technician was employed there.
The purpose of this laboratory was to clean and sort artifacts coming in
from the excavations, where necessary to conserve highly perishable arti-
facts, to maintain files of excavation records and to catalog artifacts.
Bone was almost always found in poor condition, having the consistency
of damp oatmeal. If any bone was to reach the faunal analyst it was, there-
fore, necessary to treat bone specimens with a weak solution of white glue
and water to preserve them. Rusted iron artifacts, extremely friable and
prone to total disintegration, were also treated in this manner, when neces-
sary, and were always wrapped in stiff aluminum foil. Plant fiber also
occurred as artifacts under rare circumstances and was conserved with
polyethylene glycol.
Field records maintained by the lab technician included catalogs of
artifact bags and bulk midden samples and files of feature forms, meter unit
forms (the sheet kept on each 2 x 2 m square) and photographic records.
Artifacts other than fire broken rock, charcoal and unworked bone were
all cleaned and given individual catalog numbers. Where possible numbers
were written on the object itself, otherwise the envelope or vial containing
the artifact bore this designation.
SECONDARY PROCESSING
Back in the OPA laboratories at the University of Washington campus,
part time technicians completed the data processing tasks. All bone, stone,
shell and charcoal not listed in the artifact catalog were sorted, counted,
weighed and distributed to various analysts for study. During 1979 fire
broken rock was counted', weighed and discarded at this time, but in 1980 we
streamlined our procedures by completing this step in the field.
47
The major task during this processing stage was the separation of bulk
samples into their floral, faunal and abiotic compartments. In 1979 each
sample was screened through a seive (mesh size 1/32 ") and the residue sorted
by hand. The followingl year this tedious process was replaced by water and
chemical flotation techniques (cf. Bodner and Rowlett 1980; Schock 1971;
Struever 1968).
OBJECT ANALYSIS
Once secondary processing was underway, artifacts, unworked bone and
plant remains (primarily charcoal) were distributed to the individuals
responsible for their analysis.
ARTIFACTS
Artifact analysis consisted of the categorization and study of discrete
objects (such as tools) and features (concentrations of objects, soil lenses
or stains which cannot be attributed to natural processes). Discrete object
analysis proceeded along rather simplistic, traditional lines and consisted
of: 1) sorting objects by material;2) grouping them according to their formal
characteristics;3) identifying (actual labeling) each according to the cat-
egories of tools and decorative items either reportedly in use by the 19th
century inhabitants of Puget Sound or now used by the area's Euro- American
inhabitants. Identification of artifacts according to ethnographic records
obviously implies an analogy between the archaeological find and an ethno-
graphically used object!. In most cases, such analogy obfuscates efforts to
learn about past human life as something different from the present (cf.
Dunnell 1978). However, in cases such as this, where ethnographic accounts
describe Indian life as it existed at or near the time of site occupancy,
analogy can be more or less accurately applied (cf. Binford 1967; Hayden
1978). This general approach was augmented by two additional analyses:
a wear pattern analysis of chipped stone tools and a technological analysis
of copper.
Chipped stone tools were classified according to a paradigmatic classi-
fication (cf. Dunnell 1971) in which four wear- related dimensions were
initially used: kind of wear, shape of worn area, location of wear and
facility of wear (i.e. whether worn on one or both sides of an edge). When
only 23 worn stone tools could be found, the classification was collapsed
48
to two dimensions (location and faciality) so that a meaningful number of
objects could be assigned to each category. Ultimately, there were only
three classes used: bi,facial edge wear, unifacial edge wear and point
wear. In the artifact idescriptions presented in the next chapter, form
categories (e.g. scraper, arrow point, biface) take precedence over wear
categories. The only objects referred to as worn flakes are those which
have not been intentially shaped following their removal from the parent
rock. In actuality, this only breaks up one tool category, unifacially
worn tools, into scrapers (shaped) and unifacial edge worn flakes (unshaped).
The manufacturing process used to produce wire fishhooks from sheet
copper was ascertained :through careful study of copper scraps and finished
implements. This process is described and illustrated in the Artifacts
chapter.
FAUNA
Faunal remains were first sorted into bone and shell, then into iden-
tifiable and non - identifiable groups. 1 identified the shell using my per-
sonal comparative collection of Puget Sound invertebrates. Mammal bone was
identified by Douglas Brewer and R. Lee Lyman, both with the aid of collec-
tions housed at the Thomas Burke Memorial Washington State Museum. Virginia
Butler, a University of Washington graduate student, is attempting to iden-
tify the fish, but because of the level of expertise required by her task,
has not yet completed the analysis. The few bird bones have not been
studied.
All mollusks were identified as were all bones from A North, but be-
cause of their far greater abundance, mammal and fish bones from Area D
could only be sampled. A stratified random strategy was again used to
take a 10 percent sample for study: Three exterior midden areas and
twelve separate areas of the house floor comprised the sampling strata
(Figure 12). The individual strata were chosen on the basis of four cri-
teria: 1) inside or outside house; 2) exterior refuse midden present or
absent; 3) distance from walls inside the house and 4) areas of artifact
concentration inside the house. Criterion 4 is itself based primarily on
bead densities, this artifact category having been by far the most pop-
ulous. Preliminary spatial analysis had indicated four artifact (bead)
45-Ki-51-D
1979 & 1980 Excavations I
Sampling Strata
O 2 Meters
_ 1
49
—20N
—18N
16N
40N
7
/
/
/
/
— 8N
—6N
—4N
— 2N
1 1
22w tow law IliW 14w
12W low
sw
sw
/
4W 2W
Figure 12. Sampling strata used to choose floral and faunal
remains for analysis, 45K151 "0 ".
▪ o- w
— 2S
— 4S
— 6S
14
50
concentrations, in the southwest, center and northeast portions of the
house floor. Strata 1 through 4 represent separate artifact concentrations
which were in turn presumed to represent social units within the house. As
I shall demonstrate later (Features) this assumption was not entirely
correct, but the strata nevertheless closely approximate individual dwelling
areas of the families who inhabited the house.
Flora
David Rhode, a University of Washington graduate student and an ex-
perienced floral, analyst sorted and identified the plant remains from all
45K151A North Features and from a 20 percent sample of Features in Area D.
His efforts were aided by herbarium collections from the University of
Washington Botany Department. Thus far, he has only identified seed and
root fragments, but will soon complete the analysis of wood charcoal as
well.
SPATIAL ANALYSIS
Much can be learned about the lives of a site's former inhabitants
from careful study of the patterned distributions of artifacts, floral and
faunal remains, and features. At 45KI51, spatial analysis, as this kind
of study is called, consisted of: 1) defining structures_from post pat-
terns or artifact distributions; 2) recognizing internal divisions within
the structures on the basis of feature distributions and ethnographic
accounts of village life and; 3) studying the differential artifact content
of each of these divisions. Details of this analysis, predicated as they
are upon the recognition of structures, are presented in the chapter
entitled "Intrasite Patterning ".
Features
Two general kinds of features were recognized and these were analyzed
separately: 1) discrete features consisting of more or less continuous
stains or lenses of artificial origin and; 2) post mold patterns unassoci-
ated with discrete features. Discrete features were classified according
to dimensions of form and content. The following were specifically con-
sidered: 1) the presence or absence of a pit; 2) the presence or absence
of ash and charred bone; 3) the presence or absence of evidence of in situ
51
burning; 4) the presence or absence of a clay lining and; 5) the presence
or absence of a large quantity of seeds. Post patterns are simply cate-
gorized by their resemblance to ethnographically reported structures.
ARTIFACTS
The total number of artifacts from all excavations at 45K151 is 1820.
Of these, 110 are from "A" North and 1708 from Area "D ". The remaining two
objects were found in Area "A" South. In Area "D ", this figure breaks down
by material as 571 glass (including beads), 112 iron, 37 copper, 36 bone,
1 shell, and 151 stone objects. The Area "A" North inventory is also pre-
dominantly glass, 68, plus 42 objects of iron, and one each of copper, ceramic,
stone and lead. Bits of red pigment were abundant in both areas, but are not
counted here.
Artifacts are tabulated in Table 2 according to material and descriptive
category and are described briefly, by area, below. All measurements are
given in centimeters (1 cm = 0.394 ").
GROUND STONE AREA "D"
WHETSTONES
Whetstones are pieces of tabular stone or flat river cobbles exhibiting
abrasive wear on one or more surfaces. Nine whetstones were found in Area
"D ", seven in the upper cultural layer, CL la, two in the lower, CL lb. Of
these, only two are made from sandstone; the others are andesite or basalt
(Figure 13a). The whetstone shown in Figure 13 is also extensively battered
along one edge and evidently served as a hammer as well as a whetstone.
Widths ranged from 5 cm to 7.5 cm and lengths of whole specimens from 8 cm
to 11 cm.
"ADZE" FRAGMENTS
Two pieces of ground nephrite were recovered. One (Figure 13b is a
squared off piece 1.3 cm thick, 4 cm wide and 5.2 cm long. The working edge
had been broken away. The second fragment is merely a flake broken from a
tool edge during use. Both are from CL 1A.
PIPE FRAGMENT
One fragment of a ground argillite object was found in overburden near
the upper surface of CL 1A. Probably the butt of a smoking pipe, this object
is 1.0 cm thick with a nearly rectangular cross section and is 2.5 cm high at
the butt, tapering to 1.7 cm at the broken end. A 0.5 cm hole has been
drilled completely through it (Figure 13c).
53
Table 2. •Artifacts recovered from 45K151, presented by material.
Iron
Area Stratum
Hook
CD
o01 0 .-
(o _a 1
3 I4 m z Z
a
w
- a
L N C
Arrow Point
I
M C
c a
•- E
+J C1
(0
LL L.
m
L
+J a a
(0 +-1 .0
LL m O
(0
0
1--
"D"
lA
1B
Total
3
1
4
4 16
1 2
5 18
15
4
19
1 3
1 3
1 2 5
1 2 5
2
17
13
39
15
7 2
22 2
82
30
112
"A"
North
1
1
2
10
2
1
1
10
15
42
Area Stratum
0
0
a�
•C
Q1
L C
CO CC
Copper
a
�
u
(0
CO
a
rn 'V a (0
C (0 ' L L .-
(0 a u 3
m m 3 (n
(0
4.I
0
H
"D"
lA
3
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
14
34
1B
1
•
1
2
Unknown
1
1
Total
4
2
3
3
2
3
3
2
15
37
"A"
1
1
1
North
North
C7
—1
0
rt
of
vo
_
D
—'
lD
N
V
VD
N
W
W
--
v,
N-
-+1
W
N
CO
0
V1
N
W
N
N
00
--
V
W
ON
Q�
N
-P-
IV
--.
Vl
W
N
—.
—.
O
rt
1
of
rt
a
"Whetstone"
"Shaft Smoother"
Arrow Point
"Scraper"
Adze Fragments
Biface
Bifacial Edge
Unifacial Edge
Point
Denticulate
Flake
Core
Other
Total
sa >lelJ UJOM
N
rY
O
z
North
v
--1
0
—'
rt
of
on
D
VD
W
--•
N
W
W
W
W
0
W
V
--•
0
N
V
ID
o,
Cr)
rt
1
of
rt
c
a
Bipoint
"Bird Arrow" Point
Dog Tooth Pendant
.Decorated Pieces
Antler Wedge
Metapodial "Wedge"
Smooth Splinter
Scrap
Other
Shell Disc Bead
Total
1194S Pue auog
Z
O
"I
rt
S
= =
D v
= _
D
-1
(D
of
—
--
R. Blue
White
—
O
o
-s
Hudson's Bay
300 42 1 4
Opaque Blue
Transparent Blue
Transparent Red
White
o
c
White
Opaque Blue
Translucent Blue
o
-.
o
o
v
CO
White
Translucent Green
Translucent Red
Translucent Blue
"'
ON
V,
`"'
o
Total
-n
m
m
0
C3
CA
O
C
rt
-
D
=
Z
O
'i D
=
l=
o
rt
a
O
o
-s
—.
--I
rt
0)
--
co
_
>
—
m
N
N
N
N
—
ON
O
o
v
CO
—
w
VI
tO
.g.-
W
N
rt
0)
rt
C
a
Flat Glass
Dark Green
Lime Green
Clear
Ceramic
Lead Shot
Lead Bangle
Total
sse10 aLUUo8
peal 'soiwe.i93 'sse10
a.
56
b.
c.
d.
Figure 13. Ground stone artifacts, 45K151 "D ": an example.
All actual size.
57
"SHAFT SMOOTHER"
Two of these items were recovered, both from CL 1B. One is half cyl-
inder of pumice 2 cm high, 3 cm wide and 1.8 cm thick with a 1 cm wide groove
down the center of the flat side (Figure 13d). The second object is a tab-
ular piece of sandstone 4.6 x 3.8 x 2.2 cm with 1.2 and 2 cm wide grooves
down each long edge (Figure 13e).
SLATE OBJECT
The only other piece of ground stone from Area "D" was an elongated
object of ground slate 14.5 cm long, 2.6 cm wide by 1 cm thick. Ground on
all surfaces, the object was squared off at one end and came to a blunt point
at the other. This pointed end exhibited a small amount of chipping and
crushing, indicating the tool had been used.
CHIPPED STONE AREA "D"
ARROW POINTS
There were 13 complete arrow points and three fragments found in Area
"D ", representing a single general style: triangular with side notches and
a straight to concave base (Figure 14a -f). One specimen has a central notch
in the base (Figure 14f), while another is the re- notched blade of an arrow
point that had been broken off at the neck. Of the 13 complete specimens,
two are extremely asymmetrical, and one reshaped. The rest form two dis-
crete size classes in terms of over -all length, width and neck width. Large
specimens have a mean neck width of 0.98 cm (range 0.9 to 1.2), a length of
2.56 cm (range 2.4 -2.8) and a width of 1.76 (range 1.6 -2.1) (Figure 14a,b,c,).
The five small arrow points have mean sizes of: neck width 0.68 cm (0.60 to
0.77), length 0.19 cm (1.7 to 2.1) and width 1.2 cm (1.1 to 1.4) (Figure 14d,
e.f,). Nine specimens are made from various jaspers; one is of obsidian and
the rest are cherts and chalcedonies. All but two arrow points came from
CL 1A.
Arrow points of similar style occur throughout the west during the late
prehistoric and early historic periods and have previously been found at Old
Man House (45KP2, Smith 1950) and at Tokul Creek on the Snoqualmie River
(45KI19, Onat and Bennett 1968), both of which have historic components.
a.
g
d.
''.
b.
e.
h.
k.
58
c,
f.
Figure 14. Chipped stone artifacts from archaeological
site 45K151, Area "D".
59
SCRAPERS
The term scraper refers to chipped stone tools with at least one straight
or convex working edge that has been chipped to a steep angle on one face only.
Six specimens were found that fit this definition. Three are teardrop- shaped,
plano- convex specimens with the bit at the tear's rounded end (Figure 14g,h).
These are nearly uniform in size: 2.5 cm long, 1.5 cm wide. Thickness varies
from 0.7 to 1.0 cm. Two other scrapers are thin flakes the approximate size and
shape of the nail on a man's index finger. Both were tabular (Figure 14i).
The five small scrapers were made from smooth cryptocrystalline stones. The
sixth scraper was a large flake struck from an andesite cobble (Figure 14j).
Only one scraper, tear drop shaped, came from CL 1B, the rest from CL 1A.
DENTICULATE
This is a tiny, thin, trapezoid- shaped flake, one edge of which has been
systematically chipped in a saw -tooth pattern. Points between flake ,scars at
the worked edge are uniformly 0.15 cm deep and 0.2 cm across (Figure 14k).
BIFACES
A biface is a tool that has been formed by removing flakes from both
surfaces of a stone. Arrow points are a specialized version of the biface,
but three other specimens also belong to this category. Two, both from CL 1B,
appear to be fragments of a single, long object, perhaps a club used to kill
fish and small game (cf. Ruby and Brown 1976). Both are made from iron -rich
tabular schist and both are 1.5 cm thick and taper from a 3.8 cm width (at
the broken end) to a blunt point. The third object is a small fragment made
from chert.
WORN FLAKES
There were only 17 flakes of basalt and cryptocrystalline materials
which exhibited any degree of edge wear. Chipping and hinge fracture wear
were found on the edges of 10 bifacially worn objects; unifacial wear on con-
vex or straight edged flakes was chipping and hinge fracture with occasional
traces of polish. Two pointed flakes with wear on the points only were also
found. Both of these were in CL 1B.
60
CORES AND FLAKES
All other stone artifacts were apparently unused, 89 of these were
flakes of basalt, andesite or cryptocrystalline materials. Many flakes had
bulbs of percussion at both ends, indicating they had been struck by the bi-
polar technique. All six cores were pebbles or small cobbles and all but one
had small chips removed by the bipolar technique (e.g. Figure 141). Cores
occurred in the same variety of materials as flakes.
STONE AREA "A" NORTH
Only one stone tool was found in this area of the site: a flake of
jasper with bifacial chipping wear on a convex edge.
BONE AREA "D"
All worked bone had been shaped by one or more of four techniques:
chipping, grinding, drilling and carving. Bone objects were placed into nine
categories as follows:
ANTLER WEDGE
This is a cylindrical segment from the beam of an elk antler, 32 cm long
and 6 cm in diameter. It is flat at one end and has been beveled at the op-
posite end by some means (Figure 15a). This specimen is from CL 1B.
METAPODIAL WEDGES
Three other wedge- shaped specimens were found, made from longitudinally
split elk metapodials (cannon bones) shaped by chipping. All were found in
one small area of CL 1A.
BIPOINTS
These are thin (0.3 -0.5 cm diameter), cylindrical slivers of ground bone
coming to more or less sharp points at both ends (Figure 15b,c,d). Nineteen
Of these were found, but only eight are complete. These are nearly all the
same length, varying from 2.9 to 3.6 cm. Five specimens are 3.2 cm long and
it is clear that a single size was intentionally being produced, but apparent-
ly in two forms. One form was tapered equally at both ends (Figure 15b,c)
while the other tapered more sharply at one end than the other (Figure 15d).
Ethnographic artifacts with elements fitting these two descriptions are
compound fish hooks with wooden shanks and bone barbs (cf. Croes 1981;
(1:2)
6l
b.
e.
c.
f.
h.
d.
g.
Figure 15. An example of the worked bone and tooth objects
from 45KI51, Area "D".
/
/
62
Daugherty and Kirk 1979; Ruby and Brown 1976:17,19) and the three -part bone
points of the salmon harpoon (Underhill 1944:21). The bone points of fish-
hooks were often symmetrically bipointed while the central bone of the salmon
harpoon was blunt at one end. Bone bipoints, therefore, probably represent
parts of these two classes of fishing implements. Some may also have been
used as awls.
BONE BARB
The salmon spear of Puget Sound Indians had two barbs, one on either
side of the bone point. These were rounded on one side and on the other were
flat near one end and grooved near the other to receive the bone point "(Under-
hill 1944:21). A fragment of one of these barbs was found in CL IA (Figure
15e). It is included under bone bipoints in Table 2.
BIRD ARROW POINT
Two fragments of a finely barbed bone point were recovered from'a fire
hearth in CL 1A. The shaft is a slightly flattened cylinder 0.7 to 0.9 cm
in maximum thickness along which small, squared barbs had been fashioned.
Barbs are from 0.3 to 0.5 cm long, 0.1 cm thick and 0.15 to 0.25 cm high.
They are evenly spaced at 0.5 cm intervals (Figure 15f). This object fits
the description of a bird arrow point in Smith (1940) and illustrations of
bird arrow and duck spear points drawn by Eells in the late 19th century
(Ruby and Brown 1976:14,15,41).
SMOOTHED SPLINTERS
Four pointed splinters of mammal longbone were found in CL 1A. Each
has been smoothed along the broken edges by grinding and through use. These
may have served many purposes from compound hook parts to makeshift awls.
All were in CL 1A.
DOG TOOTH PENDANT
A single tooth pendant was found, the canine tooth of a dog drilled
through the root (Figure 15g).
DECORATED PIECES
Three pieces of worked bone bore decorative markings. One is a fragment
of bird bone with an enclosed set of dots (pits) beside which runs a single
63
row of chevrons. Opposite the chevrons is a row of three X's (Figure 15h).
The second is a piano- convex fragment of burned mammal bone with dots drilled
into both faces. On one side is a line connecting three dots (Figure 151).
A bear tooth with two rows of five dots each is the only complete item in
this group. Dots occur only on one face of the tooth's root (Figure 15j).
Such objects may have been gambling bones of the kind used in the bone gamble
described by Smith (1940).
SCRAP
I have placed the detritis left over from shaping bone tools into this
category, including the chips from shaping metapodial wedges and the ends cut
off shaped splinters preparatory to finishing.
SHELL AREA I'D"
DISC BEAD
The only shell artifact from either area of 45K151 was a disc bead
made from clam or mussel shell. This piece is 1.0 cm in diameter and had
deteriorated to a thickness of 0.1 cm.
IRON AREA "D"
NAILS
Square shanked, wrought iron nails of various sizes appear to have been
the source of much of the iron used by this site's inhabitants. Only one nail
was found with the head intact, a specimen 0.5 cm thick and broken 2 cm below
the head. A second nail was present, but had been re- hammered to a chisel
edge and is described under chisels. Heads of both nails have been produced
by simply bending over one end of a piece of rod stock.
RODS
Pieces of iron rods with square cross sections were the most common,
recognizable iron objects (19). These were found in varying lengths with
thicknesses of 0.3 to 0.5 cm. They are probably fragments of nails or iron
bipoints.
IRON BIPOINTS
Second in abundance to the iron rod, and the second most numerous arti-
fact in CL 1A, was the bipointed iron rod (18). 'Closely resembling bone
64
bipoints, these objects have been shaped by hammering and grinding iron rod
stock into four discrete lengths. The smallest size, and almost certainly
the iron homologue of the bone bipoint, has an average length of 3.6 cm
(range 3.0 -4.2 cm) and a diameter of 0.4 cm. The difference in lengths
between small iron and bone bipoints may be due to expansion of the iron as
it rusts. Three other size modes occur, with two specimens at 5 cm in length,
2 at 6.2 and 6.3 cm and two at 8 cm (examples:Figure 16a,b,c,d,).
FISHHOOKS AND FRAGMENTS
Four complete fishhooks and five fragments which may have come from such
hooks were found in this site area. All are the straight shanked type today
known as a siwash hook. They are barbless and have been made from square -
shanked nail stock.
The four complete hooks show an extreme size range, from two the size
of a modern No. 6 (1.7 x 0.7 x 0.15 cm; Figure 16e,f) to one No. 1 size (4.7
x 2.5 x 0.3 cm; Figure 16g) and a large gaff hook (10.1 x 5.9 x 0.5 cm).
The smaller hooks were probably used for line fishing, but the largest
specimen was most likely a gaff hook of the type illustrated by Eells (Ruby
and Brown 1976:18). All fragments were from hooks in the No. 1 or No. 0 size
range.
ADZE
One large bar of iron had been expanded by hammering at one end and is
identical to ethnographically collected adze blades displayed in the Thomas
Burke Memorial Washington State Museum. It is 10.3 cm long and 3.3 cm wide
at the blade's widest part. Thickness varies, but was probably about 0.4 cm
originally (Figure 16i).
CHISELS
Three small iron specimens had been hammered and /or ground thin at one
end, apparently to create cutting edges. These are collectively called
chisels here, though they resemble each other little in other respects. One
is an iron ship's nail of the type traded extensively in the late 18th and
early centuries (a "chissel" cf. Strong 1959). It is 9 cm long, 1 cm wide.
and 0.7 cm maximum thickness below the head (Figure 16j). A second flat
chisel is simply a 0.2 cm thick, rectangular bar 5.2 cm long and 1.3 cm wide.
a.
•
b.
e.
c.
65
d.
g. .
m.
Figure 16. Some of the better preserved bipoints, fishhooks,
and wood working tools from 45K151, Area "D".
66
The final specimen is small, curved and about the size of the beaver incisors
it may have supplanted (cf. Kirk and Daugherty 1979). Its size is 3.0 x 1.0
x 0.4 cm (Figure 16k).
KNIVES
Two nearly identical specimens fit loosely under the label of knife.
Each has a rounded to sharp point and a narrow (1.1 cm) eliptical blade3.5
to 3.8 cm long that has been compressed into a narrow neck 0.7 cm wide. Each
has been ground sharp on one or both edges of the blade while the stem edges
are dull (Figure 16 1,m).
ARROW POINTS
There were five triangular - bladed, flat pieces of iron, here labeled
arrow points. Unlike the stone arrow points, these iron objects vary con-
siderably in their size and shape (Figure 17 a,b,c,d). The most intricate is
a triangular corner - notched specimen with a long tang at the base (length 4.5
cm, width maximum 1.8 cm, neck width 1.2 cm, tang 0.7 cm; Figure 17a). Three
are triangular with shoulders (Figure 17b) or barbs (Figure 17c and possibly
d) and one of these has a long tang at the base (Figure 17b). Tangs may have
been present on the other specimens, but have been broken away. Blade lengths
range from 3.5 to 4.8 cm, widths from 2.0 to 2.2 cm and neck widths from 1.0
to 1.3 cm. The final specimen is a fragment from a triangular blade.
OTHER FRAGMENTS
All other pieces of iron were found in amorphous shapes and most were
either flat, sheet metal -like pieces or rounded lumps of rust. Two additional
pieces of iron were found, both in CL 1B. One was Y shaped, the other flat
and slightly curved ( "Other," Table 2).
IRON "A" NORTH
With one exception, the iron artifacts at "A" North are the same as
those from "D ", but there is less variety. Most recognizable pieces (10)
are rod fragments. There are also two square - shanked nails and two iron
bipoints, (3.7 cm and 4.8 cm in length).
The single triangular arrow point was long (5.5 cm) and narrow (1.6 cm)
and may have been barbed, thought it was too highly corroded to be certain.
e.
a. b.
67
c.
f•
Vorrun. /9B/
Figure 17. Iron projectile points found at 45K151, Area "D"
(a -d) and the fishhook (e) and bail fitting (f) recovered
at Area "A" North. The bail fitting is shown as it now
appears and as it may have looked during actual use.
68
A single, large, straight shanked hook was found in a pit full of elderberry
seeds (Feature 4) and is, between the No. 1 and gaff hook sizes (6.8 x 3.4 x
0.4 cm; Figure 17e).
BAIL FITTING
The only kind of iron object that had not also been present in Area "D"
was a bail fitting from a large iron pot. Portions of three rivets and the
original pot wall bespoke the purpose of this object. It is shown in Figure
17f both as it was found and as it may have looked during use.
COPPER AREA ''D"
The most intriguing artifacts from 45K151 "D" are copper objects repre-
senting the hook manufacturing sequence. To produce a fishhook from sheet
copper approximately 0.05 cm in thickness, the craftsman first cut the sheet
(Figure 18a) into narrow strips by grooving with a sharp tool, then bending
the strip at the groove until the piece broke off. The strip was then folded
or twisted (Figure 18b,c) and hammered into the form of a wire, with a tab
on one end by which the tool maker held the piece while hammering. Tabs
(Figures 18d,e) were then separated from the wires (18f,g) and bent into the
desired form (18h,i,j,k). Wires may have served other purposes as well, from
bracelets to awls, but neither specimen shows the characteristics of either
of these objects. It is not known whether the copper was hammered hot or
cold, but my experiments have shown cold hammering to be ineffective. It
makes the wire very brittle and weak.
FISHHOOKS
Four small fishhooks were made from copper using the above - described
techniques (Figure 18h,i,j,k). The wire from which they were fashioned ranges
from 0.10 to 0.15 cm in diameter and they are about the size of the No. 6 and
No. 8 hooks used by modern fisherman. The length range is from 2.0 to 3.0 cm,
with three specimens at or near the greater length. Two are 0.7 cm wide at
the hook, the others 0.5 cm. The shanks on two (Figure 18j,k) have been bent
outward away from the hook at the line end one still bears a two -ply twine
wrapped and knotted about this area (18k).
Other copper objects were also made from sheet copper cut, folded, ham-
mered and /or ground into the desired shape.
b.
69
c.
g
d.
f.
e.
Figure 18. The sequence of steps used in the manufacture of
copper fishhooks illustrated using artifacts from 45051 "D".
Flat sheet copper (a) was folded, and twisted (b,c) and
hammered until a wire remained, with a flat tab attached.
Tab (d,e) and wire (f,g) were then separated and the wire
bent into hook form (h,i,j,k).
70
KNIVES
Two copper objects have sharpened cutting edges. One is an elongated
triangular piece of folded and hammered copper with a rounded point (Figure
19a). It is 5.2 x 0.7 x 0.15 cm in size and has been ground sharp along one
lateral edge. This artifact closely resembles the site's iron knives in both
shape and size.
The second knife is in the shape of a k circle with the rounded edge
sharpened. It is 3.5 x 3.5 x 0.2 cm. This specimen is not illustrated
because it is covered with preserved plant debris which is yet to be analyzed.
BARS
These are flat, square pieces of folded and hammered copper which appear
to be finished products of some kind. One is 0.9 x 2.0 x 0.2 cm (Figure 19b)
another is much larger (5.0.x 4.0 x 0.2 cm). The third bar is a broken
fragment.
"BRACELETS"
Two pieces of copper hammered wire and a thin strip with the edges
crimped under, have been bent into about the same diameter and size as a
human wrist. These may have served a decorative function or they may simply
be by products of tool manufacture.
"BANGLES"
A bangle is a flat piece of copper perforated for attachment to clothing.
Three such objects were found. Two were triangular and 1.5 to 2.0 cm in lat-
eral dimensions with perforations made near the edge of one side of the tri-
angle. Figure 19c shows- one of these bangles, folded either during or after
use. The third bangle is a rectanguloid object 2.2 x 4.5 cm. The leather
thong by which it had hung or been attached to clothing has been preserved
by copper salts (Figure 19d).
BEADS
Three rolled copper beads were present in CL 1A. Only one is intact,
the others having been flattened. Bead length is uniformly 2.O.cm; diameter
of the one intact specimen is 0.3 cm (Figure 19e).
a.
e.
— 74w916nL';0y
71
c.
d.
h.
k.
Figure 19, Additional copper tools (a), ornaments (b,c,d,e,)
and detritis left from the manufacture of copper objects from
451(151 "D". Item k is a cedar bark-wrapped, copper awl from
72
COPPER SCRAP
Fifteen folded, hammered, cut and broken copper fragments were found.
Examples are shown in Figure 19 (f,g,h,i,j) and provide illustration of the
copper technology of this site's inhabitants.
BRASS RINGS
The only finished copper or copper alloy objects which had not been
fashioned by the people of this village were three brass rings. They were
uniform in size and shape, 2.0 cm across, 0.4 to 0.5 cm high and 0.2 cm thick
with a plano- convex cross section. They had certainly been taken in trade;
fur traders of the early 19th century kept brass rings and traded them by the
dozen for beaver pelts (Simpson 1931).
COPPER AREA "A" NORTH
Copper was nearly absent in this area of the site, with only one object
of this material found in CL 1. Later investigations of the "A" North exca-
vation area, with a metal detector, revealed two more scraps of copper in
CL 2. One of these scraps was the twisted tab left from wire manufacture,
and shows that the copper technology of Area "D" was still in use during the
occupation of "A" North.
AWL
The most exquisite find at Area "A" North was a copper awl on which the
cedar bark wrapping was still intact (Figure 19k). The awl itself was a 6.5
cm long, 0.3 cm thick, pointed rod fashioned from sheet copper. Figure 19k
shows the folding quite clearly. A cedar bark strip varying from 0.5 to 0.3
cm wide had been wrapped around the object at one end, first laid along both
sides of the awl and then wrapped transversely, with the thickest wrapping
nearest the mid point.
LEAD BOTH AREAS
Two pieces of lead comprise the entire inventory of this metal.
"BANGLE"
From CL 1B in Area "D" came a flat, trapezoidal bit of hammered lead
perforated in the center (Figure 20k) size: 1.3 x 1.6 x 0.15. It has been
broken.
a.
J
73
b. 0-0
•6 d'e
1 O
e. Q I O
f. g. h.
177
Figure 20. A sampler of beads from both site areas shown with
the fragment of a ceramic vessel (j) and lead shot (1) from
45KI51 "A" and a perforated lead bangle (k) from 45K151 "D ".
Beads are strung for effect only; all were found loose.
74
SHOT
Lead from "A" South consists of a piece of spherical bird shot 0.5 cm
in diameter (Figure 20 1).
GLASS AREA "D"
All glass in this area can be placed into three categories: flat glass
vessel glass and beads. The former two categories are small and simple and
have been analyzed as thoroughly as possible. Beads however are so numerous
and so varied in their form and size that full description of this artifact
class has not yet been completed.
FLAT GLASS
Ten pieces of flat glass, probably mirror glass, were found in "D ".
Spatially concentrated, eight of these came from a one square meter area and
almost certainly are from a single, broken mirror. Chance and Chance (1976)
devised a chronology of glass thickness which they had hoped would be useful
for dating historic archaeological sites for which no other means of age
determination could be found. To briefly summarize their findings, glass
increased steadily in thickness from a mode of 0.045" (0.017 cm) between
1830 and 1840 to 0.095" (.037 cm) between 1870 and 1900 (1976:252). Roenke
(1978) has subsequently conducted a more thorough study of glass from historic
sites in the Pacific Northwest and has provided a refined chronology for flat
glass. According to his research, sites occupied from 1810 to 1835 showed a
modal glass thickness of .055 inch; from 1830 to 1840, .045 inch.; 1835 to
1845, .045 - .055 inches; 1845 to 1855, .065 "; and 1850 to 1865, .075 ". A
preliminary notion of the age of 45K151 "D" can, therefore, be obtained by
measuring the site's glass. 1 stressthe word preliminary, because a mirror
or two hardly represents a statistically valid sample. All pieces in the
cluster of eight were of uniform thickness: .155 cm, or .061 inch. The one
piece in CL 1B was the same thickness, while a single fragment of glass found
outside the house area was .13 cm thick (.051 inch). These two figures lie
either side of the .055 inch mode and, according to Roenke's chronology, the
glass should have been made earlier than 1845 and is likely to have been
produced before 1835.
75
VESSEL GLASS
Vessel glass was represented by seven fragments of deep - olive -green
(black) bottle glass of varying thicknesses. Bubbles in the glass and shallow,
parallel grooves and ridges on the outer surfaces show the glass to have been
hand blown. Deep - olive - green, blown - glass bottles are often referred to as
Hudson's Bay bottles but have no necessary connection with that company. Like
flat glass, bottle fragments were concentrated in a small (2 square meter)
area in the Area "D" house in CL IA and represent a single, broken bottle.
CL 1B glass was more scattered.
BEADS
Glass trade beads were the most abundant artifacts found in both site
areas. At Area "D ", 530 beads were recovered, 380 from CL 1A, 140 from CL 1B
and the rest from disturbed overburden deposits. Although all beads have been
looked at, they have not yet been studied as thoroughly as they should be.
Trade beads are an item of great utility for dating early historic sites in
the Northwest and, should I report on an inadequate analysis of 45K151 "D"
beads at this time, I might make descriptive errors that could affect the
work of other researchers. Beads will, therefore, be only briefly described
here, and the reader is advised to use these data with caution.
Table 2, includes a list of beads categorized by manufacturing techniques,
form and color. By far the majority of beads are spheroids made by the winding
process (Figure 20b,c,d,f). Most of these (300) are opaque, robin's -egg blue.
Forty -two are transparent, sapphire blue and there are four white's and one
transparent red. Second most abundant are cylindrical, drawn beads of robin's -
egg blue (104), white (45) or translucent, sapphire blue glass (Figure 20e,g,h).
There are a few true seed beads, all translucent sapphire blue, and two large,
faceted beads. The faceted specimens are opaque and are not cut glass, but
have been produced by snapping and annealing segments of pentagonal glass rod.
One is white (Figure 20i), the other a deep, royal blue.
A sample of beads from 45K151 "D" was sent to Dr. Roderick Sprague of
the University of Idaho, one of the Northwest's foremost experts on trade
beads, to obtain his assessment of the site's age based on these beads. His
reply is as follows:
76
The dates that I will put on these beads are definitely Interior
Plateau dates but should reflect probably less than 10 years time
difference between the Interior and the Coast. The lower level
at "D" consists predominantly of wound beads of the sperical or
(doughnut) shape with slight projections showing at one
or both ends. This type of wound bead in blue is typical of the
Northwest Company period and is equivalent to the material Combes
(1964) obtained at Fort Spokane. I would categorize this group
as being 1800 to 1820. The upper layer at "D" seems to me to be
only slightly later, with a couple of true seed beads. I would
give it a date of approximately 1810 to 1825 (letter from
R. Sprague to J.C. Chatters, February 14, 1980).
A sampler of beads is shown in Figure 19. Seed beads are not included
because of their small size.
GLASS AREA "A" NORTH
FLAT GLASS
There is a single piece of flat glass from CL 1 in this area. It's
thickness is .12 cm or .047 inch. Following Roenke's chronology, this glass
may have been produced between 1830 and 1845. Without other lines of evidence,
little weight can be placed on this age estimate, based as it is on a single
specimen.
VESSEL GLASS
Vessel glass came in three colors in Area "A "; dark - olive -green (black),
lime -green and clear. All clear and dark green glass came from CL 1 at "A"
North, with the two lime -green fragments coming from CL 1 or CL 0 in "A" South.
BEADS
Fifty -nine beads were found in "A" North (Table 2). In contrast with
Area "D ", most of these (40) were tiny seed beads of white, translucent green
and translucent blue. Drawn beads of translucent blue and white were second
in abundance (15). The four remaining specimens included two transparent,
sapphire blue, drawn beads; one red over black Hudson's Bay or Cornaline
d' Aleppo and one large (1 cm), spherical, royal blue bead of undetermined
manufacturing techniques (Figure 20a). Commenting on the beads from this
area, Sprague noted, in the absence of the wound specimens:
The collection from "A" North consists entirely of drawn beads
all but one of which are typical seed beads; but because of
the fact that it is limited to blues, greens and whites, it
77
is will reasonably early. 1 would label this 1840 to 1860....
By 1865 I would expect to find large, faceted drawn beads
(the so- called Russian type) and additional colors, at least
red (letter of February 14, 1980).
Subsequent to Sprague's letter, I discovered a single, red bead in the col-
lection so these beads probably date to the latter part of the period cited,
or 1850 to 1860. Because of the absence of cut glass beads, a later date is
unlikely.
CERAMIC "A" NORTH
There was only one piece of ceramic found in Area "A" North. A fragment
of blue transfer decorated porcelain (Figure 20j).
FLORA AND FAUNA
FLORA
AREA "A" NORTH
Charred and uncharred plant remains from features in "A" North are
listed in Table 3 along with a few specimens identified from collections of
screened, midden charcoal. Only seeds, roots, fruit coats and insect parts
have been identified at this time, so the woods comprising the bulk of each
charcoal sample are not included here. Eleven plant taxa are represented,
most in low frequencies.
Elderberry is the predominant element in all but two samples and bed-
straw occurs in the same number of cases, but is less abundant. Grass and
rose seeds are found in three features and remaining types occur in only one
or two cases.
Note that there are distinct differences between the hearth and refuse
features. Three hearths contain mainly elderberry and the fourth sample is
dominated by grass. Bedstraw and rose are common as secondary taxa. Refuse
Feature 13 contains these same plants, but in this case Chenopodium and
nightshade are the second and third most abundant, respectively. Nearly
all other taxa that occur in hearths occur also in this feature. Feature
12 has only bedstraw.
As I pointed out earlier (Features), maggots are present only in refuse
pile features and may have lived in the garbage.
The grass from Feature 5 is from two large seeded varieties which
closely resemble domestic wheat and oats, but positive identification is
not possible. All other taxa are native and all but one (camas) are common
in the riparian woodlands and meadows of stream bottoms or are colonizers of
exposed ground surfaces (Chenopodium).
Gunther's Ethnobotany of Western Washington (1945) gives Indian uses
for some of the plants found here. Elderberry, Rubus of various species,
and camas were eaten, but there is no record of native peoples using grass,
Chenopodium, bedstraw or vetch as food. The latter two plants had various
uses, from perfume and bath scrubs to magic, and grass was used by some
peoples as a bed for berries being dried on racks. Nightshade is poisonous
and was certainly not an epicurean delight. It may have been used for medic-
inal purposes or have been accidentally introduced into the deposit.
IGeneral Midden + 5 3 1
X,
(D
t
c
to
CD
w
X
CD
t
c
in
c0
N
N
CD
rn
n.
0
r,
-
2 2
(D (D
o, o,
-1 ,
rt rt
T s
- ---
2
(D
o,
-I
rt
7-
00
2
(D
n,
-,
rt
S
ui
rn
0
00
v
ON
w
w
N
Ch
v
00
3
-.
0
3
in
- 0
--
—.
w
N
J
w
--
v
vl
N
Feature Type
Feature Number
Rubus
(black, salmon,
thimble)
Sambucus
(elderberry)
Chenopodium
(e.g. goosefoot,
pigweed)
Galium
(bedstraw)
Rosa
(wild rose)
Solanum
(night shade)
Vi ci a
(vetch)
Prunus
(cherry, Plum)
Camassia
(camas)
Psuedotsuga
(Douglas fir)
Fruit Coats
Grass Seeds
Unidentified Seeds
Maggots
z v
0 0
rt
.
0
o,
o,
0
CD
0
rt
v
1
rt
to
7
a
cD
7
rt
c0
--1 0-
N
x
0
151�5� woJ4 saldwes u!
80
AREA "D"
The floral collection from features in Area "D" is extremely consist-
ent (Table 4). Chenopodium is at least present in every case and is usually
the dominant element. Elderberry is also a common plant. Bedstraw occurs
in four cases; all other taxa only once.
Only grass seed and elderberry are found in the one exterior midden
sample studies thus far. This grass is a smaller form than the probable
domesticates found at "A" North.
Dogwood, huckleberry and juniper were not present in "A" North, but
because all are rare their absence in "A" is best attributed to sampling
error. Gunther (1945) only mentions uses for the dogwood, which some tribes
ate in various forms. Makah ate the berries of Cornus canadensis and Green
River people (Duwamish /Muckleshoot) chewed the seeds of C. pupescens.
DISCUSSION
The results of floral analysis should not be taken at face value. They
may or may not be truly representative of the plants actually used by a site's
inhabitants (cf. Rhode 1981). There are processes other than human action
through which plant seeds and stalks can reach a site and be incorporated
into cultural deposits. One of the most obvious of these is for the plant
to grow on -site and drop leaves, branches and seeds to the ground, where
they might be preserved by charring. Animals, wind and water may also be
an important factor. Likewise, even if plants had been brought into'the
site area by people, not all edible parts were necessarily used as food, nor
sere all species necessarily subject to conscious selection. For example,
dry weed stalks from the site area may be used to start fires as bedding or
to pad some object during use. Selection of such materials many not have
been conscious, with any and all plants having been gathered en masse.
Effective ways for distinguishing culturally introduced (i.e. inten-
tionally selected) plants from those occurring naturally in a site's deposit
have not been devised, but there is a rule of thumb I choose to follow in
matters of this kind. Anything with form or position that cannot be attrib-
uted to natural processes is an artifact (Chatters 1976). For flora this
means that plants occurring out of their natural habitat (e.g. camas) or
81
Table 4. Floral remains from feature and midden samples,
45K151 "D ". All features are hearths.
Feature No.
Taxon
0
0
0
0
E o� i w a
a L ID E >
•ti L a E 3 L O.-,
'Cm J) a) a) a) co -0 L ty L
a a) U N J E -c 0 O 0-0 a a.
O 3 a a) n N a o rti u a 3 -,..1.. u.—
a 01 N N •• •• +-0 cm .0 U C
O .— — m (o 1 a) U0 1 4 0 ry (o •a
Va to d L C ( > U•v U-- U•�
`r �i v v v -...
Unidentified
Exterior Midden 600 78
Midden 15/17W 143 3700
Feature 2 1
Feature 7 35 13
Feature 9 6 2
Feature 12 7 3
Feature 18 2
Feature 27 4
Feature 30 2 6
Feature 38 9 170
Feature 8 -5 25 5
Feature 8 -14 1 1
Feature 8 -16 1
Feature 8 -19 36 3
Feature 8 -24 1 1
Feature 8 -27 2 1
Feature 8 -29 6
Feature 8 -39 5
Feature 8 -43 4
Feature 8 -55 10 15
Feature 8 -71 1 1
1
1
2
1
3
1 5
2
2
1
1 2
5
5
3
5
3
2
1
3
82
in a unnatural shape (e.g. carved wood) or in a quantity or depositional
environment in which they do not naturally occur can be assumed to be cul-
turally introduced. Chenopodium, elderberry, bedstraw, camas and grasses
all meet at least one of these criteria and can be accepted as plants actual-
ly used by the inhabitants of 45K151.
FAUNA
AREA "D" VERTEBRATES
The vertebrates whose remains were most often brought to the longhouse
in Area "D" were salmon _and /or trout, beaver, elk, deer and various duck -size
birds, in that order (Table 5). Harbor seal, dog, black bear, raccoon, horse
and various non - salmonid fishes are present but in much small proportion.
All these species could have been taken in the immediate vicinity by fisher-
men and hunters. The horse and dog are domestic, the former having been
introduced into western Washington sometime after 1750.
The assemblage clearly demonstrates reliance on a very few of the many
animal species available. As reported in the ethnographic literature cited
previously (Cultural Developments), salmon, elk, deer, and beaver comprised
almost the entire Duwamish meat supply.
AREA "A" VERTEBRATES
The faunal collection from this area is extremely small; so small in
fact that to draw any sound conclusions from it would be impossible (Table
5). In general, however, Area "A" fauna are much like those of Area "D ";
deer, beaver and salmonids are still much more common than other taxa. Elk
was absent from "A" North, but bones of this species were common in the
utility trenches cut through "A" South. There is one interesting difference,
however, and that is the appearance of domestic cow. Cattle were introduced
into Western Washington in 1833 by the Hudson's Bay Company but did not
arrive in great numbers until 1841, when a large herd was driven over the
Cascade Mountains (Bagley 1928).
One of the non - salmonid fish species is tentatively identified as long -
fin smelt, and could have been either Lake Washington or Puget Sound variety;
perhaps both.
83
Table 5. Vertebrate fauna from 45KI51 "D ".
Area Stratum
.-1
0
, y
r 1
0 0 y
0 v ti
-1 a
0 •-1 Ca
> U
L O oo
- C) 0 O 0
W • •- c ` • C.) '-
Cottontail
(Sylvilagus)
a)
(Equus caballus)
Black Bear
0
a ^1
$V
U •ri
•-1 01 �1
S4 O • M
E
m uw
0
0 4J 0
a
0, 0 q
D 0 G
c
0
0
u
u
z
(Procyon lotor)
L
0
0
(Castor canadensis)
Harbor Seal
vitulina)
•
Salmon or Trout
Other Fish
"D"
IA
28
4
1
+
23
3
6
A
t
1B
5
6
1
1
16
3
A
t
Total
33
10
1
1
+
1
39
3
9
A
t
"A"
1
+
4
1
1
1
5
t
A
t
North
Area "D" counts represent a 20% sample
+ Taxa not included in the sample, but observed in the collection
t Taxa not counted but present in the sample
A Taxa not counted but abundant in the sample
84
AREA "D" INVERTEBRATES
Six mollusk species, one gastropod and a crustacean were found in Area
"D" midden deposits (Table 6). River mussel and horse clam were the most
common species and butter clam and moon snail were secondary. Based on the
table, one might conclude that there are important differences between CL 1A
and CL 18, but these are illusory. Most of the butter clam, moon snail, and
barnacle came from one small pile in CL 1A and certainly represent a single
episode of food collecting.
The presence of river mussel contradicts reports that peoples of the
area did not eat this species (Buerge, personal communication). Clearly
they did. There is no sign that mussel shell was being manufactured into
any implementor decorative item and whole shells are unsuitable as a recep-
tacle because they crack when dry. All other species have been listed by
ethnographers as dietary items; horse clams and butter clams were dried and
horse clam shells used as spoons or small bowls, the other creatures were
usually eaten fresh cooked at spring clamming camps (see Cultural Develop-
ments), but apparently were also broughtto the main village on occasion.
AREA "A" NORTH INVERTEBRATES
Only horse clam was identified among the shell fragments from this
area. Most of the identified specimens came from a 1 m area of CL 0.
AREA "A" SOUTH INVERTEBRATES
During trenching operations in 1981, I observed and recorded two pits
filled with shell, each containing but one species. Just below the bank
edge of the Black River, some distance from the "building" in "A" South was
a concentration of bay mussel. A pit full of little neck clam occurred just
east of what would have been the building's front wall.
O
c
3
rt
p9J9n039.J suawi3ads
N
rt
Gi
rt
3
River Mussel
(Margaritifera
margaritifera)
Bay Mussel
(Mytilus edulis)
Native Little Neck
(Protothaca staminea)
Backet Cockle
(Clinocardium nuttalli)
Butter Clam
(Saxidomus giganteus
Horse Clam
(Tresus capax)
Barnacle
(cf Balanus)
Moon Snail
(Polinices lewisii)
Total
'ISI)Sh woJj salelgazaanui
Z
O =
-1 D
rt
v
-I
O
rt
o,
—
O
--1
o
rt
o,
•
—
co
>
O
W
V
W
r
Q�
CO
W
m
V
lD
--.
N
—
•
N
N
to
N
Vl
OA
N
°`
Vl
--
0
w
v
as
lD
w
vi
w
t
N
rt
Gi
rt
3
River Mussel
(Margaritifera
margaritifera)
Bay Mussel
(Mytilus edulis)
Native Little Neck
(Protothaca staminea)
Backet Cockle
(Clinocardium nuttalli)
Butter Clam
(Saxidomus giganteus
Horse Clam
(Tresus capax)
Barnacle
(cf Balanus)
Moon Snail
(Polinices lewisii)
Total
'ISI)Sh woJj salelgazaanui
FEATURES
As mentioned previously (Data Processing and Analysis: Features),
features were initially divided into discrete features and nondiscrete,
postmold patterns. The former class was further subdivided on the basis
of five dimensions of form and content. Of the resulting set of 32 classes,
only five had representatives at 45K151 and these are defined and described
below, along with the associated post mold features.
AREA "A" NORTH
All features in Area "A" North were excavated from CL 1. Two features
in CL 2 were located by trenching and coring, but were not studied.
HEARTHS
This feature type is defined as a lens of ash and burned bone which
exhibits the characteristics of in situ burning (a charred and oxidized
substrata). Pits, clay lining, and seed concentrations are absent, although
seeds occur in small quantities among the charcoal and ash. Six discrete
hearths were found in the excavated area of "A" North with a seventh located
by test coring (Figure 21). All seven were clustered together in a nearly
level, raised surface and covered an area measuring 4 X 8 m (13 X 26 ft).
Hearth sizes varied from 40 cm to nearly 300 cm in maximum diameter, but
the larger hearth features consisted of two or more contiguous fire areas
which had probably been used in succession. Most actual fires appear to
have been between 50 and 70 cm across.
Small, charred lengths of cedar occurred in hearths, set vertically,
and small post molds were ubiquitous. Both are probably the remains of
stakes used to hold roasting meat or fish in the manner still used by North-
west Indians (cf. Kirk and Daugherty 1979; Underhill 1944:67).
REFUSE PITS
This class encompasses all concentrations of stone, ash, bone and char-
coal in which there is no evidence of in situ burning. Neither pits, clay
lining nor seed concentrations are associated. All trash piles in this area
contained debris in interlocking lenses, resembling the deposition pattern
seen in historic dump sites.
87
45-KI-51D CL 1
LEGEND
Fire Areas
Trash Piles
g Berry Pit
o Test Holes
• Postmold >10cm
Figure 21. Topographical map of midden layer CL 1,
45K151 "A" North, showing post molds and discrete
features. Total width of excavation, 16 m.
88
Confirmation of the refuse pile interpretation for this class of feature
came from Rhode's examination of feature samples. Maggots from either deer
flies or house flies were present in the two excavated refuse piles, and no-
where else.
Trash features, three in all, occurred in an arc to the west of the
hearth concentration.. Only two refuse piles can be seen in their entirety
in Figure 21; the third was found by test coring only.
BERRY PIT
This was a 20 cm deep, basin shaped drepression, 70 cm long by 40 cm wide.
Lacking ash, burning, and a clay lining, the pit was literally filled with
elderberry seeds. The large iron fishhook shown in Figure 16e, was found
near the surface of the seed concentration. The feature was to the west of
the hearth concentration in an at least partially natural depression. Other
berry concentrations were observed, but all could have occurred naturally.
Marion White (1940) describes the treatment of elderberries by Puyallup
and Nisqually Indians, and in the "Cultural Developments" chapter, that tech-
nique has been presented as a method of berry preservation used by the Duwa-
mish as well. Cooked berries were placed in a lined openwork basket and set
in running water to ferment, where they were kept until all had been consumed.
Gunther (1945) states that the berries were stored in cold water or under-
ground and eaten in winter. The berry pit of Area "A" North, set at or below
what would then have been the surface of the water table, is very possibly
the remains of a fermented batch of elderberries, covered by a sudden November
flood.
POST FEATURES
Although post molds abounded in and among the hearth and trash features,
as a whole they formed no readily interpretable pattern. When only the
larger post molds (those over 10 cm in diameter) are considered, however, it
is evident that they occur in a rectangular area oriented roughly northeast -
southwest and that lines of posts extend along three sides of this figure.
Enclosing a nearly level surface 70 to 75 cm below the Area "A" North datum,
along with all features except the three refuse piles, this rectangle of posts
may represent the walls of a building. As will be shown later, the building
89
idea is supported by distribution of artifacts at Area "A" North. If indeed
this was a house, its horizontal dimensions were 10 m (NE -SW) by 8m, or 33
X 26 feet.
AREA D
LONGHOUSE
At the risk of extreme understatement, the longhouse is the dominant feature
of Area "D "and the most interesting and informative find made to date at
45K151. This imposing structure, 8 m wide and 24 m long, was revealed by
the pattern of post molds, shallow wall trenches and the abrupt edge of a
flood -borne silt layer (Feature 3) that blanketed the house floor (Figure 22).
Midden deposits inside the house consisted of layer upon thin layer of
sand and pea gravel liberally mixed with charcoal, bone and small bits of
fire broken rock. The differences between this material and the exterior
refuse midden found north and west of the structure are illustrated in Figure
23. Toward the center of the house, sands and pebbles of the midden formed
fine laminae, with over 20 individual layers discernable in some places.
Without the sorting characteristic of water laid deposits, it was clear that
these layers were anthropengenic. Hearths and the many small post molds
associated with them were numerous and often occurred in the same spot in
layer after layer (e.g., Figure 23, top). Stones were nearly absent.
Laminations were no longer perceptible in the sands near the sides and
ends of the house, and midden layers were thinner. Except for a few hearths
along the southeast wall, fires were absent in these areas and stones were
rare (Figure 23, middle). Soil conditions changed radically just outside
the walls with the nature of this change varying from place to place. At
the southwest end and midway along the northwest wall were the refuse midden,
a pebbly, silty, highly organic material, rich in fire broken rock, bone,
large lumps of charcoal and broken tools. The sticky, almost plastic texture
of this midden was in marked contrast to the loose, almost dry sands of the
house interior. House midden ended abruptly along all other walls, and a
few thin lenses of charcoal and an almost imperceptible organic stain were
the only indications of former human activity. One hearth and a pit feature
were found in exterior deposits, but intensive coring showed them to be unique.
`
°
•
• ..
90
•
•
•
•
•
.
•
•
"
•
•
•
• ,
•
11.
•
•
•
•
•
• ..
Figure 22. Map of the longhouse feature at 451(151 '/Dn,
"~'
8N /10W
CL 1A
91
Center of House
8N/12W
Olive Silt
Fea.3
CL 16
Disturbed
Sterile Sand and Gravel
12N/12W
CL 1A
Fea.3
CL 1B
Inside House,NW Wall
14N/12W
litm iiiiiiii ,ij
muumuu 11u11111111111II111lOinlll11IIIllI( IIIIIIIIIIl1ui1111• 1 1 III IIIIIIIIHllI;i1:11
1 at i I-II lll•
�b III.I '"�'nuuullum■ ■
nw ", 'll,1I�1l�n1e� 1n1u1 u. uIm !n Il I
IImIIIII4t I IIIW IIIIItI
I It I 1I ■ilhm l
I ��IhI luI u
j
Sterile Sand and Gravel
14N/12W
EM 1
EM 2
EM 3
Exterior Midden
16N/ 12W
LEGEND
0 Black Laminated Sandy Midden ® Ash and Burned Bone
0 Olive Gray Sits • Red Brown Clayey Silt 0 Krotovina
Fire Cracked Rock • Postmold ® Pebbly Sandy Midden Not Laminated
Rock a Sticky Pebbly Midden
Figure 23. Selected profiles from 451051 "D ", illustrating
the variation in midden texture and content between interior
longhouse and exterior midden deposits.
92
Details of house construction are difficult to interpret from post pat-
terns. There seem to be three parallel rows of posts, 3.5 m apart on the
long axis of the building, probably the main support posts of the structure.
The row closest to the northwest wall is the most even, with posts again
3.5 m apart; the other rows have less evenly spaced components. The front
wall, on the southeast side facing the river, must have been laid directly
against the supports, which often stand in the wall trench. All other walls
stood 1 to 1.5 m out from supports. Walls were set in shallow trenches
(5 - 19 cm deep, 20 - 30 cm wide) but these are as likely to have been
caused by precipitation runoff as by human action. Although it cannot be
said with any certainty whether wall planks were horizontal or vertical,
paired post molds along the wall line (one on either side) indicate horizontal
wall construction of the type illustrated by Waterman and Greiner (1921)
Post molds occur in chaotic profusion in the house floor (Figure 23 only
shows the larger ones), making it nearly impossible to discern the details
of internal construction. Still, there are two post patterns that do seem to
represent ethnographically reported features. One consists of two parallel
lines of posts running at 90 degrees from the back wall to the first line of
support posts (the larger line is shown near the western house corner in '
Figure 22). It probably represents small supports for a work sleeping bench,
and was not a common characteristic of this form of house. Otherwise similar
patterns could be observed elsewhere in the structure.
A second pattern is near the center of the back wall and is a line of
three large posts. Perpendicular with the wall, and standing between two con- •
centrations of hearths (compare Figures 22 and 24), this post row may have
supported a partition between families.
Other posts may have held drying racks, cooking victuals and the like
and many are likely to have been temporary.
HEARTHS
There were over 80 hearth features inside the house and three outside. The
60 hearths in CL la are shown in Figure 24, along with outside hearths and
other features. With careful inspection, one can distinguish fire hearth
clusters in CL la. The two most obvious of these are in the south corner
and on either side of the house just south of center. Hearths are nearly
93
Figure 24. Plan map of the features in CL 1A, 45K151 "D ". Note the
tendency for hearths to cluster, especially in the northeast end,
and the pattern formed by pits in the southeast side of the
longhouse.
94
absent in the west corner. Hereafter, the areas around these hearth clusters
will be referred to as house sections I through V, counted counter clockwise
from the south corner. The hearthless area is section VI (Figure 25).
PITS
There were six pits in and around the house, none of which contained
anything but midden and detritis (bone, fire cracked rock). Four of them
form a trapezoidal pattern, with one each near the south and east corners
and the two others set approximately 3 m from the wall, one 6 m toward the
house center from each corner pit (Figure 24). Positioned as they are, these
are probably the locations of support posts removed for use in construction
at some other site. All pits penetrated into the gravel substrate, and their
depth is unknown. Lateral dimensions can be obtained from Figure 24.
CLAY LINED PIT
The single feature in this category was a hemispherical, clay lined
depression 30 cm deep and 50 cm in maximum diameter. It was found near the
west corner, contained only midden and may have served some sort of storage
function.
TRASH PILES
Exterior midden areas are the trash piles of Area D.
AREA "A" SOUTH
"A" South was not excavated but intensive coring provided enough infor-
mation about features and their distributions for me to recognize this area
as virtually identical to Area "A" North. As Figure 11 shows, hearths are
again concentrated in small areas in both CL 0 and CL 1 and the dense charcoal
rich midden that was characteristic of the house floor in Area "A" North
covers an area of approximately 10 m by 13 m. Indications are that this is a
nearly square structure slightly larger than the one seen in "A" North. Note
that midden covers almost the same area in each cultural layer, suggesting
also that the structure in CL 1 remained standing during and after the flood
that deposited a thick layer of silt and stood in the same location to the
end of occupation at this site.
95
Figure 25. -Divisions of the 45K151 "D" longhouse
made according to the spatial clustering of
hearths. EM refers to Exterior Midden.
INTRASITE PATTERNS
Human beings do not behave randomly. That is to say, order prevails
over chaos in the lives of all peoples. To recognize this fact, one need only
consider the layout of the modern town or even a single home. We have places
for sleeping, places for eating, for recreation and work. Just as we modern
Americans habitually pattern our daily lives within our living space, so did
the Indian people who were here before us.
Each individual tool, feature or bit of refuse tells us archaeologists
a little about this patterning, but without some understanding of it, the
pictures we draw of past human life are severely limited. From single things,
we may learn what tools people used, what dwellings were like, what foods were
eaten, what kinds of tools were made and something about how they were used.
But we can learn little about how people interacted with each other and their
natural environments. Consequently, archaeologists have developed a set of
analytical techniques known as spatial analysis, a careful study of the dis-
tributions of tools, features, and other artifacts.
Spatial analysis makes two basic assumptions. It assumes, first, that
artifacts were lost or discarded most often in the areas where they were most
intensively used and second, that natural processes and subsequent human
activity have not acted to move artifacts far from their original positions.
Though specific situations can be found where these assumptions are false,
a garbage dump for example, they are still useful for providing some under-
standing of past human lifeways.
The spatial analysis of 45K151 consisted of (1) recognizing structures
and determining how many structures existed, (2) discerning internal divisions
within structures through observation of feature and overall artifact distribu-
tions and (3) observing the differential distributions of objects within and
between these divisions and between internal house areas and external midden
deposits. The results are quite interesting.
AREA "A"
As I described in preceding chapters, there are at least five small
midden areas arranged in a line along the bank of the now extinct Black River.
Two of these were investigated and each contained at least one house. The
97
house in "A" South was as large as 10 by 13 m (around 1300 sq. ft.) and the
"A" North example measured 8 X 10 m. From these findings, and the evidence
obtained from cores and test trenches in other midden areas, it is safe to
conclude that there were at least five houses spaced up to 30 m apart along
the river bank.
The "A" North house was almost totally excavated. In the center of what
looks to have been house walls was an oval cluster of hearths and outside
against the walls, were three piles of garbage (Figure 21). Unlike the long -
house in Area "0 ", this structure cannot be divided into sections. Rather,
it appears to have housed a single domestic unit.
This interpretation is based on artifact distributions (Figure 26). If
more than one family had used the structure and each had pursued various simi-
lar sets of activities in different areas of the house, we would expect to see
two or more identical concentrations of debris, with patterns of artifact
associations duplicated in more than one house area. If only one domestic .
unit had existed, that is if all individuals had lived together as families
do in Euro- American homes, we would expect one concentration of debris and a
single pattern of artifact association.
As Figure 26 shows, each general class of artifacts occurs in a single
broad band either down the center or along one side of the structure. Fire
broken rock is to the west and south of the hearth circle; bone and shell both
lie along the northwest side and beads scatter from southwest to northeast
down the center. Metal, glass, ceramic and stone, taken together, cover a
rectangular area nearly the exact shape and size of the house itself. Except
for a few pieces of each material in the north corner, iron and glass each
form discrete, overlapping clusters. Only charcoal breaks from the house area
to any significant degree but because of the wind and water portability of this
material, such deviation is not unexpected. This was the home of a single,
domestic unit; a family.
The discrete pattern formed by all classes of artifacts also confirms
that deposition occurred in a restricted space, thus confirming my earlier
supposition that the observed post pattern represents a house.
45 -KI-51 A North CL 1
Artifact Distributions
Fl
Fire - Cracked Rock by Weight
1.5kg
> 1.5kg
Bone and Shell by Presence
M Bone ® Shell
o i° 0
e • e
• ee •
e e e
to ••°
e°e6b11.
, --
Beads
Charcoal by Weight
E < 10g II >10g
• • •_
•
• •
• . •. • •
• :: • • • •
Metal,Glass,Ceramic and Stone f
• Iron O Copper • Stone
• Glass and Ceramic • Lead
Figure 26. Distribution maps of all classes of artifacts
found in CL 1 of Area "A" North.
99
AREA "D"
Spatial patterning in Area "D" was both more complex and more informative.
What we found there was a single house measuring 8 m X 24 m. Six divisions
were readily recognizable within the building as five separate clusters of
hearths and a sixth nearby hearth -free area (Figures 24, 25). I shall begin
this analysis by assuming, after the lesson of "A" North, that each of the
hearth clusters, sections I through V, was a separate dwelling unit. Section VI,
lacking hearths, was definitely something else. There were also garbage dumps
north and west of the house, adjacent to the walls.
Artifacts from this site were numerous enough that the distributions of
different raw materials and tool types can be studied as well as the areas of
broken rock, bone and bead concentrations.
First consider the detritis; fire broken rock and bone (Figures 27, 28).
Both kinds of trash are most highly concentrated where they would be expected,
outside in the refuse heap north of the house. Aside from that, the distri-
butions of these two kinds of material are quite different, almost comple-
mentary. Fire broken rock is most dense in a linear area to the northeast of
center, perpendicular to and extending in from the back wall. Coincidentally,
this is also where the three large posts stood that I previously identified as
supports for some kind of partition. Fire broken rock may have collected here
because the area wasn't used much, or the partition may mark an entry way
where rock was beaten into the floor by foot traffic. Rock embedded in
Feature 3 silt here and nowhere else supports the latter hypothesis.
A less dense, triangular concentration of rock centers on the partition/
entrance area, and a.second, smaller concentration is present in section VI,
at the west corner of the longhouse. By contrast, bone is more concentrated
in II and the adjacent areas of V, with secondary high densities in I and IV.
Bone coincides with the locations of hearths.
Look now at the bead distribution (Figure 29). Notice that, besides
the dump area, there are three main areas where beads are numerous; at II and
V and between III and IV. All high density: areas lie along the central axis
of the building. Beads are rarer, and often absent at both ends of the build-
ing and along front and back walls. Beads are not concentrated within hearth
clusters, but between them.
45-KI-51
Fire Cracked Rock Densities
by Weight
LEGEND
D 500-4000g
4000-10,000g
> 10,000g
100
— 20N
20W
10W
0 I Z nt
Figure 27. Fire cracked rock distribution in CL IA at
45KI51 "D".
DATUM
0-0
45 -KI -51 D
Bone Distribution by Weight
LEGEND
ED 4g -30g
> 30g
102
— 20N
10N
DATUM
0
1
20W
10W
Figure 28. The distribution of unworked bone in CL 1A,
45KI51 "0".
45 -KI -51 D
CL 1A
Bead Densities
LEGEND
52
>2
Ea
103
1 1
20N
10N
Figure 29. Bead distributions in CL 1A, 451051 "D" showing
three primary concentrations down the central axis of the
longhouse.
104
The opposite pattern can be seen among iron, copper, stone and worked
bone (Figures 30 to 33). All show a great tendency to concentrate within in-
dividual sections, but there are differences among the sections as to which
kind of material is most common (Table 7). Stone is most concentrated in I
and IV, but is abundant everywhere else except VI. The apparent variety of
stone in III reflects the low frequency of all kinds of artifacts there,
but stone is still over 40 percent of all objects (Table 7). Likewise,
although iron looks rare in IV and VI (Figure 30), it is equally frequent
among artifacts in all sections (28 - 33 %).
Copper clusters in III, IV, V and VI, but makes up high percentages in
III, IV and VI (respectively). Worked bone shows the strongest tendency to
concentrate spatially, occurring almost exclusively in II and V (where un-
worked bone was also most dense, Figure 28).
The pattern of copper is interesting. This material occurs most where
all other materials except fire broken rock are rarest (111). Also, in III, IV
and V, most of the copper was either tools or the scraps left over from the
manufacture of fishhooks. Section VI copper is mostly bangles, rings, beads
and bits of sheet metal.
These varying distributions, bone in II and V, stone in I and IV and
copper elsewhere, begin to make more sense when the tools made from these
materials are scrutinized (Figures 34 to 36 and Table 7). For the present
analysis, all tools with edges sharpened bifacially or used for cutting tasks
(copper and iron knives, bifacially worn flakes) are lumped as knives. Uni-
facially worn flakes and scrapers (with the same wear on a different form) are
lumped under scrapers. Bone bipoints and the smallest size of iron bipoints
are combined as "small bipoints" in Table 7. The results show a strong tend-
ency for specialization among inhabitants of the various sections.
Section I has mostly arrow points and small bipoints in that order of
frequency. Section II lacks arrow points, has a lot of small bipoints, and
is the only area besides the dump where large iron bipoints occur. The large
bipoints are one fourth of all tools in the section. In Section III, arrow
points and secondarily, hooks comprise most of the tools.
Section IV has mainly arrow points and scrapers and V contains small
bipoints, knives and arrow points, respectively. Tools are virtually absent
105
45 -KI -51 D
CL 1A
Iron Artifacts and Whetstones
•
•
• • •
• •• •
LEGEND • • • • •:
• Iron Artifacts • • •
A Whetstones
L..
•
—20N
• •
• • • • • •
•
•••
• •
•
•• •
•
• • • • •
• •. • • • '•
• •
•
• • •
•
•
•
•
• A • •
• • • •
•
1
I
20W
• •
• •
•
o i zn
I
10W
Figure 30. Locations of iron artifacts and whetstones in
CL 1A, 45K151 "D ".
10N
DATUM
0
45 -KI -510
CL 1A
Copper Artifacts
LEGEND
0 Copper Artifacts
106
0 0
00 0 0 0 0
0 00
—20N
0m.
000
0 1 ON
10W
20W
Figure 31. Copper artifact distributions.
0 i 2m
DATUM
►'0
0-
108
45 -KI -51 D
CL 1A
Bone Artifact Distribution
LEGEND
® Bone Artifact
20N
20W
10W
10N
o / £m
DATUM
'0
Figure 33. This map of bone artifact locations clearly
illustrates the uneven distribution of worked bone inside
the longhouse.
Table 7. Numbers and percentages of artifacts from the six sections.of 45KI51 "D"
longhouse and associated exterior midden, CL IA only.
Longhouse
Section
c
0
Material
d
a
a
0
w
c
0
✓ m
O • 0
Small Bipoint
Large Bipoint
Tools
Chisel /Adze
Whetstone
N
0
i
16
(33)
2
(4)
28
(57)
3
(6)
49
4
(36)
3
(27)
0
(0)
1
(9)
I
(9)
0
(0)
1
(9)
1
(9)
11
rr
10
(28)
5
(14)
14
(39)
7
(19)
36
0
(0)
6
(38)
4
(25)
1
(6)
0
(0)
I
(6)
2
(13)
2
(13)
16
rrr
6
(27)
5
(23)
9
(41)
2
(9)
22
3
(43)
0
(0)
0
(0)
2
(29)
1
(14)
I
(14)
0
(0)
0
(0)
7
ry
12
(28)
7
(16)
23
(54)
1
(2)
43
4
(31)
2
(15)
0
(0)
0
(0)
I
(8)
1
(8)
3
(23)
2
(15)
13
v
22
(33)
6
(9)
27
(40)
12
(18)
67
6
(23)
9
(35)
0
(0)
2
(8)
7
(27)
I
(4)
1
(4)
1
(4)
26
yr
5
(28)
7
(39)
5
(28)
1
(5)
18
0
(0)
0
(0)
0
(0)
0
(0)
0
(0)
, 1
000
0
(0)
0
(0)
1
i
Total
71
(30)
32
(14)
106
(45)
26
(II)
235
17
(23)
20
(27)
4
(5)
6
(8)
3
(4)
11
(15)
7
(9)
6
(8)
74
Exterior
Midden
15
(39)
4
(II)
19
(50)
1
(0)
38
3
(19)
2
(13)
I
(6)
3
(19)
3
(19)
I
(6)
2
(13)
1
(6)
16
Tool percentages over 20 percent are underlined.
( ) Raw frequencies are shown with percentage figures in parenthesis.
Some figures in this table will not correspond to those shown in
Table 2 because of cases where an artifact occurs neither in the
longhouse nor in deposits designated as exterior midden.
45-KI-5 1 D
CL 1A
Fish Hooks and Iron
and Bone Bipoints
K
LEGEND
J Iron Hook
d Copper Hook
Iron Bipoints:
Small A Large
Bone Bipoint
•
L 20N
J
J
1J
20W
■
■ 4 4
4$‘
A
10W
/ 2
Figure 35. Like bone artifacts in general, bone bipoints
and their iron counterparts are concentrated in sections
II and v. Large iron bipoints cluster in one small area
of II and hooks occur in pairs.
10N
DATUM
�0
45 -KI -51
Distribution of Tools
r
i
LEGEND
1 Chisel
GI Adze
• Scraper
• Knife
112
w
oD
•
A 0-
•
\ —20N
20W
1
o I 2m
DATUM
Figure 36. The locations of other objects show the same-
tendency for patterning. Most knives are in section
v while scrapers are more common in 111.
0
113
in VI and a little of everything was tossed into the dump. Most tools in
the dump are broken.
Clearly, the people living in different sections of the longhouse were
performing different kinds of tasks, or at least performing the tasks of
daily life with differential intensity. We may also be measuring degrees of
preference for, or access to, various raw materials.
DISCUSSION AND SUMMARY
Section I is an area where stone was being shaped by chipping and one of
the products of that activity was the arrow point, a high percentage of
that area's tool inventory. Bipoints are also in common use, but here they
were made from iron rather than the traditional bone.
Bone was the favored material in Section II and along with iron, was
fashioned into bipoints. People in this area used little copper or stone,
but had the corner on large, iron bipoints.
All artifacts are rare in III, but arrow points and fishhooks were the
most intensively used. The person or persons living here did not do as much
stone chipping as some others, but someone in this section was a coppersmith
and may have made the very fishhooks found in V and the exterior midden. The
hooks actually found in III were large; all those from V and the adjacent dump
were very small.
Another flintknapper (one who chips stone tools) lived in IV and someone
there also worked in copper. Arrow points and scrapers were the tools most
often used, or at least lost, in this area.
By far the greatest artifact concentration and perhaps the most intensive
human activity was in Section V (these folks may also simply have been sloppy
housekeepers). Fire cracked rock was most dense here (except for the partition
or entry area) and almost twice as many tools were found in this section than
in any other part of the site. Small bone and iron bipoints topped the list
and knives were twice as common here as anywhere else. Arrow points were
also fairly abundant. The favored raw material in Section V was bone, and
the presence here of the only bone arrow point found in all of 45K151 exem-
plifies that fact.
What is .interesting about section VI is the lack of almost everything but
copper jewelry. Hearth features are generally absent and so are tools. Few
114
artifacts are present, period. Contrasting with this general absence of
artifacts and features is the great profusion of post molds found here. Fire
broken rock was discarded here also, but the absence of bone and broken
tools demonstrate that it was not a dump area. The combination of post molds
and fire broken rock in the absence of hearths suggest that the area con-
tained rocks for food drying and storage and that foods cooked elsewhere
by stone boiling were processed here. The presence of jewelry fits well
with this interpretation.
According to the ethnographers, cooking and food preservation were
largely the purview of women, who also were the most fond of jewelry (cf.
Smith 1940, 1949; Swan 1857). The fact that tool making and the use of
hunting, fishing and wood and skin working implements were the tasks per-
formed primarily by men strongly supports the idea that where all these
things are absent from Section VI, was an area used by women for food pro-
cessing and storage.
Another division of space, possibly based on sex, is also indicated by
the complementary distributions of beads and tools. Beads are between
house sections, tools within them. It may be that women met and interacted
in mid - house, between cooking fires and that men gathered and worked along
the sleeping benches.
Spatial distributions combine with the large size of this house and the
abundance of European trade goods to support a final set of conclusions
about the inhabitants of this dwelling. These people were wealthy. The
high degree of specialization among the people of this house was ideal for
an efficient, economically successful household. There were hunters and
flintknappers, a harpooner (shown by large bipoints in II) and makers of
bone fishing implements, coppersmiths and someone who worked with stone or
wood (scapers, Section IV). The large dwelling these folks were able to
afford, the specialized storage area the size of many small Euro- American
homestead buildings, and the large quantity of trade goods possessed by
these people during a time before white traders began to enter the Sound in
any numbers are all testament to the success of this household.
INTERPRETATION
When was this site occupied? What was life like for the people who
lived there; their houses, diet, wealth and social interaction? Who exactly
were they? These were three general questions asked most often by visitors
to the excavations at 45K151. In the following sections, I shall answer
then, to the best of my ability, basing my answers on artifacts, intra -site
patterning and a comparison of the results of my investigations against
historic records and ethnographic accounts.
WHEN
AREA "A"
The age of the five house village in Area "A" can quickly be delimited
by historic accounts compared against the faunal and floral inventory from
the features in CL 1 at "A" North. First, when Government Land Office sur-
veyors mapped the Black River in 1865, they reported a village of 50 Indians
across the river from 45K151, at Tuxudidu. No one was living across from
Tuxudidu at that time, nor do later maps show a village there. In addition,
we know that Erasmus Smithers, who arrived and homesteaded the Tuxudidu area
in 1856 allowed this small village to use a small portion of his land from
that time on. There was no village at Sbabadid (45KI51) then either, so this
village was occupied before 1856.
Second, domestic cow and possibly wheat and oats are present. None of
these domesticates arrived in the Puget Sound area until the Hudson's Bay
Company constructed Nisqually house in 1833 and cattle were not numerous until
the big drive over Snoqualmie or Stampede Pass in 1841. It is most unlikely
that cattle and grain would have been accessible to Black River people until
white settlers began to arrive, some nine years later.
Therefore, the "A" village was certainly occupied sometime between 1841
and 1865 and was probably used between 1850 and 1856.
Two other lines of evidence, beads and flat glass, support this conclu-
sion. The thin glass found in "A" North was .041 inches thick, near the mean
of 0.45 inches produced between 1835 and 1845 and could have been used any-
time after that. Beads, mostly green, white and blue seed beads, place the
site between 1850 and 1860.
116
AREA "D"
Beads, flat glass and the presence of horse in cultural layer 1B combine
with historic data to place this site in the 1790 - 1825 period.
The horse was first traded across the Cascades in around 1750, when
Snoqualmies obtained some from the Wenatchee (D. Buerge, personal communica-
tion). Trade goods, especially quantities of beads and copper, did not begin
to flow into the area until the sea otter fur trade was established in the
early 1790s. Therefore, the site was built and occupied after 1790.
Flat glass from the site measures near the 0.55 inch mode made before
1835. Beads, mostly robins egg blue and made by the winding process, place
the site at earlier than 1825.
Hence, we have an occupancy period between 1790 and 1825.
LIFEWAYS
The "D" village was a single large longhouse 8 m wide by 24 m long (26
X 78 feet), inhabited by five families, each with its own set of fires for
cooking and heating. Each family had members who specialized in various
subsistence oriented occupations. There were hunters, harpooners, bone
workers, flintknappers and copper smiths. The success of this combination
of people is attested to by the site's many trade goods and the large food
storage area in the west corner of the building. These people were wealthy
and would have been considered high class.
They ate salmon and other fishes caught by hook and line using both
traditional, composite hooks and the new metal hooks which they made from
sheet copper and iron nails. Deer, elk, and beaver were the principal quarry
of hunters who shot them with either stone or iron tipped arrows. These
points were also made by household craftmen from stream pebbles and iron
nails, strap or sheet.
Elderberries and the seeds of chenopodium were eaten, along with rose
hips. A large- seeded species of grass was also used'for some purpose. Other
plants were certainly used for food, but their remains did not survive for us
to discover. Various fresh and saltwater shellfish, the latter taken from
Puget Sound, also were consumed.
The activities of men and women took them to different parts of the
house. Women, whose strings of beads must have been awesome to behold
117
(considering how many they lost) worked in the food storage area and got
together in mid -house between the quarters of various families. There, they
may have worked and talked while each tended her own fires. Judging from
the distribution of tools and the debris left from their manufacture, men
worked within their own quarters, perhaps sitting on sleeping benches along
the walls.
This household engaged in extensive trade for European -made iron and
sheet copper and obtained great quantities of glass beads. Considering the
date of this particular house, it seems unlikely these folks ever actually
exchanged goods with white men. Late 18th and early 19th century Europeans
and American trading ships primarily plied the coastline, seeking furs of
the sea otter. This animal was rare in Puget Sound and Vancouver's people
Z
obtained only a few during their exploration. The beaver trade began
after establishment of Fort Astoria in 1801 but didn't get well established
in Puget Sound until after this longhouse had been abandoned. Most likely
trade goods found here were gotten from coastal tribes who traded and raided
in the Sound. Tlingit, Haida and Tsimshian were the most active and are
known to have entered the Duwamish system during the early 19th century.
While some pelts might have been traded, fish was probably the principal
source of revenue for this household.
All things considered, the culture represented by artifacts and features
at 45KI51D closely resembles that recorded for the early historic period by
ethnographers working 100 years and more later.
AREA "A"
This was a village of at least five houses built at intervals along the
crest of a gravel bar that had formed following abandonmentof the "D" long -
house. Unlike the older building, these were not large and rectangular nor
were they solidly built over a superstructure of posts and beams. Instead,
they were small, averaging around 9 X 11 m, unenvenly square dwellings
probably held together with small poles and walled with planks, mats or both.
Each held a'single family; some maybe two.
The change in house size bespeaks a major change in social organization.
Where five families formerly occupied a single building and were economically
interdependent, they now lived separately. There were many other changes, too.
118
Guns were now used for hunting, along with the traditional bow and arrow,
and iron hooks and bipoints had now entirely replaced the original bone bi-
points used for compound hooks and harpoons. Bottles had become common place
and ceramic ware and an iron kettle were also used.
There were new foods, too. Cattle were available at least occasionally
and domestic grain was eaten during the use of one hearth.
The whites were no longer far away at the coast or away down at Nisqually;
they were only a few miles away, at most.
Notwithstanding the many changes, some aspects of traditional life re-
mained, mainly in foods and cooking practices. Salmon, deer, elk and beaver
still provided most meat, and elderberry remainder important. Roasting on
stakes around a fire and stone boiling continued as principal cooking tech-
niques.
This was not a seasonal campsite, but a temporary village lived in for
most of at least one year. Representing summer, fall and early winter seasons
are clams and mussels (summer fare), elderberry, (a food picked in late sum-
mer and stored for winter consumption) rose hips (an early fall condiment),
smelt (a fall and winter run fish that was not preserved, but eaten fresh),
and maggots (denoting warm weather).
During the occupation of CL 1, when all five houses were occupied, life
was interrupted by a major flood, after which intensive occupation only con-
tinued at the "A" South house. Only scattered charcoal and an occasional
open hearth were found in other areas, suggesting that most families left
during or shortly after the flood. According to the engineers who, in the
1890s and early 1900s planned the alteration of the Duwamish Basin, severe
floods most often came in early winter, beginning in mid to late November.
Such a flood, coming after the start of smelt runs, may have ended occupation
at four of the five house sites.
THE OCCUPANTS
AREA "D ": SBABADID
Area "D" closely fits the description of the Sbabadid "village, reported
to T. T. Waterman in the early 1900s by Mrs. Jimmy Moses, of Renton. Accord-
ing to Waterman,
119
Sbabadid, "crags ", on Black River near Renton. There was an unusually
large community house here. Art important man was Kia xtld, whose
wife was iukiblo. His son Stoda was later a head -man. Other
sons were Kwlskedub (called "Tecumiseh "), Xasedut, Tcolusub, and
Sxaedaapub. Another influential man was Kalaktsut (Waterman, N.D.,
names are simplified for lay readers).
Note that Waterman's descriptions refer to a village, but mentions only
one longhouse. According to David Burge, Duwamish Tribal Historian, the
houses of a village, in the sense of an exogamous social unit, were often
distributed at wide intervals along a river. The house Mrs. Moses described
as having been at Sbabadid was in sight of the larger Tuxuduabsh villabe
(Figure 5) and was almost certainly included in Tixudidu. Merely because it
stood on a separate site, Waterman identified it as a separate village. The
age of this longhouse, early 19th century, the fact that no other houses
existed at this site between 1825 and 1850 and the fact that this was a very
large house occupied by wealthy people all support the contention that this
was indeed the single Sbabadid longhouse.
By 1825 and perhaps, as much as 15 years earlier, the house site was
abandoned.
Two explanations for abandonment are possible, given the date. First,
small pox, which struck around 1832 (Bullard,N.D,) may have depopulated the
household, causing the survivors to abandon the site for niches with other
house groups. Second, in around 1800 a log jam formed on Green River (Stuck)
and shortly afterward five high status families moved from Black River to
the Stuck, where they established a new village. This Sbabadid household may
have been one of, or all of, those five families.
If catastrophe had caused abandonment Iwould expect (1) many more tools
to have been left behind than we actually found, (2) the house superstructure
to have remained and rotted in place, and (3) human skeletal remains to have
been present in an epidemic decimated house. Mere abandonment for a better
site would have left only the tools previously lost, occasioned removal of
posts that were still sound, and bodies would have been absent. The latter
set of expectations is met at Sbabadid longhouse and normal abandonment was
the case here. That the Stuck was their ultimate destination is something 1
can only suggest as a strong possibility. It cannot be proven.
120
In December 1856, Indian Agent Paige visited a convocation of Duwamish
who had gathered at "Black River" having returned to that area after a brief
stay at the Port Madison Reservation to which they had been assigned. Under
the leadership of William, headman at Tuxudidu, they expressed their unwilling -.
ness to return to a salt water village of unfriendly Suquamish. Paige re-
ported 14 "large" plank houses in the group, but by spring, most Duwamish
are reported to have returned to the reservation.
Area "A" village was probably part of this 14 house group. It is the
right age - 1850 - 1856, it was temporary, and it was probably abandoned
during winter. Recall that CL 2 includes two midden concentrations (houses),
CL 1 five, and CL 0 only one. Each occupation layer was deposited over a
very short time period, no more than a year. What we seem to have had were
two houses already present before 1856 ( "A" North was one of these), three
more constructed in 1856, and only one still occupied the following year.
This may have been part of the convocation of families at Tuxudidu, William's
village on Black River.
Only one fact is awry; Paige's description of the houses as "large ",
but this statement does not negate my hypothesis, for this was 1856. Settler's
houses were tiny, one or two room shacks during the early years and few would
have been so large as the 33 X 26 foot plank house of a Duwamish family.
Large is a relative term.
By 1857, after the flood, most families did indeed leave for the reser-
vation.
REFERENCES CITED
Bagley, C.B.
1916 The History of Seattle. J.S. Clarke Publishing Co., Chicago.
1929 History of King County. J.S. Clarke Publishing Co., Chicago.
Ballard, A.
n.d. Listen my nephew. 2 Vol. ms. owned by D. Berthol, Orting,
Washington.
Bancroft, H.H.
1878 The native races of the Pacific States. Vol. 1 Wild tribes.
D. Appleton and Co., New York.
Binford, L.R.
1967 Smudge pits and hide smoking, the use of analogy in archaeological
reasoning. American Antiquity 32:1 -12.
Board of Engineers
1907 Report of an investigation by a Board of Engineers of the means
of controlling floods in the Duwamish- Puyallup valleys and their
tributaries in the ,State of Washington. Lowman and Hanford,
Seattle.
Bodner, C.C. and R.M. Rowlett.
1980 Separation of bone, charcoal and seeds by chemical flotation.
American Antiquity 45:1 10 -1 16.
Buerge, D.
n.d. History and Ethnography of the Duwamish Indians. Madrona Press,
Seattle, in press.
Butler, B.R.
1961 The Old Cordilleran Culture in the Pacific Northwest. Occasional
Papers of the Idaho State University Museum No. 5. Pocatello.
Campbell, S.K.
1981 Archaeological research at a Lower Puget Sound shell midden, the
Duwamish No. 1 Site. University of Washington, Office of Public
Archaeology, Reconnaissance Report.
Chance, D.H. and J.V. Chance
1976 Kanaka Village /Vancouver Barracks 1974. University of Washington,
Office of Public Archaeology, Reports in Highway Archaeology
No. 3. Seattle.
122
Chatters, J.C.
1976 The definition of artifact and the distinction of cultural from
noncultural bone in archaeological contexts. Paper presented at
the Annual Meeting of the Northwest Anthropological Association,
Ellensburg, April 1976.
n.d. Archaeological excavations of the Tualdad Altu Site, 45K159, King
County, Washington. University of Washington, Office of Public
Archaeology. Report in preparation.
Chatters, J.C. and G. Thompson
1979 Test excavations: 45- SN -29, 45 -SN -48 and 45- SN -49, Snohomish
County, Washington. University of Washington, Office of Public
Archaeology, Reports in Highway Archaeology No. 4. Seattle.
Combes, J.D.
1964 Excavations at Spokane House - Fort Spokane Historic Site.
Washington State University Laboratory of Anthropology, Report
of Investigations No. 29. Pullman.
Court of Claims
1926 Duwamish vs. the United States.
Dalquest, W.W.
1948 Mammals of Washington. University of Kansas Publications 2.
Dancey, W.S.
1969 Archaeological survey of Mossyrock Reservoir. University of
Washington Reports in Archaeology No. 3. Seattle.
Dunne, T. and W.E. Dietrich
1979 Geomorphology and hydrology of the Green River. A river of
green, a planning report to the King County Department of
Planning and Community Development. Jones and Jones, Seattle.
Appendix A.
Dunnell, R.C.
1971
Systematics in Prehistory. The Free Press, New York.
1978 Archaeological potential of anthropological and scientific models
of function. In Essay in honor of Irving Ben Rouse. R.C. Dunnell
and E.S. Hall, Eds.
Erckmann, J.
1979 Habitat and wildlife assessment of the upper and lower Green
River valleys. In A river of green, a planning report to the
King County Department of Planning and Community Development.
Jones and Jones, Seattle. Appendix C.
123
Franklin, J.F. and C.T. Dyrness
1973 Natural vegetation of Oregon and Washington. Forest Service
General Technical Report PNW -8.
Gaston, J. and J.V. Jermann
1975 Salvage excavations at Old Man House (45KP2), Kitsap County,
Washington. University of Washington, Office of Public Archaeology,
Reconnaissance Reports 4.
Gibbs, G.
1855 Report on the Indian tribes, Territory of Washington, Pacific
Railroad Report, Vol. 1. Washington, D.C. pp. 402 -436.
1877 Tribes of western Washington and northwest Oregon. Contributions
to North American Ethnology No. 1.
Greengo, R.E. and R. Houston
1970 Excavations at the Marymoor Site. Department of Anthropology,
University of Washington.
Gunther, E.
1945 Ethnobotany of western Washington. University of Washington
Publications in Anthropology Vol. 10, No. 1.
Hancock, S.
1927 The Narrative of Samuel Hancock. R.M. McBride and Co. New York.
Hayden, B.
1978 Snarks in archaeology: or, inter - assemblage variability in lithics
(a view from the antipodes). In Lithics and Subsistence: the
analysis of stone tool use in prehistoric economies, edited by
D.D. Davis. Vanderbilt University Press, pp. 179 -198.
Hedlund, J.
1973 Inland cultural sites at Connell's Prairie. Green River Press,
Auburn.
Jermann, J.V.
1977 Archaeological testing at 45-WH -70, Point Roberts, Whatcom County,
Washington. University of Washington, Office of Public Archaeology,
Reconnaissance Report 13. Seattle.
Jermann, J.V., T.H. Lorenz and R.S. Thomas
1977 Continued archaeological testing at the Duwamish No. 1 Site
(45KI23). University of Washington, Office of Public Archaeology,
Reconnaissance Reports No. 11. Seattle.
124
Kidd, R.S.
1904 A synthesis of western Washington prehistory from the perspective
of three occupation sites. Unpublished M.A. thesis, University
of Washington, Seattle.
Kirk, R. and R.D. Daugherty
1979 Exploring Washington archaeology. University of Washington Press,
Seattle.
Lorenz, T.H., G.R. Spearman and J.V. Jermann
1976 Archaeological testing at the Duwamish No. 1 site, King County,
Washington. University of Washington, Office of Public Archaeology,
Reconnaissance Reports No. 8. Seattle.
Matson, R.G.
1976 The Glenrose Cannery Site.. Archaeological Survey of Canada, Mercury
Series No. 52. National Museum of Man, Ottawa.
Mueller, J.W.
1974 The use of sampling in archaeological survey. Society for American
Archaeology Memoir No. 28.
Nelson, C.M.
1962 Stone artifacts from SN100. Washington Archaeologist 4(4):2 -15.
1976 The radiocarbon age of the Biederbost site (45SN100) and its
interpretive significance for the prehistory of the Puget Sound
basin. Washington Archaeologist 20(1):1 -17.
Newcombe, C.F., ed.
1922 Menzies' journal of Vancouver's voyage, April to October, 1792.
Archives of British Columbia Memoir V.
Noel
1980 Muckleshoot Indian History. Auburn School District No. 408,
Auburn, Washington.
Onat, A. and L. Bennett
1968 Tokul Creek. Washington Archaeological Society Occasional Papers
No. 1.
Paige, G.A.
1856 Reports. to Isaac I. Stevens, December and April 1856. National
Archives Microfilm Publications, Microcopy 5, Roll 10.
125
Rhode, D.
1981 Backbearing from the historical record in paleoenvrionmental
reconstruction: An example from the Puget Lowlands. Paper
presented at the Northwest Anthropological Conference, Portland,
April 1981.
Ruby, R.H. and J.A. Brown
1976 Myron Ee11s and the Puget Sound Indians. Superior, Seattle.
Schiffer, M.B.
1976 Behavioral archaeology. Academic Press, New York.
Schock, J.M.
1971 Indoor water flotation: a techniques for the recovery of archae-
ological material. Plains An- thropologist 16:228 -231.
Simpson, Sir George
1931 Fur trade and empire. Harvard University Press, Cambridge.
Slauson, M.C.
1976 Renton - from coal to jets. Renton Historical Society, Renton.
Smith, M.W.
1940 The Puyallup and Nisqually. Columbia University, Contributions
to Anthropology Vol. 32.
1949 The Indians and modern society. In Indians of the urban Northwest,
edited by M.W. Smith. Columbia University Press, New York.
1950 Archaeology of the Columbia- Fraser region. Society for American
Archaeology Memoir 6.
Snyder, W.A.
1968 Southern Puget Sound Salish: phonology and morphology. Sacramento
Anthropological Society Memoir No. 9, Sacramento.
Stilson, M.L. and J.C. Chatters
1981 Excavations at 45- SN -48N and 45-SN -49A. University of Washington,
Office of Public Archaeology.
Struever, S.
1968 Flotation techniques for the recovery of small -scale archaeological
remains. American Antiquity 33:353 -362.
126
Salo, E. and L. Mctt mas
1979 Aquatic resources of the Green - Duwamish River: with enhancement
possibilities. In A river of green, a planning report to the
King County Department of Planning and Community Development.
Jones and Jones, Seattle. Appendix B.
Strong, E.
1959 Stone age on the Columbia River. Binfords and Mort, Portland.
Swan, J.G.
1857 The Northwest Coast; or three years residence in Washington
Territory. Harper, New York.
Turner, H.
1976 Ethnozoology of the Snoqualmie. Privately published.
Tweddell, C.
1953 A historical and ethnological study of the Snohomish Indian people.
Manuscript, (later version published in Coast Salish and Western
Washington Indians III, edited by D.A. Horn., Garland Series in
American Indian Ethnohistory. Garland Publishing Co., New York.
Underhill, R.
1944 Indians of the Pacfic Northwest, Indian life and customs No. 5.
Education Branch, Bureau of Indian Affairs, Washington, D.C.
Vancouver, G.
1801 A voyage of discovery to the Pacific' Ocean. John Stockdale,
London.
Waterman, T.T. and R. Greiner
1921 Indian houses of Puget Sound. Indians Notes and Monographs,
Museum of the American Indian, Heye Foundation, New York.
Waterman, T.T.
n.d. Puget Sound Geography. Completed 1920, manuscript on file,
Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.
Wydosti, R.S. and R.R. Whitney
1979 Inland fishes of Washington. University of Washington Press,
Seattle.